Home

Installation Manual

1. Parione 2 4 2 7 3 1 2 Monday Same as above 2 7 3 1 3 Tuesday 2 7 3 1 4 Wednesday 2 7 3 1 5 Thursday 2 7 3 1 6 Friday 2 7 3 1 7 Saturday 2 7 4 Schedule Times 2 7 4 1 Opening 2 7 4 1 1 Hour 2 7 4 1 2 Minute 2 7 4 2 2 7 4 2 1 2 7 4 2 2 Closing Autoarm The control panel can be programmed to automatically disarm open and arm close partitions at specified times on specified days To program auto arm schedules you must enable the advanced Hour Minute 70 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual menu Select Installer Menu gt Maintenance Mode gt Advanced Menu gt Enabled and press OK Then select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt Arm Schedules Note If reports are sent the user code will be 97 in logs and reports Note If an alarm happens during the period of time when the system is automatically armed the system will not automatically disarm In order to disarm the system after an alarm the user code is required Setting up schedules You can set up a schedule to control the opening and autoarming events for each partition The following example sets a schedule for partition 1 so that 1t 1s automatically closed at 18 00 on a Monday if there is no activity in the building If there is activity at closing time the control panel will try to arm after every 45 minutes of inactivity until the next opening time or until the system is armed manually Ensure the advanced m
2. 140 T0P P1Recewer number 6600 aaa Tcefiitnenumbe O 142 TCP IP Accountnumbe 00001000 143 cf Recewernumbe ee O o awa ces 2 tine nume O ________ 45 SW61Accountinumbe 00000000 __________ 146 SMs2Accountnumber 00000000 154 Accountnumberpariioni 60000000 SSCS 155 Account number porton 00000000 _________ 156 Account number portiioni 00000000 ___________ 187 Account number portoni 00000000 162 TIMERS AND COUNTERS Segment 1 Max Number of network attempts Segment 2 Report attempts for Fail To Communicate 4 Segment 3 Maximum reports in 24 hours TCP IP SMS 20 Segment 4 Time in seconds for overall network attempt NOE Segment 5 Reserved Segment 6 TCP IP Polling time in minutes for PPP connections Segment 7 Maximum time for PPP dialup in minutes Segment 8 Maximum number of PPP dialup attempts Segment 9 Reserved Segment10 Baud rate for CSD GSM download Segment11 GSM line fault RSSI threshold Segment 12 GSM line fault time in seconds Segment13 Control reporting timeout in seconds for secondary 180 reporting Segment 14 GPRS disconnect delay in seconds Segment 15 Maximum Download authentication attempts Segment16 Download authentication disable time 163 SMS 1 Phone number 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 O N fa 55 WN 164__ SMS I Format a _ 165 SMS 2 Phone number 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
3. 153 154 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Configuring the NX 1048 keypad features General options You can configure the LCD display the keypad sounder and combination keys The following example configures the keypad so that all codes are displayed as stars rather than in digits It also configures the keypad sounder to beep when a wireless receiver does not report within the supervision window 1 Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad gt Keypad Features and press OK 2 Scroll to Display gt Hide PINs gt Yes and press OK 3 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Hide PINs 4 Navigate with the NY keys to Beep on RF loss gt Yes and press OK 5 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Beep on RF loss You can also configure the keypad to hide system status This is a system wide option It causes all keypads to display a Please Enter Your Code prompt power on icon and NOT OK to arm icon only after 30 seconds of keypad inactivity There is also an option to display time and date instead of this prompt In order to operate a blanked keypad you have to enter your user code both in armed and disarmed state 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt KP Shutdown Mode and press OK Za Scroll to Enabled and press OK 3 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to KP Shutdown Mode 4 In order to display t
4. Holdup alarm Switching to the EN 50131 Mode changes the 24h Silent zone type into the Holdup zone type Two new events Holdup and Holdup Restore are also added to the system The holdup zone can be activated by a switch a push button or a panic button on a keyfob assigned to the holdup zone type Activated holdup zones generate a holdup event Holdup is a silent alarm with reported HA SIA code Holdup state is also indicated with the Trouble icon a triangle with an exclamation mark on the keypad Holdup restore event HR SIA code is sent only after the holdup alarm is acknowledged by the user with the Fault Acknowledging Overriding functionality Note It s recommended to change names of holdup zones to adequate names reflecting their functionality Fire alarm The Fire alarm function is an additional function for the EN 50131 compliance Keyfobs Using keyfobs in EN 50131 compliant systems 1s prohibited Scheduled arming disarming Scheduled arming disarming in EN 50131 compliant systems is prohibited RF Receivers Attenuated mode According to the EN 50131 6dB attenuation of RF link 1s required during installation to ensure that during normal system operation environmental changes wouldn t influence system stability To enter the attenuated mode select RF Recevers gt Receiver Features gt Attenuated mode gt Enable Attenuation command is executed only in the programming mode and can be disabled m
5. HomeText Password for Phone Number E HomeText Password for Phone Number 2 HomeText Password for Phone Number 3 HomeText Password for Phone umbera TO HomeText Password for Phone Numbers HomeText Password for Phone Number 6 HomeText Password for Phone Number HomeText Password for Phone Numbers sp HomeText Password for Phone Number HomeText Password for Phone Number10 HomeText Password for Phone number iY HomeText Password for Phone Number HomeText Password for Phone Numbers HomeText Password for Phone Number HomeText Password for Phone Numbers HomeText Password for Phone numberas Home Text Language Selection for Phone Number d _ Home Text Language Selection for Phone Number Home Text Language Selection for Phone Numbers Home Text Language Selection for Phone Number Home Text Language Selection for Phone Numbers Home Text Language Selection for Phone Number Home Text Language Selection for Phone Number Home Text Language Selection for Phone Number _ Home Text Language Selection for Phone Number9_ 10 11 12 li E A 13 ABR gt Y 14 gt A 15 16 Choose from language ISO 639 ID language ISO 639 ID 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 209 270 2 1 212 213 274 75 2 engin eng Polish pol 234
6. Location 168 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 169 CONFIGURATION GROUP 30 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATIONS 170 205 RESERVED LOCATION 206 AUTO DISARM DAY SELECTOR 4 segments feature selection data Location 206 selects which days each partition will auto disarm Segment 1 1s for partition 1 and segment 4 is for partition 4 Segment 1 4 1 Auto disarming on Sunday 2 Auto disarming on Monday 3 Auto disarming on Tuesday 4 Auto disarming on Wednesday 5 Auto disarming on Thursday 6 Auto disarming on Friday 7 Auto disarming on Saturday 8 Reserved LOCATIONS 207 211 RESERVED LOCATION 212 PROGRAMMING THE LCD KEYPAD ADDRESS 1 segment numerical data The system requires at least 1 LCD keypad The panel will get the zone descriptions from the first language from that LCD keypad which has the address defined in location 212 It is recommended that 1t will be placed in location 1 keypad 1 This will allow location 212 to be left at the factory default If the LCD keypa
7. ZONES 1 8 CONFIGURATION GROUPS 3 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 26 ZONES 1 8 PARTITION SELECTION Segment 1 Zone 1 thru Segment 8 Zone 8 Segments 1 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 2 2 3 N U D 141 142 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual ZONES 9 16 CONFIGURATION GROUPS 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 28 ZONES 9 16 PARTITION SELECTION Segment 1 Zone 9 thru Segment 8 Zone 16 Segments il 2 5 4 s 6 Partition 1 1 4 1 1 2 1 1 Partition 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Partitions 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Partition4 a 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 30 ZONES 17 24 PARTITION SELECTION Segment 1 Zone 17 thru Segment 8 Zone 24 Segments 1 2 3 5 6 Partition 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 Potons 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Portions 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Potons 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 31 ZONES 25 32 CONFIGURATION GROUPS 66666666 32 ZONES 25 32 PARTITION SELECTION Segment 1 Zone 25 thru Segment 8 Zone 32 Segments x 2 3 5 6 Partitiona 1 2 1 2 1 1 a 1 Portone 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Poons 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Pomona 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 33 ZONES 33 40 CONFIGURATION GROUPS 66666666 34 ZONES 33 40 PARTITION SELECTION Segment 1 Zone 33 thru Segment 8 Zone 40 Segments 1 2 5 3 6 7 Partitioni 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Partitone 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
8. A zone may reside in any combination of partitions A zone that resides in more than one partition becomes a common zone and is reported to its lowest partition number A common zone is armed only when all the partitions that it belongs to are armed It is immediately disarmed when one of the partitions it belongs to 1s disarmed The control panel can have a maximum of two on board hardwired inputs and a total of 48 zones wired and wireless together There are 30 pre defined zone types All zone types can be edited by changing their characteristics Table 15 Default zone types Zone Type Description of default configuration Day Zone Instant when system is armed trouble zone when system is disarmed It is permanently active 24 hours a day unless bypassed by forced arming 24 Hour Audible Creates an instant yelping siren alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel This zone type is not abortable but it can be bypassed Entry Exit 1 A trip will start entry delay 1 Absence of a trip during the exit delay will enable the Automatic Bypass or Instant mode if so programmed Follower This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delays are being timed It is delayed during entry and exit delay times This zone will not bypass automatically even if the Group Bypass command is active Interior Follower This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delay is being timed I
9. Enables six digit code option All arm disarm Go to program codes require six digits Requires valid user code entry for site initiated downloading and panel initiated downloading functions 76 On user authorization to enter program mode SSS 8 esens TTT a2 GOTO PROGRAM cone rr _____ 43 Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Enables Go To Program Code as an arm only code after closing Enables Go To Program Code as a master arm disarm code can change user codes Enables Go To Program Code as an arm disarm code 6 Enables Go To Program Code to bypass zones Enables Go To Program Code opening and closing reports 8 Reserved NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 145 Segment 2 Circle Numbers To Program Enables Go To Program Code for partition 1 Enables Go To Program Code for partition 2 Enables Go To Program Code for partition 3 Enables Go To Program Code for partition 4 15 45 AUXILIARY OUTPUTS 1 2 PARTITION SELECTION E Segments AUXILIARY OUTPUTS 1 2 SPECIAL TIMING Segments Auxiliary output timed in minutes Auxiliary output to latch Auxiliary output to stop timing when user code is entered Auxiliary output to activate only between closing and opening time Auxiliary output to activate only between opening and closing time Invert auxiliary output 0 volts going to 12 volts when activated Reserved Reserved 47 AUXILIARY OUTPU
10. Note This shortcut works only if the Quick Arm menu option was set It works differently in the master mode and in the single partition mode For more information see the Master Keypad and the Quick Arm menu option descriptions in the glossary Arms the system in Stay mode Arming with the function key will report as User 98 Note This shortcut works only if the Quick Arm menu option was set For the Stay mode to work correctly interior zones must be set It works differently in the master mode and in the single partition mode For more information on this button behaviour see the Master Keypad and the Quick Arm menu option description in the glossary Selects a zone to bypass It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Bypass Zones menu option 156 Group Bypass Light Control Alarm Memory Service Check Detector Reset Answer U D Call Begin U D Call Silent Exit Chime Panic Keypad Medical Aux2 Fire Alarm Phone Number Arm Night Mode Cancel Info Key NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual The Enter Zone No prompt displays Type the zone number and press OK Repeat this action for subsequent zones you want to bypass To remove a zone from the bypassed zone set enter its number again To partarm the system with the selected zones bypassed enter the user code Disarming the system clears the bypassed zone set Automatically bypasses all the zones with the Group Bypass attribute set for example Interio
11. 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 SMS 2 Format 0 167 SMS service centre address phone number 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 230 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Role DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA 168 U D call back phone number for CSD GSM 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Current GSM RSSI read on _898 se Current GPRS Bit Error Rate read only DEVICE STATUS FLAGS read only Segment 1 1 On Communication with GSM modem OK 2 On SIM card PIN is OK 169 170 171 172 173 174 6 On Using GSM CSD connection C o 8 On SiMcardPUKcoderequied _______________ Segment 2 6 On Uldsessionstoring OSC CSS 8 On Good RSSI Level Segment 3 On Max reports in 24h limit reached Reserved 175 GSM modem manufacturer read only 176 GSM modem model read only Lia GSM modem software revision read only 178 GSM modem serial number read only 179 199 Reserved E Eee 200 MISCELLANEOUS FEATURE SELECTION Segment 1 Reserved Segment 2 On Enable HomeText Control On only commands from registered phone numbers are accepted Off commands from any phone number are accepted On A password must be included with the HomeText message Off A password only required for HomeText messages from unregistered phonels On Forward un
12. 33144 Beep on RF loss A menu option that activates the keypad sounder causing it to beep when an RF zone is lost This beep indicates that the receiver did not receive the supervision signal from the wireless transmitter On the wired keypad the RF Zone Lost event is signalized by three beeps every 5 minutes On the wireless keypad the RF Zone Lost event Is signalized after 15 seconds from the wake up and then every 5 minutes from the last signal if the keypad is in the active mode 3 3 14 5 Always Master Mode A menu option that enables a mode on a master keypad in which partition status is always displayed regardless of each partition state 3 3 14 6 User Phone Editing A menu option that allows the user to change the phone numbers used for alarm reporting Typically the installer programs the central station phone numbers and is the only person who can change the number However when voice protocol and siren protocol are used the user can change the phone number These protocols typically report to the homeowner s mobile phone rather than to the central station Buzzer On Exit A menu entry that specifies that the keypad should beep during the exit delay countdown Exit 1 or Exit 2 Also System Arming Leave Now screen displays until the end of the exit delay time Note This option works for the Arm Away mode only for the Arm Stay mode the keypad is always silent Also see the Silent Exit Always control panel menu option 3 3 14
13. 6 6 6 Disable retry 56 Segment1 Partition 1 restore code OA Segment 2 Partition 2 restore code O Segment3 Partition 3 restore code O Segment 4 Partition 4 restore code OA 57 Segment 1 Partition 1 bypass code O Segment 2 Partition 2 bypass code O Segment3 Partition 3 bypass code PO Segment 4 Partition 4 bypass code O 58 Segment 1 Partition 1 tamper code O Segment 2 Partition 2 tamper code PO Segment 3 Partition 3 tamper code O Segment 4 Partition 4 tamper code O 59 Segment1 Partition 1 trouble code O Segment 2 Partition 2 trouble code O Segment 3 Partition 3 trouble code A Segment4 Partition 4 trouble code O SENSOR LOW BATTERY COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY Segment 1 Partition 1 sensor low battery code O Segment 2 Partition 2 sensor low battery code O Segment 3 Partition 3 sensor low battery code OY NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 147 Segment 4 Partition 4 sensor low battery code O SENSOR MISSING COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY Segment1 Partition 1 sensor missing code O Segment2 Partition 2 sensor missing code O OD Ha Segment3 Partition 3 sensor missing code O Segment4 Partition 4 sensor missing code PO COMMUNICATOR CODES FOR SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY DURESS 3 AUXILIARY 1 fire 4 AUXILIARY 2 medical alarm KEYPAD PANIC KEYPAD MULTIPLE CODE ENTRY TAMPER BOX TAMPER BOX T
14. Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 142 CONFIGURATION GROUP 17 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 142 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 143 CONFIGURATION GROUP 17 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 144 CONFIGURATION GROUP 18 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 144 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 145 CONFIGURATION GROUP 18 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 146 CONFIGURATION GROUP 19 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location
15. Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt gt Partition n gt Feature Select gt Keypads gt Keypress Tamper Control Panel gt Communications gt Central Station gt Phone Numbers gt Phone Number n gt Events gt Arm Disarm Alarm gt Opening Closing Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt Partition Report gt Exit Error Control Panel gt Outputs gt Internal Siren gt Sound On gt Expander Trouble Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt System Reports gt Communications gt Fail to Communicate RF Low Battery RF Sensor Lost Failure To Communicate report enabled Autotest report enabled Summer wintertime automatic switch Installer code can arm disarm Reports Open Close for the installer code LED Extinguish AC power low battery sounder alert Silent exit FTC Report Attempts Line Fault Indication Line Fault Reporting Report Timeout Receiver Polling Polling Time Max Reports in 24 Hours HomeText Control Battery Change Allowed Case Tamper F1 Functional Key Hide PINs Beep on RF loss KP Shutdown allows Disarm KP Shutdown shows Clock Latch Faults Until Viewed Silent Keypad Yes Yes Yes Yes Enabled Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes 60 Enabled 1 minute Disabled No Yes Alarm Memory Yes No Yes Yes No No CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CF CP GSM GSM GSM GSM GSM GSM GSM GSM KP KP KP
16. GSM Antenna Connector PSTN Modem 0 1 ty The number of onboard zones differs for particular panel models Refer to NetworX V3 technical specifications on page 13 Outputs see Figure 2 Box Tamper Inputs see Figure 2 1 Box Tamper RF microprocessor Audio Tap Outputs Flash DL900 jumper Antenna Mini USB connection Antenna 11 Telephone connections see Figure 2 GSM Modem for status LEDs description 12 DATA POS COM DATA POS COM BELL BELL AUX PWR Relay 1 NC Relay 1 NO Relay 1 C Relay 2 NC Relay 2 NO Relay 2 C BELL NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Figure 2 Networx V3 inputs and outputs COLLO OOUVUOUIS v gt rz O x O x Connect to Data terminal of keypad and expanders Connect to Positive terminal of keypad and expanders Connect to negative terminal of keypad and expanders Internal bell positive Internal bell negative Power Relay 1 normally closed Relay 1 normally open Relay 1 common Relay 2 normally closed Relay 2 normally open Relay 2 common AUX PWR COM AUX PWR AUX PWR COM 2 3 to 8 COM Earth T1 T R R1 Power Power Power Zone 1 1 Common for zone 1 and zone 2 1 Zone 2 1 Zones 3 to 8 and common terminals 1 Ground House Telephone Tip Telephone Tip Telephone Ring House Telephone Ring The number of onboa
17. HomeText Phone Number 9 HomeText Phone Number 10 HomeText Phone Number 11 HomeText Phone Number 12 HomeText Phone Number 13 HomeText Phone Number 14 HomeText Phone Number 8 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 233 LOC DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA 246 HomeText Phone Number 15 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 247 HomeText Phone Number 16 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 HomeText Password for Phone Number 2
18. Segment 7 Circle Numbers To Program 1 Dial via GSM when phone line trouble only when GSM module is enrolled E Error limited to Entry Exit delay 1 2 Ext Erro SWINGER COUNTDOWN COUNT o 39 KEYPAD SOUNDER CONTROL Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Keypad sounds for Telephone Line Cut when in the Armed state Keypad sounds for Telephone Line Cut when in the Disarmed state 144 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Keypad sounds upon AC Power Failure Keypad sounds upon Low Battery Detection Keypad sounds during Cross Zone Trip Time 6 Keypad sounds for Tamper Alarm Keypad sounds for Emergency keys EN Keypad sounds for Expander Trouble SYSTEM TIMERS Segment1 Dynamic Battery Test duration 0 30 minutes Segment2 AC Failure report delay 0 255 minutes Segment3 Power Up Delay 0 60 seconds Segment 4 Siren Time 1 255 minutes Segment5 Telephone Line Cut delay 0 255 seconds Segment6 Cross Zone Time 0 255 minutes Segment 7 Chime Time in 50 ms increments 0 255 Segment 8 Dialer delay 0 255 seconds Segment9 Fire Alarm Verification Time 120 255 seconds Segment Listen In Time 0 255 seconds 10 Segment Zone monitor timer hours days 0 255 11 Segment Auto arming warning timer 1 255 minutes 12 Segment Auto arming retry timer 1 255 minutes 13 Segment Programming timeout 1 255 minutes O 15 minutes A ee 14 41 USER CODE REQUIREMENTS Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program
19. e Oh keyswitch zone arms in STAY mode Segment 5 1 On Disables auto bypassing of force armable zones at the end of the exit delay 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Entry Exit timers LOCATION 24 ENTRY EXIT TIMERS 6 segments numerical data Location 24 is used to program the entry exit times There are 2 separate entry exit times Segment 1 Entry time 1 This is the entry time that will be used when a delay 1 zone type initiates an entry delay Valid entries are 10 255 seconds Segment 2 Exit time 1 This is the exit time that will be used for all zones designated as delay 1 Valid entries are 10 255 seconds Segment 3 Entry time 2 This is the entry time that will be used when a delay 2 zone type initiates an entry delay Valid entries are 10 255 seconds Segment 4 Exit time 2 This is the exit time that will be used for all zones designated as delay 2 Valid entries are 10 255 seconds 103 104 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Segment 5 Reserved Segment 6 Reserved Zone configurations and partition selection DEFAULT ZONE CONFIGURATIONS Zones can be programmed to be one of thirty different zone configurations zone types The default zone configurations are listed below Programming locations 110 169 can customise all zone configurations DESCRIPTION OF DEFAULT CONFIGURATION 1 DAY ZONE Instant when system is armed trouble zone when s
20. then the account code corresponding to the phone number that is dialled will be used If the account code is less than six digits program a 10 in the segment immediately after the last digit of the account code If the account code is 6 digits long program all 6 segments 124 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 93 PARTITION 3 FEATURE AND REPORTING SELECTIONS 5 segments feature selection data Location 93 1s used to enable certain features that the user can access or see from the keypad of the system In addition certain communicator reports are enabled in this location Each of these features can be enabled by partition This location contains 5 segments with eight possible features per segment Refer to location 23 for the feature selections If all the segments are blank nothing enabled the features for partition 1 will be used LOCATION 94 PARTITION 3 ENTRY EXIT TIMERS 6 segments numerical data Location 94 is used to enter the entry and exit times in seconds There are 2 separate entry and exit times Valid entries are 10 255 seconds If all the segments are 0 the entry and exit times for partition 1 will be used Segment 1 Entry time 1 Entry time that will be used when a delay 1 zone type initiates an entry delay Segment 2 Exit time 1 Exit time that will be used for all zones designated as delay 1 Segment 3 Entry time 2 Entry time that will be used when a delay 2 zone type initiates an entry
21. 2 to insert Press 3 to insert a four second delay Press 4 to insert P this enables pulse dialing 5 Press OK to accept the changes o If the new number is valid the keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to the menu option If the new number is invalid the keypad beeps three times to reject the change and returns to the menu option 6 Press NO to cancel the changes and return to the menu option Exiting the menu system 1 Press NO repeatedly until OK to Exit prompt displays Note If you are not in a value selection mode nor in a value edit mode you can press to display the OK to Exit prompt It also means you can exit any menu level immediately by pressing NO 2 Press OK at this prompt to exit the menu system After exiting the menu system all devices in the system are enrolled and changed texts are sent to all keypads in the system When it happens Processing and Copying messages are displayed respectively on the keypads It can take some time especially in case of wireless keypads and it is always recommended to allow these processes to finish without entering anything on the keypad Editing text Overview The NetworX V3 has a text editor that includes a word library You can use this editor to change the text of certain programmable text options 44 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 1 Navigate with the NY keys to the relevant menu option and press
22. 3 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Protocol 4 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt Report Codes gt Tamper Fault and press OK 5 Scroll to Phone Line Cut and press OK 6 Type the number of the message that you want to map to that zone and press OK 7 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Phone Line Cut 66 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Configuring partitions Figure 20 Partitions menu 2 5 1 1 Partition 1 2 5 1 1 Partitions 2 4 Same as above 2 5 1 1 1 Entry Time 1 2 5 1 1 2 Exit Time 1 2 5 1 1 3 Entry Time 2 2 5 1 1 4 Exit Time 2 Timers 2 5 1 2 2 5 1 2 1 2 5 1 2 1 1 Quick Arm 2 5 1 2 1 2 Re exit 2 5 1 2 1 3 Silent Auto Arm 2 5 1 2 1 4 Autom Instant 2 5 1 2 1 5 Final Set Door Feature Select 2 5 1 2 1 10 Keyswitch Arm STAY 2 5 1 2 1 11 Late to Close Early to Open 2 5 1 2 1 12 Auto Arm in Stay Mode 2 5 1 2 2 1 Silent PA 2 5 1 2 2 2 Audible PA 2 5 1 2 2 3 Fire Aux 1 2 5 1 2 2 4 Medical Aux 2 2 5 1 2 2 Keypads 2 5 1 2 2 5 Keypress Tamper 2 5 1 2 2 6 LED Extinguish 2 5 1 2 3 1 Auto Bypass 2 5 1 2 3 2 Code Required 2 5 1 2 3 3 Sounder Alert 2 5 1 2 3 4 Bypass Toggle 2 5 1 2 3 5 No Forced Bypass 2 5 1 2 4 Miscellaneous 2 5 1 2 4 1 Mains Batt Sounder Alert 2 5 1 2 4 2 Tamper if Zone Lost A partition is a group of zones wh
23. Device Box Tamper Siren Tamper Zone Tamper and Zone Alarm Memory Zone alarm memory can be simply acknowledged by the user but other physical problems must always get fixed first Overriding is allowed if e there are no active critical faults and o there are no unconfirmed critical faults and o there is at least one non critical active fault and the system is disarmed Overriding option is shown at the end of the fault list only 1f it is allowed as Override Faults OK Confirm After pressing OK opened zones will be bypassed and other faults will be ignored The user will be able to arm the system Overriding can be cancelled To do it the user needs to activate Fault Acknowledging Overriding mechanism again by pressing scroll through faults to the override message and then press Override Faults Cancel After pressing bypassed zones will get to the normal state again and other faults will not be ignored arming will be impossible In the rare case when the fault list changed while being previewed the fault was added or removed the following message 1s displayed at the end of the list Changed Fault List OK Recheck Pressing OK allows to display the current fault list Faults that can be shown in the fault list are in the order given Table 53 Fault descriptions Panel Siren Tamper 6 Zone Tamper P2 Zone X Name Tamper Zone Tamper P3 Zone X Name Tamper a NetworX Version 3 Installation
24. NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual of module numbers on page 261 The procedure for programming these devices 1s the same as for the control panel except that the location will be for the module selected Programming a location Note Before programming the panel the correct country code must be set in location 213 or through the installer menu with This Keypad gt Load Country Defaults menu option It is selected during the first keypad installation see Wireless keypad learning in procedure on page 32 Once you have entered the number of the module to be programmed the LCD screen will prompt you for a location number Any location can be accessed by directly entering the desired programming location followed by the crosshatch pound key If the location you enter 1s valid the top line of the LCD screen will display the location number on the left and the segment number on the right The bottom line of the display will show the current data This data will be displayed and entered according to the type of data used numerical binary or character data For instructions about entering each type of data see Changing a menu option on page 41 If editing data confirm the change by pressing the OK key Exiting the program mode When you have made all the desired changes in programming it is time to exit the program mode Press the NO key twice to exit this programming level and go to the Enter the device address level If no
25. Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the Bus Fault Restore For a 3 1 format only the segment digit resp segment 3 digit tens will be sent LOCATIONS 85 87 RESERVED Programming partition parameters Locations 88 109 are for programming different account codes and or features for each partition If a location is left unprogrammed the feature for partition 1 and the account code for the phone number will be used NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 123 LOCATION 88 ACCOUNT CODE FOR PARTITION 1 6 segments numerical data Location 88 contains the account code that 1s sent when partition 1 is reported If location 88 1s left unprogrammed all 10 s then the account code corresponding to the phone number that is dialled will be used If the account code is less than six digits program a 10 in the segment immediately after the last digit of the account code If the account code is 6 digits long program all 6 segments LOCATION 89 ACCOUNT CODE FOR PARTITION 2 6 segments numerical data Location 89 contains the account code that is sent when partition 2 is reported If location 89 is left unprogrammed all 10 s then the account code corresponding to the phone number that is dialled will be used If the account code is less than six digits program a 10 in the segment immediately after the last digit of the account code If the account code is 6 digits long program all 6 segments LOCATION 90
26. Ta AUTHORIZING USERS 11 20 TO TRIGGER OUTPUTS 1 8 Segment 1 user 11 segment 2 user 12 segment 10 user 20 as o opon AUTHORING USERS 21 3OTOTRIGGEROUTPUTS1 6 AUTHORIZING USERS 51 60 TO TRIGGER OUTPUTS 1 8 Tse 20 l opion amonen USERS TOTOTRGSER OUTPUTS ass 10 option AUTHORIZING USERS71 GOTOTRIGGEROUTPUTSA 6 Function Code will activate Output 1 Code will NOT activate output 1 Code will activate Output 2 Code will NOT activate output 2 Code will activate Output 3 Code will NOT activate output 3 Code will activate Output 4 Code will NOT activate output 4 Code will activate Output 5 Code will NOT activate output 5 Code will activate Output 6 Code will NOT activate output 6 Code will activate Output 7 Code will NOT activate output 7 Code will activate Output 8 Code will NOT activate output 8 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 191 Chapter B6 Setting up the GSM GPRS module NX 7002 Overview In case you want to add GSM GPRS functionality to the panel you need to use an NetworX V3 model which has the GSM GPRS on board or you need to add a separate NX 7002 module Only one GSM GPRS module can be used and will have module number 78 The GSM GPRS module features include Wireless event reporting 12 configurable report destinations Selectable reportable events from four partitions o Compatible with PSTN or ISDN reporting PSTN ISDN can be used as backup SIA
27. event list for each report destination TCP IP You can send reports by TCP IP in SIA XSIA and Contact ID report formats You can configure one event list for each report destination Report controllers The GSM GPRS module contains six report controllers You can configure the events to be reported and specify two reporting destinations for each report controller Two of these can be SMS two can be TCP IP The backup destination which is used if there is a reporting device problem should be another reporting device for example PSTN Setting up the report controllers Each of the report controllers can be set up separately o Navigate with the AV keys to NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Report n and press OK to select the report control you want to work on e Navigate with the NY keys to NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Report Format and press OK to select the report format Navigate with the NY keys to NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting to set up SMS Note All events for Report 1 are enabled by default Primary and secondary reporting Reporting for each report controller is done from the GSM GPRS module or via another reporting device Primary Reporting If the GSM GPRS module is used for primary reporting it acts as the main reporting device for the security system You should Navigate with the AV keys to NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Repor
28. mode the installer can replace keypad batteries anytime lt may require resetting the system if the wireless keypad is the only keypad in the system therefore it is recommended to initiate the installer mode from another keypad if available The battery compartment must be closed while restarting the panel to avoid tamper alarm 158 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Backlight battery replacement 1 Push the battery compartment cover in a direction indicated by the arrow symbol on the cover Operating battery replacement The master user 1s allowed to perform the operating battery replacement according to the following procedure di Disarm the system 4 Press OK and enter your master user code to open the User Menu NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 159 5 Navigate with the NY keys to Change Batteries and press OK Note that Change Batteries option in User Menu is available only when keypad partitions are disarmed and when the This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Battery Change Allowed menu option in the Installer Menu is set to Yes 6 Open the backlight battery compartment as described above 7 Unscrew two screws inside the backlight battery compartment as shown below 8 Open the operating battery compartment and replace all four batteries You have 5 minutes to finish this operation You must use Duracell or Energizer AA batteries only 160 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 9 After
29. must be programmed in location 2 in addition to the entries in location 18 If this location contains a 0 the built in communicator will be disabled and the NetworX V3 will function as a local only control LOCATION 3 DIAL ATTEMPTS BACKUP CONTROL FOR PHONE N 1 2 segm numerical data Segment 1 Dial attempts Location 3 segment 1 1s used to enter the number of dial attempts 1 to 15 which the communicator will make to phone N 1 before it ends the notification process Factory default 1s 8 and the communicator will make 8 attempts to the first number Note There will be a waiting time of 12 seconds between the first two dial attempts and a waiting time of 60 seconds between each subsequent dial attempt Segment 2 Phone N 1 backup control Programming a 0 in segment 2 of this location will cause the NetworX V3 to make the designated number of attempts to phone N 2 before setting the Fail To Communicate condition and stop reporting Programming a 1 in this segment will cause the NetworX V3 to stop trying to communicate after the designated number of attempts have been made to phone N 1 If a 2 is programmed in this segment it will cause the NetworX V3 to make the dial attempts in increments of two The first two attempts will be made to phone N 1 the next two attempts to phone N 2 then repeating until the total number of attempts designated in Segment 1 is completed Reporting events
30. tens will be sent LOCATION 69 LOW BATTERY LOW BATTERY RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODES SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 69 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Low Battery Reporting is enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit of the Low Battery Reporting Segment 2 contains the ones digit of the Low Battery Reporting Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the Low Battery Restore Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the Low Battery Restore For a 3 1 format only the segment digit resp segment 3 digit tens will be sent NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 119 LOCATION 70 AUX POWER OVERCURRENT AUX POWER OVERCURRENT RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODES SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 70 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Aux Power Overcurrent Reporting 1s enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit of the Aux Power Overcurrent Reporting Segment 2 contains the ones digit of the Aux Power Overcurrent Reporting Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the Aux Power Overcurrent Restore Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the Aux Power Overcurrent Restore For a 3 1 format only the segment 1 resp segment 3 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 71 BELL TAMPER AND BELL TAMPER RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODES SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments
31. then the system will not be armed and the special SIA code EE will be reported Each Exit Error event is visible as a fault to acknowledge and 1t should be acknowledged Keypad volume turned down If the keypad volume is set to 0 then in case of a reject beep silenced Err will be displayed for 1 second instead of digit icons It allows the user installer to notice that the setting was rejested by the system and the attempted change was unsuccessful Menu Some menu options differ when the system is in the EN 50131 mode Set Date Time When in the EN 50131 mode the Set Date Time menu option is displayed under J nstaller Menu gt Maintenance Mode When the EN mode is disabled this menu option is available in the User menu EN Mode This menu is visible in the EN mode only and can be used for switching this mode off It is available at Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt EN Mode Please note that switching the EN 50131 Mode off does not change back any options set by switching this mode on previously They must be set up manually as needed NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 275 Manual Dialer Test This menu option is added to the User Menu in the EN 50131 Mode It allows the user to manually test the dialer when the Dialer Fault is signalled by the system Mandatory Event Log This menu option is added to the User Menu in the EN 50131 Mode It allows the user to review the mandatory log
32. top until the keypad snaps in place Note To replace keypad batteries see the Battery replacement section on page 157 and the Battery replacement chapter in the Networx V3 User Guide Note Any unauthorized opening of the battery compartment will cause tamper alarm in the system Mounting the wired keypad There is also an option to use wired keypads with the NetworX V3 system To install a wired keypad 1 Run the NetworX bus cable to the appropriate location on the wall Insert the cable into the cable opening in the wired keypad s backplate Figure 9 Wired keypad s backplate 2 Mount the backplate of the keypad on the wall using the mounting holes Using a screw fasten the tamper trigger 1 to the wall di Connect the shielded NetworX bus wires to the connector block BUS DATA COM on the keypad board and additionally connect the shielding to COM see Figure 10 Isolate the NetworX bus wires and shielding correctly to prevent any short circuits on the keypad NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Figure 10 Wired keypad connector block n wi S Mai mes BUS 3 lt 0 DY IA 4 At the panel side run the NetworX bus wires through the ferrite see Figure 11 position Q making one loop and connect the wires to the standard NetworX bus contacts see Figure 1 position 4 Additionally connect the shielding to COM see Figure 11 position E Figure 11 Panel connector block and the ferrit
33. x x H H G H R A N Forced Door R N O WG 00 AT AR YN YN MA IA NR B U OC CG CL TA TR HA OK RS LX EE ET ER RT CF DF Forced Door Restore GF D N U Ground fault NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 259 Report Report Contact ID SIA Ground fault restore Unknown Event Holdup Event User Code Added Holdup Restore Event Late to close 304 130 130 Low battery restore Verified fire 110 Manual fire Verified fire restore 110 Off normal AutoTest Zone Clean me restore 393 391 381 81 Opening after alarm user Zone inactive restore number Over current device Zone lost zone number number Over current restore device Zone lost restore zone 3 number number The NetworX V3 has the ability to report SIA level 1 transmissions to either or both phone numbers Each report in SIA consists of an Event Code and a Zone or User ID The Zone ID will be the zone number that is in alarm The event code will come from the chart below and it will be programmed in the configuration group event code or Table 42 Reporting zone codes SIA Programmed Event Code SIA Code Description tm eres 260 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Programmed Event Code SIA Code Description The NetworX V3 can report Ademco Contact ID transmissions Each report in Contact ID consists of an Event Code and a Zone ID The zone ID is the zone that generated the alarm The event code
34. 0 0 0 a 0 RINGS TO ANSWER DOWNLOAD e IEA DOWNLOAD CONTROL Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Enables two call answering machine defeat 24 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 76 tock out communicator programming n e Enables calbackotautotestintewal CALLBACK PHONE NUMBER 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 PARTITION 1 FEATURE SELECTION Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 ED extinguish enable Open Close 1 Re Exit equire user code for bypassing Bypass zones ypass sounder alert estore A t 3 Auto Bypass interior Silent Panic C power low battery sounder aler rouble 4 Silent Panic Ea 5 Audible Panic T Auxiliary 1 nables silent auto arm Cancel 7 Auxiliary 2 nables automatic instant entry exit Multi Keypress Final set door Tamper Segment 4 Segment 5 Au E Ta E R B Enables bypass toggle amper E E Recent Closing Exit Error Disables auto bypassing of force armable zones Reserved eserved to arm in stay mode 3 nables instant night R 4 mper when sensor lost if armed Reserved 5 nables instant stay toggle Reserved Reserved 7 Arming with battery trouble Keyswitch zone arms in stay mode ENTRY EXIT TIMERS Segment 1 Entry Time 1 Arming with tamper mem comm Reserved failure En Ea 5 6 ER EN EA EZ Reserved Segment 2 Exit Time 1 Segment 3 Entry Time 2 Segment 4 Exit Time 2 Reserved Reserved
35. 1 Force Armable Entry Exit 2 Force Armable Entry Exit 1 with Chime Audible Technical Alarm Supervised Silent Technical Alarm Supervised Interior Instant Instant Chime Follower Chime 24 Hour Audible Local Supervised Instant Force Armable Instant Monitor Activity Instant EOL Defeat 24 Hour Medical Audible Supervised NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 55 bypass when the Group Bypass command is entered at the keypad This zone type will arm disarm the partition or partitions of the control panel where it is resident as long as the zone state is changed from R to 2R for example the Door Window Switch is opened or closed and kept in this state Keyswitch arming will report as User 99 in logs and reports A trip will start entry delay 1 Absence of a trip during exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed This zone is force armable which means the system can be Force Armed even if this zone has been violated In this condition the Ready icon will flash indicating the zone is not secure At the end of the exit delay the zone will be bypassed If the zone becomes secured at any time during the arming cycle it will be unbypassed and will become active in the system If Bypass Report is enabled the force arming zones can be programmed to report bypass when they are force armed default A trip will start entry delay 2 Absence of a trip during ex
36. 1 selection If you need to report openings and closings with a unique code per user Contact ID or SIA format must be used Segment 1 Opening code for partition 1 Segment 2 Opening code for partition 2 Segment 3 Opening code for partition 3 Segment 4 Opening code for partition 4 LOCATION 78 CLOSING COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 8 segments numerical data Location 78 contains the tens digit for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if Closing Reporting is enabled The ones digit is the ones digit of the user number that did the opening If the user is greater than 9 the numbers will begin repeating e g code 6 6 code 45 5 This location contains 8 segments Any segment left as 0 will follow the segment 1 selection NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 121 If you need to report openings and closings with a unique code per user Contact ID or SIA format must be used Segment 1 Closing code for partition 1 Segment 2 Closing code for partition 2 Segment 3 Closing code for partition 3 Segment 4 Closing code for partition 4 LOCATION 79 AUTOTEST COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 79 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Autotest or Manual Test 1s enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit and segment 2 contains the ones digit For a 3 1 format only the segment 1 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 80 REC
37. 2 3 Potons 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Partition 4 a 4 4 4 4 4 4 35 zones 41 48 CONFIGURATION GROUPS 66666666 1 36 ZONES 41 48 PARTITION SELECTION Segment 1 Zone 41 thru Segment 8 Zone 48 Segments 1 2 5 4 5 6 ro Partition 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Partitions 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Partition4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 57 Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program 6 T Siren sounds during a cross zone verificationtime SSS Siren blast once for keyswitch arming twice for disarming BELL output YES wireless sirens NO Segment 2 Circle Numbers To Program NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 143 6 Manual bell test performed during self test function BELL output 1 0 and relay DET Segment 3 Circle Numbers To Program 6 Restore Telephone Line Cut report enabled a Expander trouble reportenabled _________ Segment 4 Circle Numbers To Program 6 Sensor Low Battery report enabled 8 Autotest report enabled ONLY when system is armed __ ________ Segment 5 Circle Numbers To Program Silent exit This function also doubles the exit delay for example if exit delay is set to 30 seconds it changes to 60 seconds NA Activate alli Sese ot Ano Lastan reporna for partitions _8 Automatic switch summer wintertime and vice verso Segment 6 Circle Numbers To Program 6 Disable Clean Me report o 8 User code will reset tamper memory S
38. 2 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Codes gt Installer Code gt Code and press OK A EA A NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 61 Enter the new code and press OK Enter the new code and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Code Scroll to Authority gt Arm Only gt Yes and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to 4rm Only Navigate with the NY keys to Partitions and press OK Press the corresponding numerical key to include partitions 1 and 2 and to exclude all other partitions and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Partitions 62 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Setting communication options Figure 18 Communication menu 2 4 1 Central Station 2 4 1 1 Phone Numbers 2 4 1 1 1 Phone Number 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 Phone Number Phone Numbers 2 6 Same as above 2 4 1 2 Account Codes 2 4 1 3 1 1 Partition 1 Partitions 2 4 Same as above 2 4 1 3 AutoCancel Abort 2 4 1 1 1 2 Account Code 2 4 1 1 1 3 Protocol 2 4 1 1 1 4 Dial Attempts 2 4 1 1 1 5 Backup Control 2 4 1 1 1 6 Events 2 4 1 1 1 4 1 Arm Disarm Alarm 2 4 1 1 1 4 1 1 2 4 1 1 1 4 1 2 2 4 1 1 1 4 1 3 2 4 1 1 1 4 1 4 Alarms Alarm Restores Opening Closing Zone Bypass and Restores 2 4 1 1 1 4 2 Tamper Fault 2 4 1 1 1 4 2 1 2 4 1 1 1 4 2 2 2 4 1 1 1 4 2
39. 2 6 2 1 Inputs 2 6 2 1 1 On board zones 2 6 2 1 2 Box Tamper 2 6 2 1 3 ExitError limited to EE1 2 6 2 1 4 Double Pulse 2 6 2 1 5 Force Default Zone Types 2 6 2 1 6 A B Cross Zone 2 6 2 1 7 Immediate Zone Restore 2 6 2 2 Diagnostics 2 6 2 2 1 Batt Missing Test 2 6 2 2 2 Dynamic Batt Test at Arming 2 6 2 2 3 Manual Siren Test 2 6 2 2 4 Manual Dialer Test 2 6 2 3 Clock 2 6 2 3 1 Use Crystal for Clock 2 6 2 3 2 Show Lost Clock Message 2 6 2 3 3 Summer Winter Time Miscellaneous 2 6 2 4 1 Fire Siren 2 6 2 4 2 User Code Resets Tamper Memory 2 6 2 4 3 Use GSM If Line Trouble 2 6 2 4 4 First Alarm Logic 2 6 2 4 5 Log Protection 2 6 2 4 6 KP Shutdown Mode 2 6 2 4 7 Silent Exit Always 2 6 2 4 8 Transformer Size 2 6 2 4 9 EN Mode 2 6 2 4 Configurable system settings include timers input features the system clock and serial port and various tests that can be performed on the control panel To program system settings select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt System Settings Setting timers You can set timers to control the duration of various system functions The following example sets the internal siren timer to five minutes When the siren starts ringing the timer starts counting down When the timer is finished the siren automatically stops 1 Ensure the advanced menu is enabled 2 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt System Settings and press OK
40. 2 before it ends the notification process Factory default is 0 and the communicator will make the same number of attempts as those programmed in location 3 Note There will be a waiting time of 12 seconds between the first two dial attempts and a waiting time of 60 seconds between each subsequent dial attempt regardless of the number dialled Segment 2 phone N 2 backup control Programming a 0 in segment 2 of this location will cause the NetworX V3 to make the designated number of attempts to phone N 1 before setting the fail to communicate condition and stop reporting Programming a 1 in this segment will cause the NetworX V3 to stop trying to communicate after the designated number of attempts have been made to phone N 2 If a 2 is programmed in this segment it will cause the NetworX V3 to make the dial attempts in increments of two The first two attempts will be made to phone N 2 the next two attempts to phone N 1 then repeating until the total number of attempts designated in segment 1 is completed Reporting events to phone number 2 Phone N 2 can be used to back up phone N 1 or as a second receiver to multi report or split report events Phone N 2 has two programming locations that are used to select the events that are reported to this phone number Location 10 is used to select the events which are reported to phone N 2 and location 11 1s used to select which partitions are reported to phon
41. 25 Chapter A2 Installation guidelines Mains power connection Use the mains connector terminal for connecting the mains supply You can use a fixed cable or a flexible mains lead to an earthed mains outlet If fixed wiring is used insert a dedicated circuit breaker in the power distribution network In all cases the mains connection must comply with local regulations WARNING Disconnect the mains power before opening the cabinet To do this eDisconnect the AC mains plug from the AC mains wall socket or eDisconnect the mains with the dedicated circuit breaker A CAUTION This unit can is provided with a lead battery inside Batteries can explode or cause burns when incorrectly dis assembled or exposed to fire or high temperatures Dispose of used battery according to battery directive instructions and or as required by local laws Keep away from children To replace the battery please disconnect it and remove it from the holder If required replace with the GE Security BS127N lead batery only Do not use a different type of batteries Mounting e Ensure that the unit is mounted on a flat solid vertical surface so that the base will not flex or warp when the mounting screws bolts are tightened Leave a 50 mm clearance between equipment enclosures mounted side by side and 25 mm between the enclosure and the cable pathway The battery mounting facility inside the housing is only useful for steady state use of the con
42. 3 1 2 2 Selection O 15 3 1 31 SMS Service Center Addres 15 3 1 4 RSSI Value 15 3 1 5 Bit Error Rate 15 3 1 6 Connection Fault 15 3 1 6 1 Line Fault RF Level 15 3 1 6 2 Line Fault Delay 15 3 1 7 GSM Engine Info 15 3 2 CSD 15 3 2 1 Speed 15 3 2 2 Use V 110 15 3 2 3 Mode 15 3 1 7 1 Manufacturer 15 3 1 7 2 Type 15 3 1 7 3 Software Revision 15 3 1 7 4 Serial Number 15 3 3 Network 15 3 3 11 DHCP Assigned IP Address 15 3 3 2 User ID 15 3 3 3 Password 15 3 3 4 GPRS APN 15 3 3 5 GPRS APN 2 GPRS Disconnect Delay 15 3 4 1 1 GSM Engine Comms 15 3 4 1 2 SIM PIN Accepted 15 3 4 1 3 Logged into GSM Network 15 3 4 1 4 SIM PUK Required 15 3 4 1 5 Sending SMS 15 3 4 1 6 Using GSM Audio 15 3 4 1 7 i 15 3 3 6 Port Numbers 15 3 3 6 1 TCP IP Alarm Port i 15 3 3 6 2 _U D Port 15 3 4 19 Good RSSI 15 3 4 Status Check 15 3 4 1 GSM Connection 15 3 4 2 Power 153421 Battery Fault 15 3 4 2 2 GSM PSU Fault 15 3 4 2 3 Bus Power Fault 15 3 4 3 Application 15 3 4 3 1 Downloading 15 3 4 3 2 Download Starting 15 3 4 3 3 Reporting 15 3 4 3 4 Reached 24h Report Limit 15 3 4 1 1 HomeText Control 15 3 4 1 2 Only Registered Phones Keypad for Zone Text Send Unrecognised SMS to Admin 15 3 4 1 3 Password Always Required 15 3 5 2 System Control 15 3 4 1 4 Bad Attempts for Disable 15 3 5 3 Light Control 15 3
43. 712525078 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 151 156 CONFIGURATION GROUP 24 ALARM EVENT CODE 157 CONFIGURATION GROUP 24 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 0 1245 25678 158 CONFIGURATION GROUP 25 ALARM EVENT CODE 159 CONFIGURATION GROUP 25 CHARACTERSTICSELECT 46124625678 160 CONFIGURATION GROUP 26 ALARM EVENT CODE 161 CONFIGURATION GROUP 26 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 2661282 E _ Tra a 165 0 125 25676 1 166 CONFIGURATION GROUP 29 ALARM EVENT CODE E 0 168 CONFIGURATION GROUP 30 ALARM EVENT CODE 169 CONFIGURATION GROUP 30 CHARACTERSTICSELECT 26025298 170 Mila 1D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 205 206 DAYS OF THE WEEK WHEN AUTO DISARMING WILL OCCUR IN PARTITIONS 1 4 Segments 1 2 3 Sunday Ya o oaa a monday 2 2 Ta a Tuesdy 3 3 3 3 Wednesday a ooo oa ooo o y Thursday ss 5 moy 6 6 6 6 Reserved 8 e 8 8 207 Pisses 211 212 LCD KEYPAD ADDRESS FOR XSIA ZONE DESCRIPTIONS 192 1 213 COUNTRY CODE 0 ___ 152 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Chapter B3 Programming the NX 1048 keypad Overview Each NX 1048 keypad has a sounder and an LCD display that displays messages in a number of possible languages Each NX 1048 keypad must be enrolled defaulted to the country settings for the selected country and defaulted to the factory defaults before starting to program the system For more information on enrolling and defaulting see Chapter B7 Enrolli
44. 8 Tamper restore LOCATION 11 PARTITIONS REPORTED TO PHONE N 2 1 segment feature selection data Location 11 is used when events to be reported to a phone number are based on the partition regardless of the event If this location is used location 10 should be 0 Segment 1 1 Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 4 Partition 4 Telephone number 3 LOCATION 12 PROGRAMMING PHONE N 3 20 segments numerical data Phone N 3 is programmed in location 12 A 14 indicates the end of the phone number Delays of four seconds can be programmed at any point in the phone number by programming a 13 in the appropriate segment The system will always wait for a dial tone unless the first digit of the phone number is a 13 in this case it will only delay Tone DTMF dialling is default If you want pulse tone dialling program a 15 in the segment where pulse dialling should begin If the entire number should be pulse dialling program a 15 in the first segment Program an 11 for a and a 12 for a FP Note A zero is programmed as a 0 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 99 LOCATION 13 ACCOUNT CODE FOR PHONE N 3 6 segments numerical data Use location 13 to program the account code that is sent when phone N 3 is dialled A zero in the account code is programmed as a 0 A 10 indicates the end of the account code so program a 10 in the seg
45. 8 Light Control A menu entry that groups X 10 device options for the selected keypad 3 3 14 8 1 Unit Code A menu option that sets the X 10 unit code used to identify a particular X 10 device on the selected module 3 3 14 8 2 House Code A menu option that sets the code used to identify a particular premises It is necessary in case any 3 3 14 7 neighbouring premises also has an X 10 home automation system More information on the X 10 home automation system can be found at www x 10europe com 3 3 14 9 Latch Faults until Viewed A menu option that if enabled sets the keypad to display NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 167 Location Term Definition 3 3 14 10 Display Contact Central Station A menu option that if enabled sets the keypad to display the message Contact Central Station after an alarm has been reported and the system disarmed 3 3 14 11 KP Shutdown shows Clock A menu option that causes the keypad to display the date and time instead of the Please Enter Your Code message 3 3 14 12 KP Shutdown allows Disarm A menu option that if enabled allows a blanked keypad to be disarmed 3 3 14 13 Status LED A menu option that if enabled turns on the backlighting for the state indicator GE logo on the keypad 3 3 14 14 Status LED Always On A menu option that if set to Yes causes the state indicator to be on at all times This option is accessible only on a wired keypad 3 3 15 Pry Off Switch A menu
46. Advanced Menu A menu option that activates certain options in the installer menu structure 18 7 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 243 Chapter B9 NX 586E Overview The NX 586E direct connect module is an optional device used to interface the up download software directly to the control panel when the on board serial port is not available The NX 586E direct connect module has four programming memories The NX 586E can store up to four 4 NetworX alarm panel configurations panel only no modules within 1ts own non volatile memory These files can be created using the DL900 software 1 13 or later without a panel attached power must still be supplied The files can also be created using the installer program mode on any existing NetworX panel without the need for any computer The files stored on the Direct Connect unit can be transferred to any panel of the same type or read by the DL900 software for reviewing editing and archiving purposes Connecting the NX 586E direct connect module Connecting the NX 586E to a PC Figure 29 NX 586E O RS232 connector O Waiting for bus communication LED RJ11 rear entry connector 6 Sending data LED O Waiting for host communication LED Receiving data LED 6 Connect the NX 586E direct connect module to the serial port of the PC The layout of the 25 PIN serial connector on the PCB 1s 244 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Table 38 NX 586E direct connect module
47. An Options setting that displays the IP address that is assigned to the NX 7002 when it logs into the Address GPRS network DL900 A PC upload download program for Networx systems Download The process of sending programming information or data on the panel to a PC running upload download software or to the central station Download Starting An Options setting that indicates that downloading is about to start Downloading An Options setting option that indicates that downloading is taking place E Event An alarm condition that has been detected by the control panel Event log A list of events that occur in the system regardless of the armed state of the system They are held in a sequential event buffer with a time and date stamp When the log is full it overwrites the oldest entries with new data These events can later be viewed through downloading Events A Reporting menu entry that contains all configurable events for each report control All events for report control 1 are enabled by default Events for all other report controls are disabled by default Enabled events are formatted into one or more messages according to pre configured settings and sent to the selected report destination You must enable Test Reports if using the NX 7002 as backup to another auxiliary dialer Expander Trouble A Reporting setting that sends an expander trouble and restore report to the selected report control and Restores F Fail to Communicate A Re
48. CONFIGURATION GROUP 25 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 160 CONFIGURATION GROUP 26 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 160 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 161 CONFIGURATION GROUP 26 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 162 CONFIGURATION GROUP 27 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 162 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm 136 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 163 CONFIGURATION GROUP 27 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characterist
49. Control panel A 65 D DB CORNECIO E cartoons 250 Defaulting modules 235 DE a nee ia 64 197 250 252 Networx Version 3 Installation Manual D al reporting aaa 48 Duress Codeseira 60 E EMISE 43 A enon 41 ENSO SL compliance iii 269 Enrolling GSM TCL OLK vatdisssevoiaveonictebsemeatasasvunteias 192 IN OOD A 19 Enrolling modules 235 Event A A IRIRISPRIO RCA 258 ESCH PON siii 237 TSU A OP 238 Eea Odo eee ara RE 209 Event lO susana 237 252 253 254 SUNS do O giano iga 238 EXPLO MD residir 43 174 F Firmware A 255 G GSM enrolling escenas 192 H Homelroktsa sisseii eroine 191 198 CONTO ina 205 message format i 213 MISSA in 216 POPOLI oriali 204 I I O module specifications noo nonnnnnoos 35 Installer COU PP e o 60 283 284 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual INI ERRE Porno 162 Internal SO iii indiani 59 J K Keypad Illo aa 29 UID Puesta si RI RERORE RI rinis 162 163 DALLO A conan 162 163 SONO dici irta 60 Keypads COP YIN SOU OS rn 161 maximum number Of 15 programmiInNg iii 152 171 Keys navigation Keys 21 L M Masieri OE ira 160 Modular 192 Module nUumMbErs n 261 N Navigating MenNUS ococcccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 41 NumerlC entries estad as 42 NX 1048 wired keypad SPECI CANO IS ira 170 NX 1048 w
50. Copying message 1s displayed while the zone settings are copied When copying is complete the keypad beeps once and returns to Copy Zone Editing a zone type A zone type is a collection of characteristics All the zones included in a particular zone type share the same characteristics Each zone must belong to a zone type There are 30 pre defined zone types which you can edit To edit a zone type you must enable the advanced menu The following example edits a Day Zone zone type so that the input type is 24 hour 1 e creates an alarm when triggered even if the partition it belongs to is disarmed and it can be automatically bypassed after five alarms within one arm period i Ensure the advanced menu is enabled 2 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Inputs gt Zone Types and press OK 3 Select Day Zone gt Input Type gt 24 hour gt Yes and press OK d eS a O NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 57 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to 24 hour Scroll to Attributes gt Swinger Zone gt Yes and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Swinger Zone Set the value of Inputs gt Swinger Count to 5 For more information see Setting swinger count below Setting swinger count The swinger shutdown function allows the selected zone to be automatically bypassed after a specified number of alarms To configure swinger count you must enable the advanced menu The following example set
51. DL900 software Note In the next steps COM and POS can be connected to any 12 VDC source and DATA does not need to be connected 1 Start the DL900 upload download software 2 Select Program gt Setup gt Direct Connect Settings 3 Select the correct port number and baud rate Protocol must be Binary default The baud rate should match the NX 586E Default is 9600 Click OK Select the account to use Select Download gt Read Panel Data From 586 Select the location in the NX586E from which the data will be retrieved ee os A screen will appear indicating that the data is being read When this screen disappears the process is complete Location programming for the NX 586E The only location used on the NX 586E is location 0 The seven segments have the following functions and meaning Table 39 Segment 1 Used to set the task to perform read or write and display the result of the task requested 0 Idle condition A 1 Read panel configuration into a file COMMAND 2 Write a file s configuration into the panel COMMAND 10 Workino RESULT 11 Invalid command installer entered a value other than 1 or 2 12 Invalid file number installer entered a file number other than 1 4 13 Incorrect panel type the panel and file tyoes do not match RESULT 248 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 14 Incorrect access code the panel and file access code do not match RESULT 15 Timeout the requested command
52. Each telephone number can belong to any combination of the eight HomeText groups and must be assigned to one of the 12 available languages A HomeText group can be sent to one of the report destinations that report specified events All telephone numbers belonging to a HomeText group will receive SMS messages of reported events for that group HomeText Control HomeText allows the users to send and receive SMS messages from a mobile phone to control their security system Messages can consist of a registered telephone number assigned to the particular user a password commands and values o The telephone number part is necessary only 1f the system 1s configured to accept commands from unregistered phones and the user calls from the telephone unknown to the system If entering a phone number also a password is required See the Registered Phone Access and the Any Phone Access menu option descriptions in the glossary The system can be set up to always use a password If so a password must be entered before the command Commands are instructions sent to the security system Values are information that the user wants to send or receive from the system Note More information on HomeText control can be found in Reporting protocols and formats section on page 209 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 199 Report methods SMS Y ou can send reports by SMS in SIA XSIA and Contact ID report formats You can configure one
53. GPRS module is a part of the main panel board so it does not require a separate installation procedure lt is available on the NX xx GSM EUR and NX xx GSM LB EUR panels only not on the NX xx EUR and NX xx LB EUR panels mura Table 6 Wireless equipment Part Number Part Description Purpose rr TX 7001 05 1 INDOOR SIREN 868 MHz This full wireless indoor siren offers you GEN2 wireless communication and wireless operation by batteries with a typical tone il sound output of 108 dB TX 7201 05 1 OUTDOOR SIREN 868 This full wireless outdoor siren offers you MHz GEN2 wireless communication and wireless operation by batteries with a typical tone sound output of 125 dB and an internal flashlight BS7201 Spare battery pack for The 14 Ah lithium battery pack for the the TX 7201 05 1 siren outdoor wireless siren TX 6211 03 1 SMOKE DETECTOR 868 The smoke sensor is a wireless battery MHz GEN2 operated photo electric smoke sensor It incorporates a built in sounder for alarm alerts a visual status LED anda transmitter TX 1211 03 1 LONGLIFE DWS 868 MHz This wireless universal transmitter TX 1211 03 3 GEN2 protects anything that opens and closes such as doors windows and cabinets Moreover there is an extra terminal that allows to connect an additional wired detector The Long Life version distinguishes itself by allowing two gt a batteries to be used and reduce the need for maintenance 18 Networx Version 3 Inst
54. Manual e E 7 E is 7 E 20 a 2 a 2 2 2 z 2 0 a 3 7 MEUS NES E Crores Syotem sus Error mag a em NO 38 REP Jomming FW dammed NO N IN JIV N U un 281 282 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual where e XXX in Device XXX means the NetworX device address e X in Zone X means the zone number Note Tamper from the zone tamper from the expander and tamper from the siren on the board is logged each time a new tamper occurs Tamper Restore and Alarm Restore is reported when the user acknowledges it In the multi partition system it is sufficient to acknowledge alarm or tamper from one of available partitions Note When the keypad used is a Master keypad the faults are additionally filtered based on partitions assigned to the user logged to the current keypad If the user s rights are limited to particular partitions only information about these partitions is displayed Reporting In the EN 50131 Mode the report delivery must be confirmed As a result not all available transmission media may be used as the primary destination SMS and HomeText report delivery cannot be confirmed so they can be used as backup reports only preferably as additional report controls Report Control 2 etc The primary destination in the EN 50131 compliant system can be PSTN GPRS or TCP IP To minimize the report transmission time from the panel to the monitoring station it 1s recom
55. NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Hole DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA segment 1 segment 2 segment 3 A o House Code for output3 Segment 5 X 10 House Code for output 4 Segment 6 X 10 House Code for output 5 283 segment 7 SETI gt House Code for owtgut T_T SSIS X 10House Code for output SMSO X 10House Code for output 284 X 10 UNIT CODE FOR OUTPUTS 1 10 HOMETEXT CONTROL segment segment 2 segment 3 SYN 10 Unit Code for output SEI gt Unit Codeforoutputa A AECI 10 Unit Code for output sement X10 Unit Code for outpat SRI xo Unit Code foroutput O SISSA gt Unit codeforoutpute SSO 10 Unit Code foroutputs O NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 235 Chapter B7 Enrolling modules Figure 27 Enrol menu 1 1 Enrol 1 2 Number of Modules To enrol and default the system modules you must enable the advanced menu Select Maintenance Mode gt Advanced Menu gt Enabled and press OK Enrolling the system modules When you select the enrol modules process new modules are enrolled on both the control panel and the keypad The keypad must enrol modules in order to display the relevant menu options 1 Press OK at the system prompt and enter your installer code 2 Navigate with the NY keys to Enrol Modules gt Enrol and press OK 3 The keypad starts enrolling the modules The Enrolling message is displayed while enrolment is taking place approximately 12 seconds When the modules have been e
56. Note If installer wants to replace a fire sensor the zone type is set to Fire then the installer at the beginning should change the zone type to the other type delete the sensor learn in and mount a new sensor and then set up back the Fire zone type Press and hold the two buttons together This keyfob needs a special procedure to start the learn in mode See the keyfob manual for precise instructions Note If the key sequence that is required to start the learn in mode on the keyfob is accidentally triggered by the user the keyfob creates a new encryption key It stops all communication between the keyfob and the radio module In order to fix it the installer needs to delete the keyfob using the RF Receivers menu and then to learn in the keyfob again 10 Press or press NO repeatedly to leave the programming mode The OK to Exit prompt 1s displayed Press OK The system now functions as a normal alarm system Note You can use the Del RF Device menu option to delete an enrolled RF zone sensor Note lt is recommended to first learn in a detector and then to set up detector s parameters especially the zone type Note Partition number stored with the alarm event is the first partition the triggered sensor belongs to So if the sensor belongs to partitions 1 and 4 the partition number sent with the event will be 1 It should be taken into consideration when setting up multi partition sensors or configuring outputs
57. OK 2 Press OK to select the language you want to edit 3 The current text for the menu option is displayed for example Zone 2 4 Do one of the following Press to toggle between insert mode and overwrite mode insert mode allows you to insert new text and overwrite mode allows you to overwrite existing text Press W to delete the character at the cursor position Press to delete all the characters from the character at the cursor position to the end of the string 5 Press the keys 0 to 9 to insert new characters Each key cycles through lower case and then upper case characters 6 Press OK to accept the changes The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to the menu option 7 Press NO to cancel the changes and return to the menu option Note A flashing cursor highlights the character you are editing Press F2 to toggle flashing on the current word Example To change a zone name from Zone 2 to Upstairs 1 Navigate to Zone 2 and press OK Press F4 to go to the start of the zone name Press F5 to go to the end of the zone name Press to delete all the characters Press 8 four times to enter the upper case letter U eS A Press 7 once to enter the lower case letter p Continue until you have entered the new zone name 7 Press OK to save your changes Note Each character key cycles through lower and upper case letters and language specific characters NetworX Version 3 In
58. PARTITION 2 FEATURE AND REPORTING SELECTIONS 5 segments feature selection data Location 90 is used to enable certain features that the user can access or see from the keypad of the system In addition certain communicator reports are enabled in this location Each of these features can be enabled by partition This location contains 5 segments with eight possible features per segment Refer to location 23 for the feature selections If all the segments are blank nothing enabled the features for partition 1 will be used LOCATION 91 PARTITION 2 ENTRY EXIT TIMERS 6 segments numerical data Location 91 is used to enter the entry and exit times in seconds There are 2 separate entry and exit times Valid entries are 10 255 seconds If all the segments are 0 the entry and exit times for partition 1 will be used Segment 1 Entry time 1 Entry time that will be used when a delay 1 zone type initiates an entry delay Segment 2 Exit time 1 Exit time that will be used for all zones designated as delay 1 Segment 3 Entry time 2 Entry time that will be used when a delay 2 zone type initiates an entry delay Segment 4 Exit time 2 Exit time that will be used for all zones designated as delay 2 Segment 5 Reserved Segment 6 Reserved LOCATION 92 ACCOUNT CODE FOR PARTITION 3 6 segments numerical data The account code that is sent when reporting partition 3 is programmed in location 92 If location 92 is left unprogrammed all 10
59. Partition 4 Special formats LOCATION 18 CUSTOM COMMUNICATOR FORMAT see locations 2 8 and 14 Segment 1 1 On for 1800hz transmit Off for 1900hz 2 On for 2300hz handshake Off for 1400hz 3 On for checksum parity Off for double round parity 4 On for 2 digit event code Off for 1 digit event code 5 On for extended reporting Off for non extended reporting 6 Reserved 7 Onfor20PPS Off for 10 or 40 PPS 8 On for 10 PPS Off for 20 or 40 PPS NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 101 Segment 2 1 On for pager format no handshake required 2 On for 1400 2300 handshake 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Onfor Contact ID 6 Onfor SIA 7 Onfor 3 digit event code 8 OnforDTMF Segment 3 Reserved Segment 4 Inter digit time for pulse format The inter digit time is the value programmed on this location divided by the pulse rate PPS of the programmed format This is programmed in a binary way in order to program the value 10 options 2 and 4 must be selected for value 5 options 1 and 3 must be selected Ex when the value 10 is programmed on segment 4 and a pulse format of 20 PPS is used the inter digit time is 10 20 0 5 sec Download parameters LOCATION 19 DOWNLOAD ACCESS CODE 8 segments numerical data Location 19 contains the eight digit access code that the NetworX V3 must receive from the downloading software before the panel will allow downloading The factory default code is 84800000 LO
60. Polska Portugues Svenska Francais Dansk Deutsch and Norsk Note no national characters are to be used in typed arguments To get a list of SMS commands help Sends a list of valid SMS help n e To get a users details user details user number Sends the users details to user details 2 to receive a message with your phone information about user 2 To get the current configuration list outputs Sends a list of how the list outputs of outputs outputs are currently programmed to your phone Sends a list of all currently To get a list of users list users registered users and their list users phone numbers Disables the SMS system disable phone 32444123456 to disable n control from the particular HomeText control from this phone specified phone phone number To disable access from the disable phone phone number Enables a previously disabled SMS system enable phone 32444123456 to enable specified phone control from the particular HomeText control from this phone To enable access from the enable phone phone number phone number To change your password password new password Changes your password password 44aa44 to change a password assigned to your phone to 440044 To change another persons password phone phone Changes another person s password phone 32444123456 440044 SMS password number new password password to change a password assigned to the number 32444123456 to 440044 Receiving SMS messages from a se
61. Program 76 Siren 8 Telephone Faut 6 Failure To Communicate 2 Program Download amp Log Full 8 TamperRestore Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Partition 2 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 PHONE 2 REPORTING FORMAT 0 PHONE 2 DIAL ATTEMPTS cueca Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Segment 2 Circle Numbers To Program 6 Siren amp Telephone fat 6 Fallure To Communicate 8 Program Download amp Log Full 8 Tamper Restore PHONE 2 SELECTING WHICH PARTITIONS REPORT TO PHONE 2 Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Partition 1 139 140 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Partition 2 Partition 3 Partition 4 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 PHONE 3 REPORTING FORMAT 0 IS PHONE 3 DIAL ATTEMPTS ME 16 Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Segment 2 Circle Numbers To Program 6 Siren amp Telephonerout 6_ ES EM Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program On 1800hz transmit Off 1900hz 1 On pager format no handshake required On 2300hz handshake Off 1400hz On 1400 2300 handshake par on 2 digit event code Of 1digtcode 4 5 On extended reporting Off non 5 On Contact ID extended 7 on 20PPS 0f 100r40PPS 7 on 3dgreventeode segmenta nerone J CSS 18 FORMAT OVERRIDE Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Segment 2 Circle Numbers To Program DOWNLOAD ACCESS CODE 8 4 8 0
62. Recent Closing 2 4 4 1 1 8 Exit Error 2 4 4 2 System Reports 2 4 4 2 1 Tamper Fault 2 4 4 2 1 1 Box Tamper 2 4 4 2 1 2 Expander Trouble 2 4 4 2 1 3 Siren Supervision 2 4 4 2 1 4 RF Sensor Lost 2 4 4 2 1 5 RF Low Battery 2 4 4 2 1 6 CleanMe 2 4 4 2 2 1 Mains Failure 2 4 4 2 2 2 Low Battery 2 4 4 2 2 3 Aux Overcurrent 2 4 4 2 3 Communications 2 4 4 2 3 1 Phone Line Cut 2 4 4 2 3 2 Fail to Communicate 2 4 4 2 3 3 Autotest 2 4 4 2 3 4 Autotest only when Armed 2 4 4 2 2 Power 2 4 4 2 4 Miscellaneous 2 4 4 2 5 Bypass on Force Arm 2 4 4 2 6 First to Open Last to Close 2 4 4 3 Report Codes See next figure 2 4 4 2 4 1 Log Full 2 4 4 2 4 2 Start End Programming 2 4 4 2 4 3 End Download 2 4 5 Custom Format 2 4 5 1 Features 1 2 4 5 2 Features 2 Inter Digit Time NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Figure 19 Report codes menu 2 4 4 3 Report Codes 2 4 4 3 1 Zone Types 2 4 4 3 1 1 1 Day Zone 2 4 4 3 1 1 1 Event Code Same as above 2 4 4 3 1 1 3 CID Code 2 4 4 3 2 Partition Reports 2 4 4 3 2 1 1 Partition 1 2 4 4 3 2 1 1 Restore Partitions 2 4 2 4 4 3 2 1 2 Bypass Same as above 2 4 4 3 2 1 3 Tamper 2 4 4 3 2 1 4 Trouble 2 4 4 3 2 1 5 Sensor Low Battery 2 4 4 3 2 1 6 Sensor Lost 2 4 4 3 2 1 7 Opening 2 4 4 3 2 1 8 Closing For
63. Segment 3 Power up delay in seconds 0 60 seconds 0 no power up delay Segment 4 Siren time in minutes 1 255 minutes Segment 5 Telephone line cut delay in seconds 0 255 seconds 0 no telephone line monitoring enabled Segment 6 Cross zone time in minutes 0 255 0 no cross zoning Segment 7 Chime time in 50 ms 1 20th second increments from 0 12 seconds 0 follows zone 255 latched Segment 8 Dial delay in seconds 0 255 seconds 0 no abort delay Segment 9 Fire alarm verification time in seconds 120 255 seconds 0 no fire alarm verification Values less than 120 s are considered as 120 s Segment 10 Listen in time in seconds 0 255 0 no listen in time Segment 11 Zone activity monitor feature timed in hours days 0 255 0 disabled Segment 12 Auto arming warning timer 1 255 minutes Segment 13 Auto arming retry timer 1 255 minutes Segment 14 Programming Timeout 1 255 minutes 0 15 minutes LOCATION 41 CODE REQUIREMENTS 1 segment feature data Segment 1 1 On enables the 6 digit code option If 6 digit option is enabled all NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 111 arm disarm codes and the installer code are 6 digits If this option is enabled the default user 1 code is 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note If you enable this option verify that the installer code is a six digit code before you exit from programming 2 On requires code entry for the perfo
64. Split reporting Level 1 Level 2 Value Phone Number 1 123456 A Phone Number 2 456789 Phone Number 1 BE5566 A Phone Number 2 445566 Phone Number 1 Phone Number 1 Alarms A Phone Number 1 Alarm Restores MS Phone Number 1 Tampers MA Phone Number 2 Alarms A Phone Number 2 Alarm Restores Phone Number 2 Tampers and Restores 50 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manua Section B Programming the system NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Chapter B1 Selecting the programming mode The NetworX V3 system allows to use two different programming modes location based programming or menu based programming In location based programming you use locations and segments to set appropriate values In menu based programming you use a menu tree to enable disable particular options or to set values To select the programming mode 3 Press OK at the system prompt and enter your installer code 4 The OK LOC AYW MENU prompt displays 5 Press OK to select the location based programming mode or navigate with the MY keys through the menu to work in the menu based programming mode For general information about navigating menus and entering or selecting values see Chapter A4 Programming guidelines on page 39 For general information about location based programming see Guidelines for location based programming on page 45 The basic menu structure 1s as follows Figure 14 Installer menu overview 1 OK LOC ME
65. The Operator access screen opens Enter the current operator and password and click OK e PP A To connect to the panel directly via the serial port select Download gt Connect gt Direct connect using 586 The Connecting message box opens NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 251 7 To connect to the panel via a TCP IP network select Download gt Connect gt Connect TCP IP The IP Address screen opens Enter the IP address and click OK 8 When you are finished uploading or downloading select Download gt Disconnect Note The default operator is Caddx and the default password is 1234 You may have to enter this twice Connecting using a modem You can connect the control panel to the computer remotely via a modem This can be useful if you are not on site and want to connect to the alarm system You can connect normally or connect using answering machine defeat AMD If you use AMD the automatically timed two call answer machine defeat sequence 1s used To use the DL900 software with a modem connection 1 Follow steps 1 5 in Connecting using a serial port above 2 Make sure that the modem settings are correct For more information about modem settings see the DL900 Online Help Select Download gt Connect gt Connect Using AMD A message box opens saying Initializing modem The computer connects to the panel E eS SS When you are finished uploading or downloading select Download gt Disconnect or click the Disc
66. Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition 2 5 1 2 4 2 Tamper if Zone Lost A menu option that sends a report to the central station when a wireless zone sensor is lost and activates a tamper alarm Different reports are sent depending on the system status When armed the tamper and the lost report are sent When disarmed only the lost report is sent System Settings A menu entry that groups programmable system features and reporting options 2 6 1 A menu entry that groups timer options 2 6 1 1 A menu entry that groups time settings relating to zones Fire Verification Time A menu option that sets the amount of time within which a second trip must occur on a smoke detector in order to generate an alarm Zone Inact Unit A menu option that allows the zone inactivity option to be configured in hours or days Zone Activity Monitor A menu option that sets the zone inactivity time It is possible to specify this time in minutes or hours Cross Zone Timer A menu option that sets the cross zone time in minutes This can be from 0 to 255 minutes where O no cross zoning A menu entry that groups the timer options relating to power events Batt Dynamic Test Duration A menu option that sets the length of time that the control panel performs the Dynamic Battery test This can be between 0 to 30 minutes where 0 is no test Mains Report Delay A menu option that sets the length of time between detecting a mains failure on
67. account number The letters B C D E and F can be included in control panel account codes 2 4 1 1 1 3 Protocol A menu option that sets the communicator format used to transmit to the receiver connected to a phone Up to three phones can be set up Multiple formats are available such as Contact ID SIA 4 2 and pager format Contact ID and SIA are the recommended formats Consult the instructions for your central station receiver to determine which format is compatible 2 4 1 1 1 4 Dial Attempts A menu option that specifies the number of dial attempts 1 to 15 attempts that the communicator makes when reporting to the central station 2 4 1 1 1 5 Backup Control A menu option that specifies the way backup call attempts are handled for the particular phone The exact behaviour depends on the phone this setting is programmed for For example programming a 0 will cause the control panel to make the designated number of call attempts to the first backup phone before setting the Fail To Communicate condition and stop reporting Programming a 1 will cause the control panel to stop trying to communicate after the designated number of attempts have been made to the currently programmed phone If a 2 is programmed in this segment it will cause the control panel to make the dial attempts in increments of two The first two attempts will be made to the current phone the next two attempts to the backup phone then repe
68. activate the switch output functionality for the keyfob and correctly set the event triggering the selected output on the particular IO module The following example configures the button 1 on the keyfob light bulb button to allow it to toggle the output 1 on the I O module 4 ON and OFF Note Output cannot be latched when this functionality is enabled i e RF Receiver 32 gt 0Outputs gt I 0 4 Output 1 gt Attributes gt Output Latched MUST be set to NO otherwise after triggering output with the keyfob you will not be able to switch it off with the keyfob Note If the user wants to use the bulb button at the 4 button keyfob to arm the system then the Quick Arm menu option and approprite partitions must be enabled 1 Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Inputs and press OK 2 Scroll to the correct Sensor n where the keyfob is already programmed and then select Keyfob gt Keyfob Funct 1 and press OK 3 Scroll to Switch Output 1 and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Keyfob Funct 1 Navigate with the MY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Outputs and press OK Scroll to 7 O 4 Output 1 and press OK Select Event gt Keyfob Funct 1 and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Event Navigate with the NY keys to I O 4 Output 1 gt Time enter 0 and press OK oS PD E The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Time 10 Nav
69. approximately 12 seconds When the modules have been enrolled a beep sounds and the message disappears To verify the enrolled modules navigate with the NY keys to Maintenance Mode and press OK Scroll to Log Review and press OK When the control panel enrols a module it adds an enrol event to the event log This event contains the module number Scroll through the event log to verify that the GSM GPRS module has been enrolled module ID 78 Each time you exit programming mode the modem resets and restarts and reads the PIN number network operator SMS center number and any other information from the configuration Enrolling the SIM card on the GSM network psn Enter programming mode Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt GSM gt SIM PIN Code and press OK Enter the SIM PIN and press OK Exit programming mode The SIM PIN is automatically enrolled on the GSM network Enrolling the SIM card on the GPRS network SG Enter programming mode Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt GSM gt SIM PIN Code and press OK Enter the SIM PIN and press OK Obtain an Access Point Number from the supplier Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt GPRS APN and enter it You may need to enter the PPP password and PPP user ID required by the network To do this select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt User ID and NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt Password This step is not usually required Exit programming mode The SIM
70. chime is often used as an indication on a shop door There is a beep on chime activation and no beep on deactivation Starts the panic alarm which can be cancelled by entering the user code Depending on the partition settings the panic alarm can be silent or audible see Emergency Keys Silent PA Audible PA Speaker Lockout menu option descriptions in the glossaries The alarm is reported and is listed in the event log Note When you press the panic key and This keypad gt Keypad Features gt Beep on Panics option is disabled no keystroke sound is emitted Starts the medical alarm which can be cancelled by entering the user code The alarm is reported and is listed in the event log For the function to work the Medical Aux 2 menu option must be set for the partition Depending on the Emergency Keys menu option setting this alarm can be silent or audible Starts the fire alarm which is always audible The alarm is reported and is listed in the event log For the function to work the Fire Aux 2 menu option must be set for the partition Allows the user to enter up to three telephone numbers to which events are reported by the control panel It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Phone Numbers menu option For the function to work the User Phone Editing menu option must be enabled and the voice protocol must be set for reporting Voice protocols typically report to the homeowner s mobile phone rather than to the central station The Pho
71. closing time so that auto arm Aux outputs or code authorisation can function properly Segment 1 Program the hour of the opening time Segment 2 Program the minutes after the hour of the opening time LOCATION 53 CLOSING TIME AUTOMATIC ARMING TIME 2 segments numerical data Location 53 contains the time in 24 hour format when the NetworX V3 will disable the disarm capability for codes designated as arm only after closing This is also the time when the automatic arming sequence will begin if this option is enabled in location 55 Note Opening time must be earlier than closing time so that auto arm auxiliary outputs or code authorisation can function properly Segment 1 Program the hour of the closing auto arm time Segment 2 Program the minutes after the hour of the closing auto arm time LOCATION 54 DAYS OF THE WEEK ARM ONLY AFTER CLOSE WINDOW CODES FUNCTION IN PARTITIONS 1 THRU 4 4 Segments feature selection data Location 54 selects the days of the week on which each partition is open On these days arm only after close window codes will be able to arm and disarm during open window On days not selected here arm only after close window codes will not disarm Segment 1 is for partition 1 and segment 4 is for partition 4 see locations 52 and 53 for the opening and closing times for the open days Segment 1 4 1 Arm only after close window will arm disarm on Sunday 2 Arm only a
72. codes sent to the central station when the partition is bypassed 2 4 4 3 2 1 3 Tamper A menu option that groups the report codes sent to the central station when a tamper event occurs 2 4 4 3 2 1 4 Trouble A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when a trouble event occurs 2 4 4 3 2 1 5 Sensor Low Battery A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station if a low battery condition is reported for a sensor in the particular partition 2 4 4 3 2 1 6 Sensor Lost A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when a sensor lost event occurs in the particular partition 2 4 4 3 2 1 7 Opening A menu entry that groups the codes reported on an opening disarm event for the particular partition 2 4 4 3 2 1 8 Closing A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when the particular partition is being closed armed Keypad A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station for keypad related events 2 4 4 3 3 1 Duress Code A menu entry that groups the report codes sent for a duress event A duress situation Is one in which a user is being NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 85 Location Definition threatened and forced to disarm the system A duress code is entered to disarm the system as normal and a duress alarm is activated 2 4 4 3 3 2 Keypad Aux 1 Fire A menu entry that groups the report c
73. entry that groups the wireless keypad options related to the pry off switch 3 3 15 1 Always Tamper A menu option that turns on the wireless keypad s pry off switch It actually fixes the wireless keypad to the wall just like a wired one while disabling this option renders the keypad fully portable within the reach of the RF link 3 3 15 2 Only Arm away if On the Wall A menu option that allows to arm the system in Away mode only if the wireless keypad is on the wall Function Keys A menu entry that groups all programmable function key options Function keys are dedicated for a particular function as programmed by the installer See Programming the function keys on page 154 LA 5 di Set KP Language A menu option that selects the keypad interface languages available to the user It is possible to select up to four languages Language 1 to 4 out of all available interface languages The languages selected here can be then toggled by the user or installer with the OK key 4 5 6 Program KP Text A menu entry that groups the language options of the current keypad It allows the installer to set options such as zone name descriptors and user names 6 3 6 1 Zones Messages A menu entry that groups descriptors such as zone names and custom messages These names and messages are language dependent for example setting a display language also changes displayed zone names to the ones defined for this language Zone Names A
74. entry that groups together the tamper and fault events that are reported to the selected phone number A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when a tamper occurs A report is sent when the previous tamper is no longer active A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when a zone fault condition occurs A report is also sent when the fault condition is no longer active A menu option that sends an expander fault and restore report to the selected phone number A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when a siren or phone line fault occurs A restore report is sent when the fault is fixed A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when an RF sensor is missing A restore report is sent to the central station when the receiver receives a valid signal from the lost transmitter A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when a low battery condition occurs in an RF sensor A restore report is also sent when the low battery condition is no longer active A menu entry that groups the power events that are reported to the selected phone number A menu option menu option that reports mains failure mains restore low battery and low battery restore events to the selected phone number A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when short circuit is detected A restore report is also sent when the short circui
75. feature specifications Environmental Operating temperature 10 C to 55 C Humidity Max 95 non condensing Shipping weight 2279 EN 50131 grade and class Security Grade 2 Environmental Class Il ACE type Type B Fixed Certification CE EN 50131 1 System requirements EN 50131 3 Control and indicating equipment Tested and certified by Telefication B V NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 171 Chapter B4 Programming the other keypads Figure 24 Other keypads menu 4 1 1 Partition 1 4 1 1 Keypad 1 4 1 1 1 Model Partitions 2 4 Keypads 2 4 4 1 1 2 Version Same as above Same as above 4 1 1 3 Reset Settings 4 1 1 4 Switch to EN To program other keypads select Installer Menu gt Other Keypads and select the partition containing the keypad You can view the keypad version and model and default the selected keypad Glossary Location Term Definition 4 Other keypads A menu entry that groups programming options for other keypads in the system 4 1 1 1 Model A menu option that displays the current model of the selected keypad Reset Settings A menu option that defaults the selectedd keypad to factory defaults Version A menu option that displays the current software version of the selected keypad Switch to EN A menu option that switches the selected keypad to the EN 50131 compatible settings For additional information about the EN 50131 norm see Appendix 7 172 NetworX
76. gt Quick Arm menu option was set Some functions are assigned to particular keys by default and can be made permanent fixed at the factory Note When arming the system with a function key both logs and reports show User 98 as the user who armed the system There are the following default key assignments Table 18 Default function key assignments F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Panic Keypad Fire Alarm Arm Away factory fixed key Arm Stay factory fixed key Disarm works in Master Mode only factory fixed key Select zones to bypass factory fixed key Arm in Night Mode Medical You can program any function key unless 1t 1s fixed at the factory The following example configures the F1 key so it performs the manual fire alarm function 1 Navigate with the AV keys to Installer Menu gt This Keypad gt Function Keys and press OK 2 Scroll to F Function gt Fire Alarm and press OK 3 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to F Function 4 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition 1 gt Feature Select gt Keypads gt Fire Aux 1 and press OK 5 Select Enabled and press OK 6 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Fire Aux 1 Table 19 Available function key actions Disabled Arm Away Mode Arm Stay Mode Bypass Zones Disables the function key Arms the system in Away mode Arming with the function key will report as User 98
77. gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt KP Shutdown shows Clock menu option Silent Exit Always A menu option that prevents the exit time buzzer activating whenever the system is armed or during the re exit time Setting this option also doubles the exit delay for example if it is set to 30 seconds it changes to 60 seconds EN Mode A menu option that allows to switch off the EN 50131 Mode This menu option is displayed only when the EN 50131 Mode is active Arm Schedules A menu entry that groups scheduling options These options configure the schedules used by the control panel for auto arming Arm Only After Close A menu option that specifies the days of the week that each partition is open On these days arm only after closing codes will be able to arm and disarm during the open window On days not selected here arm only after closing codes will not disarm Auto Arm A menu option that allows the control panel to auto arm at a specified time At this time the keypad beeps for 50 seconds before the panel arms The arming process is stopped if a code is entered on the keypad 45 Minute Retry A menu option that causes the panel to try to arm after every 45 minutes of inactivity until the next opening time or until the system is armed The 45 minute timer is extended when there is activity in the building This causes the Ready icon to turn off and on If closing reports are sent the user code is 97 A
78. had no data exchange for 3 seconds RESULT 16 Aborted the previous command was aborted by attempting another command RESULT 20 Transfer successful the previous read or write command was successful RESULT Segment 2 Used to hold the file number for the requested read or write command The only valid values are 1 4 This segment is always set to O after any command to prevent accidentally overwriting an incorrect file Segments Used to indicate the panel type stored in files 1 4 respectively 3 6 Results 1 3 applies to the standard Networx panels NX 4 NX 6 NX 8 Result 4 applies to the NX 8E panel Result 10 applies to the NX 4V2 panel Result 11 applies to the NX 6V2 panel Result 12 applies to the NX 8V2 panel Result 15 applies to NetworX V3 panel Segment 7 Used to set the baud rate for the RS 232 connection must match that of the DL 900 program The valid values are 0 7 and will be reset to 4 9600 baud factory default if set incorrectly 0 600 Baud 2 2400 Baud 2 4K 4 9600 Baud 9 6K 6 38400 Baud 38 4K 1 1200 Baud 1 2K 3 4800 Baud 4 8K 5 19200 Baud 19 2k 7 76800 Baud 76 8K Glossary Location Term Definition NX 586E A menu optional device used to interface the up download software directly to the control panel when the on board serial port is not available Files A menu entry that groups the four programming memories in the direct connect module File 1 A menu option that selects the programming m
79. installer leaves programming mode 2 4 4 3 6 6 End Download A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when downloading is complete 2 4 5 Custom Format A menu option that allows you to build communication formats if using a non standard central station Consult technical support before using this option and the related options 2 4 5 1 Features 1 A menu option that allows you to configure your own reporting protocol based on the options enabled Consult technical support before using this option and the related options 2 4 5 2 Features 2 A menu option that allows you to configure your own reporting protocol based on the options enabled Consult technical support before using this option and the related options 2 4 5 3 Inter Digit Time A menu option that sets the inter digit time for custom pulse format time between output digits The inter digit time is the value programmed on this location divided by the pulse rate PPS of the programmed format For example when the value 10 is programmed here and a pulse format of 20 PPS is used the inter digit time is 10 20 0 5 sec Consult technical support before using this option and the related options 2 5 Partition Settings A menu entry that groups all partition settings These settings include partition features partition timers and so on 2 5 1 1 A menu entry that groups timer options Entry Time 1 A menu option that sets the time within which the user
80. is enabled On if restore telephone line cut report is enabled On A B Alarm Off cross zoning On if expander trouble reporting is enabled On if failto communicate report is enabled On if log full report is enabled On if autotest report is enabled On if start end programming report is enabled On if end download report is enabled On if sensor low battery report is enabled On if sensor missing report is enabled On if autotest report is enabled ONLY when the system is armed On enable lost clock indication Reserved Reserved On will allow two trips on same cross zone to activate an alarm On will not allow zones that are force armed to report bypass On enables silent exit option On activate first disarm reporting last arm reporting for partitions On switch summer wintertime and vice versa Reserved On Use internal crystal for clock On zone activity monitor in hours not in days On enables first alarm logic On enables log protection On disables Clean Me report On siren output is steady in case of fire alarm On valid user code will reset tamper memory BELL output only on Networx V3 On dial via GSM when phone line trouble On Exit Error limited to Entry Exit delay 1 Reserved 110 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Note This feature is only used when the GSM module is enrolled by the panel and if the GSM module is used as backup GSM voice channel for the PS
81. location 17 should be left 100 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual at the factory default of 0 If you want dual or split reporting and the split is based on partition then location 16 should be programmed to 0 and location 17 should be used to select those partitions that are to be reported to phone N 3 If no events are to be reported to phone N 3 both locations should be at 0 LOCATION 16 EVENTS REPORTED TO PHONE N 3 2 segments feature selection data Segment 1 1 Alarms 2 Opening and closings 3 Zone bypass and bypass restores 4 Zone trouble and trouble restores 5 Power fail AC failure low battery power restore AC restore and low battery restore 6 Bell cut bell cut restore telephone line restore Testreports 8 Start and end programming download complete and log full Segment 2 1 Zone and box tamper 2 Auxiliary power overcurrent and restore 3 Wireless sensor missing and restore 4 Wireless sensor low battery and restore 5 Expander trouble and restore keypads are considered as expanders 6 Fail to communicate 7 Alarm restore 8 Tamper restore LOCATION 17 PARTITIONS REPORTED TO PHONE N 3 1 segment feature selection data Location 17 is used when the events to be reported to a phone number are based on the partition regardless of the event If this location is used location 16 should be 0 Segment 1 1 Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 4
82. menu option that specifies the name of each zone and allows these names to be edited 3 6 1 1 2 Partition Names A menu option that specifies the name of each partition 168 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Definition Custom Message A This Keypad menu option that edits the custom message Shutdown Message A menu option that edits the message that is displayed on the keypad when the control panel is in shutdown mode Copy Language A menu option that copies information from the current keypad descriptors to another or multiple keypads in the system Included are the zone descriptors custom message shutdown message zone names and partition names User Names A menu option that specifies a name for each user code The maximum length of a user name is 15 characters Zone Type Names A menu option that allows the installer to define names for each installed zone type For example Type 1 can be named Burglary A Alarm Type 2 can be named Fire Alarm Type 3 can be named Entry Exit and so on 3 6 4 Word Library A menu option that enables the word library This is a predefined collection of words that speed up text editing As the user installer types a character the keypad automatically displays a matching word The word library is enabled by default 3 6 5 Copy All Texts A menu option that copies all textual information from the current keypad to all other keypads in the system Included are user n
83. min and press OK to accept the changes 8 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Time Table 16 Control panel output events Data Event Data Event 27 37 6 steady sen 36 telephone inefout Try ys 38 bounloadinproces O Co Aci _ 39 Reseed Disamedstte 52 Autoorm womingime 53 Any siren when in oway mode 5 54 Progress of entry exit follows keypad buzzer 52 53 Zone inactivity Y If set to follow condition these events are one second Note When Event 48 is programmed it is possible to program a user code s authorization to select which output s a particular code activates Configuring the internal siren You can specify conditions and or events that activate the internal siren To configure the internal siren you must enable the advanced menu The following example configures a short blast of the internal siren when the system 1s armed using a keyswitch 1 Ensure the advanced menu is enabled 60 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 2 Navigate with the AV keys to Control Panel gt Outputs gt Internal Siren gt Short Blast On and press OK 3 Scroll to Keyswitch Arming gt Yes and press OK 4 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Keyswitch Arming Programming the keypad sounder You can specify conditions and or events that activate the keypad sounder To configure the sounder you must enable the advanced menu The following example programs the keypad
84. must disarm the partition before a full alarm occurs This time can be between 10 and 255 seconas Exit Time 1 A menu option that sets the time within which the user must leave the protected zone after arming the partition before a full alarm occurs When arming in Away mode the keypad can beep to warn the user see keypad menu options also System Arming Leave Now screen displays until the end of the exit delay time This time can be between 10 and 255 seconds NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 87 Location Definition Entry Time 2 A menu option that sets the time within which the user must disarm the partition before a full alarm occurs This time can be between 10 and 255 seconds Exit Time 2 A menu option that sets the time within which the user must leave the protected zone after arming the partition before a full alarm occurs When arming in Away mode the keypad can beep to warn the user see keypad menu options also System Arming Leave Now screen displays until the end of the exit delay time This time can be between 10 and 255 seconas Feature Select A menu entry that groups all optional features relating to partitions A menu entry that groups the arming characteristics of the selected partition 2 5 1 2 1 1 Quick Arm A menu option that enables the function keys for part arming and for full arming These options work on a single partition keypad only If the Quick Arm menu option is enabled the u
85. optional NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 273 Permission for the installer The installer can access the sytem only with the user s permission even if the installer has the authority to arm disarm the partition Before the installer 1s able to enter the installer code the user must cancel the active screen saver by entering the user code Changing user codes and or rights The installer is not allowed to change any user information The appropriate menu is available for the Master User adding new users deleting users changing user names and authorities or the regular user changing the user s own code and name Note The Master User is not allowed to edit change other users codes The only person allowed to change the user code is the user the particular code belongs to Any changes to the user code or user authorities are logged Two events User Code Changed and User Option Changed are logged in each case respectively Keypad The keypad in a EN 50131 compliant system must have an additional screw keeping the cover in place Screen saver In the EN 50131 Mode the screen saver functionality is always active The screen saver turns on after 30 seconds of the user s inactivity You can also turn it on manually by pressing both arrow keys on the keypad simultaneously To cancel the screen saver you have to enter the user code Note The screen saver also turns on immediately after the Exit Delay expiration e
86. part of the string starting from the current cursor position to the last character or digit eThis button also allows to enter other special characters see Changing phone numbers and phone prefixes on page 42 Press the navigation keys to scroll through menu lists and options Navigation keys When in master mode or not in a menu A ePress to display bypassed zones ePress W to display problem zones Vv When editing text and telephone numbers ePress to overwrite or insert text ePress to delete text Notes F1 F2 F7 and F8 function keys can be programmed by the installer F7 function key is programmed to Night Mode by default Function keys behave differently depending on the settings configured by the installer for example see descriptions for the Quick Arm Instant Stay Toggle and Master Keypad menu options 22 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LCD icons The LCD display for the NetworX V3 keypad consists of two separate sections one for displaying 2 rows of 16 characters of alphanumeric data and one for showing icons The display section on the wireless keypad showing alphanumeric data is only turned ON while the user is operating the keypad and turns OFF 30 seconds after the last key hit The icon section is always ON and shows all kinds of conditions as explained in Table 8 They can either be OFF or ON or they can be flashing to draw attention Table 8 Symbol 1 N W nN a Y Ba a
87. place autotest events in the event log without reporting them You can then configure the GSM GPRS module to report the autotest events You must enable the autotest event in the Control Panel menu using Events gt Communications gt Test Reports options NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 209 Reporting protocols and formats Reporting fixed codes in SIA and Contact ID Table 28 lists the event codes sent for different reports if enabled when using SIA and Contact ID formats The numbers in brackets following the event is the number that is reported as the zone number If there are no parentheses the zone is 0 An asterisk represents the first character from the event code of the zone that is bypassed or in trouble Table 28 Event codes Report Contact ID SIA Report Contact ID SIA Open user number Keypad panic silent Close user number fe w fe End program 628 LX RF sensor restore zone 381 R number Recent close user number 401 CR Sensor low battery zone 384 XT number Exit error user number 457 EE Sensor battery restore zone 384 XR number Fail to communicate 354 RT Zone trouble restore zone 380 R number o 5353 ER Zone tamper restore zone 137 TR number i i i Siren tamper device Early open late close number Siren restore device 321 YH Zone activity fault number Aux power over current Zone activity restore device number Aux power restore device 3 Fail to close number Expand
88. regardless of the number dialled Segment 2 Phone N 3 backup control Programming a 0 in segment 2 of this location will cause the NetworX V3 to make the designated number of attempts to phone N 2 before setting the Fail To Communicate condition and stop reporting Programming a 1 in this segment will cause the NetworX V3 to stop trying to communicate after the designated number of attempts have been made to phone N 3 If a 2 is programmed in this segment it will cause the NetworX V3 to make the dial attempts in increments of two The first two attempts will be made to phone N 3 the next two attempts to phone N 2 then repeating until the total number of attempts designated in segment 1 is completed Reporting events to phone number 3 Phone N 3 can be used as a third receiver to multi report or split report events Phone N 3 has two programming locations that are used to select the events that are reported to this phone number Location 16 is used to select which events are reported to phone N 3 and location 17 is used to select which partitions are reported to phone N 3 If you do not want dual or split reporting location 16 and location 17 should be left at the factory default of 0 If you want multi reporting or split reporting and the split 1s based on the event type such as alarm open close etc then location 16 should be used to select only those events that should be reported to phone N 3 and
89. replacing batteries you have to close the battery compartment in 30 seconds 10 If Type to finish message is displayed press the key to restore normal keypad operation CAUTION Batteries can explode or cause burns when recharged incorrectly dis assembled or exposed to fire or high temperatures Dispose of used battery according to battery directive instructions and or as required by local laws Keep away from children Only replace the batteries with Energizer or Duracell AA batteries Do not use a different type of batteries Always use batteries that are from the same batch and always replace all batteries with fresh ones simultaneously Master mode You can program a keypad to act as a single partition keypad or a master keypad by default A single partition keypad allows the user to arm one partition only while a master keypad allows the user to arm one or more partitions A user with appropriate rights can change a single partition keypad to a master keypad and vice versa 1 Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Master Keypad and press OK di 3 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 161 Select Yes to set the keypad as a master keypad by default Select No to set the keypad as a single partition keypad by default Press OK to save the setting The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Master Keypad Assigning X 10 devices The keypad can be used to activate select
90. reporting 2 4 4 1 2 Zone Bypass A menu option that that sends a report to the central station when zones are bypassed Zone Restore A menu option that sends a report to the central station when zones are restored Zone Trouble A menu option that sends a report to the central station when a zone fault condition occurs Zone Tamper A menu option that sends a report to the central station when a zone tamper occurs Cancel A menu option that enables cancel reporting A cancel report is sent to the central station when the system is disarmed within the time specified by the dialer delay after an alarm Recent Closing A menu option that sends a report to the central station If an alarm occurs within five minutes after the panel has been armed The user number that armed the system is also sent Exit Error A menu option that specifies that the control panel sends an exit error report if an entry exit zone is faulted when the exit delay expires This report is sent along with the user number that armed the system if the panel is not disarmed before the entry delay expires The alarm report is also sent Even if this feature is not enabled the siren sounds if any entry exit zone is faulted when the exit delay expires System Reports A menu entry that groups options relating to system reports Tamper Fault A menu entry that groups together the tamper and fault events that are reported to the central station 2 4 4 2 1 1 Box Tampe
91. segments of numerical data Use location 7 to program the account code that is sent when phone N 2 is dialled A zero in the account code is programmed as a 0 A 10 indicates the end of the account code so program a 10 in the segment immediately after the last digit of the account code If the account code is 6 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 97 digits long program all 6 segments If this location is left unprogrammed account code 1 will be used when the second phone number is dialled LOCATION 8 COMMUNICATOR FORMAT FOR PHONE N 2 1 segment numerical data Location 8 contains the communicator format used to transmit to the receiver that is connected to phone N 2 Consult the instruction manual for your central station receiver in order to determine which format is compatible See Appendix 3 for all available format selections If you require a format other than those listed review the override options described in Location 18 to create the appropriate format In order to create a special format a 15 must be programmed in location 8 in addition to the entries in location 18 If this location contains a 0 format 1 will be used when phone N 2 1s dialled LOCATION 9 DIAL ATTEMPTS BACKUP CONTROL FOR PHONE N 2 2 segments numerical data Segment 1 dial attempts Segment 1 of location 9 is used to enter the number of dial attempts 1 to 15 attempts that the communicator will make to phone N
92. slow speed formats only 2 4 4 3 3 Keypad 2 4 4 3 3 1 Duress Code 2 4 4 3 3 2 Keypad Aux 1 Fire 2 4 4 3 3 3 Keypad Aux 2 Medical 2 4 4 3 3 4 Keypad Panic 2 4 4 3 3 5 Keypad Tamper For slow speed formats only 2 4 4 3 4 Power 2 4 4 3 4 1 Mains Failure 2 4 4 3 4 2 Low Battery 2 4 4 3 4 3 Aux Overcurrent For slow speed formats only 2 4 4 3 5 Tamper Fault 2 4 4 3 5 1 Box Tamper 2 4 4 3 5 2 Siren Tamper 2 4 4 3 5 3 Phone Line Cut 2 4 4 3 5 4 Expander Trouble 2 4 4 3 5 5 Fail to Communicate For slow speed formats only 2 4 4 3 6 Miscellaneous 2 4 4 3 6 1f Log Full 2 4 4 3 6 2 Autotest 2 4 4 3 6 3 Cancel 2 4 4 3 6 4 Recent Closing 2 4 4 3 6 5 Start End Programming 2 4 4 3 6 6 End Download For slow speed formats only The control panel can report to a central station after all or specified events Communication between the control panel and the central station is monitored to ensure against damage or faults The control panel can also communicate with up download software when a download session has been established To program control panel communication options select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt Communications Defining communication with a central station You can specify up to three central stations to which the control panel reports events You can also select the events to be reported to each station For more information on setting up a co
93. symbol which may include lettering to indicate cadmium Cd lead Pb or mercury Hg For proper recycling return the battery to your supplier or to a designated collection point For more information see www recyclethis info NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 3 Table of Contents A e nn PA 9 Salei terme nd Mo 9 ALE NE Sri 9 Section A Installing and programming a basic system seeseseesesersesersesersesersesescesesorsesosorsesorsesoreesoreese 10 Chapter A1 Introducing the NetworX V3 system eseeseseeseseesesessesessesessesesseseseeseseeseserseseesesersesesseseseese 11 NEO VS Ch Mercattel 11 Neiwors VS Tecnica Pess 13 A xiliary currentand battery CIPI lia 14 NAM SO RO S eo eae ee 15 PU 16 Olii n 19 WU O E A E E EET T 19 ELI nn 22 Chapter A2 Installation guidelines csccsccssssscssrcsssssssssssccscsssssssesscsessscsssesessacsscessesscsscessesssscseesesses 25 Mains power connection uan 25 LOISIR E EEEN AEE A e a 25 A e SY NS A 26 Bit A e Re E E E E E E 26 Chapter A3 Installing a basic system ocoocoonoonnonnonnonnnonnonnonnconconconncnnonnconnonconnonnnonconconoconnonconronononacn anos 27 ISIN ur r Polycarbonate ila 27 AM ley oi E A es 29 Moi AX 29 MONTA SS ona 30 Wireless keypad ledrning in 9 0161216 Usen ss 32 MSM ss 33 listo e o o AAPP A 38 MUI na vn rare 38 SMSO VSO UC aii DOCS CNS na 38 Chapter A4 Programming Quidelines ccsccsccsscssssscssssssssssssc
94. tamper occurs The user should identify the cause of the alarm before arming the system and contact the installer if necessary User Code Resets Tamper Memory Use GSM If Line Trouble A menu option that specifies the backup phone number over GSM This phone number is used when the on board dialer fails A menu option that enables first alarm logic This feature affects the way multiple alarms are displayed on a keypad If this option is enabled and multiple alarms occur during an armed cycle the keypad will display the first tripped zone only before disarming After disarming the first zone tripped First Alarm Logic Location 2 6 2 4 5 Networx Version 3 Installation Manual 93 Definition will be the one that says Alarm Memory with the Alarm message flashing If this option is disabled all tripped zones will be displayed as well as all bypassed zones A menu option that prevents a single non zone reportable event to fill up the event memory The event will only be logged for a maximum of 3 times between closings or code entry Log Protection KP Shutdown Mode A menu option that causes the keypad to display a Please Enter Your Code prompt power on icon and NOT OK to arm icon only hiding the system status Note The keypad can be programmed to display the date and time instead of the Please Enter Your Code message This feature can be enabled or disabled by selecting Installer menu gt This Keypad
95. temporary state and after copying is finished all icons will again show correct state of the system Due to the large number of data being transmitted it is recommended that no other operations are performed during copying as it can affect operation of the system It applies in particular to the wireless keypads Guidelines for location based programming You can switch to location based programming mode This mode uses devices locations and segments Please notice that the recommended programming method is to use the menu structure rather than devices and locations In order to use location based programming follow the procedure below 1 Press OK and type your installer code factory default is 9713 If the installer code is valid the OK LOC W MENU screen displays 2 At the OK LOC prompt press OK The Enter the device address screen displays You are now in the program mode and ready to select the module to program Note It is impossible to enter program mode if any partition or the system is armed Selecting the module to program Since all the modules connected to the NetworX system are programmed through the keypad the module you are programming should be the first entry For example to program the NetworX control panel enter 0 The 0 is the module number of the control panel and the is the entry key Other module entry numbers can be found in the corresponding manuals or in Appendix 2 Overview 46
96. than configured zone types A B Cross Zone When this feature is enabled a first trigger from a zone will send a BG report unverified alarm or B alarm for that zone The B alarm message will be written in the log In addition a fix 30 minute timer will start If a zone is triggered for a 2nd time within the 30 minutes time frame this zone will send a BA report burglary alarm or verified alarm to the monitoring station If there is no 2nd zone that was triggered within 30 minutes the timer will be cleared A B alarm reporting only works with intrusion zone types using the SIA formats When this feature is enabled the standard cross zoning feature will be inactive 92 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition Immediate Zone Restore A menu option that sets the way zones are restored When it is On the zones restore immediately In this case all the alarms and restores are sent as they occur even in case of multiple alarms When this option is Off the zones restore only when the siren is off or disarmed In this case a second or subsequent alarm will not be sent until the siren times out Diagnostics A menu entry that groups test options These options specify the tests that can be performed on the control panel Batt Missing Test A menu option that enables a test to determine whether the battery is connected to the system This test is usually performed automatically when the system is first powered u
97. the alarm system using the keypad di Deactivate the box tamper switch on the relevant board If connecting the USB cable to the control panel board Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Inputs gt Box Tamper and press OK o Select Disabled and press OK If connecting the USB cable to the keypad board Navigate with the AV keys to This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Case Tamper and press OK Select Disabled and press OK 4 Start the Flasher application and check what ports are available in the Available Ports list Make notes 1f the list is long 256 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Connect the USB cable to the computer Open the panel housing or the keypad enclosure and connect the mini USB cable connector to the mini USB socket on the panel see Figure 1 position 3 or on the keypad board If the NX 9104 VVMIQ module is installed disconnect the power supply both mains and battery disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the VVMIQ module with the control panel and reconnect the power supply Click Refresh button in the Flasher interface An additional new port will display in the Available Ports list for example COM 5 Under normal circumstances it is the COM port with the highest number and it gets selected automatically Select the new port in the list if necessary In the Flasher application select the e
98. the control panel and sending a report to the central station The restore event is sent four minutes after the mains is restored Power Up Delay A menu option that sets the time between mains restore after a power failure and the system powering up again This can be set from 0 60 seconds 0 means no power up delay Sounders A menu entry that groups timers for the internal siren external siren and chime duration on the keypad Internal Siren Timeout A menu option that sets the length of time the internal siren rings before automatically cutting out This time can be between 0 and 255 minutes When set to 0 the siren is active until a valid code is entered on the keypad Chime Time A menu option that sets the length of time that the chime operates This time can be set in 50 ms 1 20th second increments from 0 12 seconds 0 follows zone Communications A menu option that groups timers for communication events NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 91 Location Definition Dialer Abort Delay A menu option that creates a delay programmed in seconds in reporting an alarm to the central station Listen in Time A menu option that sets the length of time the central station can listen for sounds of intrusion by means of microphones at the alarm site 2 6 1 4 3 Phone Line Cut Delay A menu option that sets the length of time before a phone line cut is signalled after a phone line cut is detected A phone line fault is dis
99. the current software version of the keypad 3 14 Traceability A menu entry that groups the keypad additional information like serial number manufacture date and firmware revision Technical specifications NX 1048 R W wireless LCD keypad Power supply specifications Electronics Optional backlight Battery lifetime typical 6 months Board operating voltages electronics and backlight 21V 31V Current consumption sleep mode alphanumeric 70 0 uA at 3 1 V 5 display OFF Current consumption active mode alphanumeric 21 7 mA at 3 1 V 5 display ON Current consumption transmitting RF alphanumeric 39 1 mA at 3 1 V 5 display OFF Current consumption standby alphanumeric display 9 7 mA at 3 1 V 5 OFF Current consumption optional backlight when ON 30 0 mA at 3 1 V 5 General feature specifications PCB Size Dimensions width x height x depth 158 x 88 x 1 2 mm Housing Size Environmental TypeB Moveoble ACE type Type B Moveable 170 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Certification CE EN 50131 1 System requirements EN 50131 3 Control and indicating equipment EN 50131 6 Power Supplies EN 50131 5 3 Requirements for interconnections equipment using radio frequency techniques Tested and certified by Telefication B V 1 Replace batteries within 30 days after Battery low indicator becomes active NX 1048 W LCD keypad wired Power supply specifications General
100. to the same menu item for the next option For example if you are in a submenu for zone 2 press Y to move to the same submenu for zone 3 Note The keypad may timeout from the menu system and return to the default display Quick User Menu You can access a limited number of menu options without entering your installer code or user code This opens the command menu Commands available in the Quick User Menu allow for example to quickly preview the alarm memory list reset detectors or start the service check Press OK at the system prompt 2 Press the AW keys to enter and navigate the Quick User menu Selecting a menu option Press OK to select a menu option and move forward in the menu structure o Press NO to reject a menu option and move backwards in the menu structure Press F4 to move through the second line of the LCD display one word at a time from right to left Press 2 F5 to move through the second line of the LCD display one word at a time from left to right Changing a menu option The NetworX V3 has several editors that you can use to change the value of certain programmable menu options You can change selection list entries binary entries phone numbers and text This section describes how to change selection list entries binary entries numeric entries and phone numbers For information on changing text see Editing text Changing selection list entries 1 Navigate with the NY keys to
101. with the Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt Report Codes gt Keypad gt Keypad Aux 1 Fire menu option NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 89 Location Term Definition 2 5 1 2 2 4 Medical Aux 2 A menu option that activates a key with the Medical Alarm function assigned for all the keypads in the selected partition see This Keypad gt Function Keys option description When this option is enabled and the Medical Alarm key is pressed at the keypad a medical alarm is generated See Programming the function keys on page 154 Note The report codes in slow formats sent for the keypad aux 2 medical event are configured with the Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt Report Codes gt Keypad gt Keypad Aux 2 Medical menu option 2 5 1 2 2 5 Keypress Tamper A menu option that disables the keypad for 60 seconds and sends a tamper signal to the central station if 30 key presses are entered without producing a valid code 2 5 1 2 2 6 LED Extinguish A menu option that enables or disables hiding status icons on a display for the selected partition If enabled the status icons disappear 20 seconds after the last key press only the power icon stays visible There are two LED Extinguish options one for a partition and one for a keypad in This Keypad menu and both must be enabled for this feature to work on a particular keypad in the particular partition When the user sets the LED Extinguish option for the Cont
102. your system Disarm your system Partarm your system Get the status of the specified zones Get a list of zones with problems Manual Send This arm partition list disarm partition list partarm partition list zone status partition list zone faults partition list Explanation Arms the system remotely Instead of the partition numbers you can use a keyword ALL for all partitions Disarms the system remotely Partarms the system remotely Sends the status of the zonels to your phone for example informs whether the zone is bypassed or open Sending a command without a partition list returns information for all partitions Sends a list of zones with problems like tamper low battery zone lost etc to your phone Sending a command without a partition list returns information for all partitions Example arm 1 to arm partition 1 arm 1 3 to arm partitions 1 and 3 arm all to arm all partitions 32444123456 440044 arm 1 3 to arm partitions 1 and 3 from an unregistered phone where 32444123456 is your registered phone number and 44aa44 is your password disarm 1 to disarm partition 1 disarm 1 3 to disarm partitions 1 and 3 disarm all to disarm all partitions partarm 1 to arm partition 1 partarm 1 3 to arm partitions 1 and 3 partarm all to arm all partitions zone status 1 to receive the message with zone status from zones assigned to partition 1 zone status all to receive the message
103. 0 Address gt House Code scroll to P and press OK oo AE E a a The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to House Code The list of events that can be selected during IO module programming is as follows Table 22 RF receiver output events Nr Event Nr Event Nr Event Ze 24 hour alarm Entry or exit Key FOB function 1 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 179 Nr Event Nr Event Nr Event ESE Steady Siren Fire Ready to arm 59 Armed in STAY mode Any siren 24 Not ready to arm If set to follow condition these events are one second Note Events related to a zone alarm are recognized by the event code stored in zone configuration Therefore events 0 to 4 require correct zone configuration to work as expected particularly Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt Report Codes gt Zone Types must be set correctly For example in order for a 24 hour alarm zone to trigger an IO module the report code must be set to 6 24 Hour Burglary or 9 24 Hour Non Burglary Note Partition number stored with the alarm event is the first partition the triggered sensor belongs to So if the sensor belongs to partitions 1 4 the partition number sent with the event will be 1 lt should be taken into consideration when setting up multi partition sensors IO modules can be also triggered by keyfob buttons This way you can turn on and off some external device or activate a wireless siren To do this you must
104. 02 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receivers gt Receiver n gt Line Number Protocol Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Report Format gt SIA Enable Polling Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Polling Time Up downloading over GSM GSM Data Phone Select NX 7002 Module gt Up Download gt Phone Number Number Note Use the DL900 version that supports GSM downloading Allow Calls from Select NX 7002 Module gt Up Download gt Allow Calls From Note Only allows incoming data calls from specific phone numbers Connection Type Select NX 7002 Module gt Up Download gt Connection Type gt CSD Up downloading over GPRS GPRS IP address Select NX 7002 Module gt Up Download gt IP Address Note Use the DL900 version that supports GPRS downloading NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 207 Report type Information Menu Option required U D Port Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt Port Numbers gt U D Port Connection Type Select NX 7002 Module gt Up Download gt Connection Type gt TCP IP Voice channel Phone Number Select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt Use GSM If Line Trouble Note This can only be used when the phone line monitor is enabled on the panel If you want to use the Voice over GSM as the primary means of reporting program a 10 in front of the phone number Use the latest panel software All pr
105. 1 On if output should be timed in minutes Off if timed in seconds 2 On if output should latch Off if output should be timed 3 On if output should stop timing when the code is entered Off if the output should continue to time when the code is entered 4 On if output should only activate between the closing and opening time in locations 52 and 53 5 On if output should only activate between the opening and closing time in locations 52 and 53 6 On if output should be inverted 7 Reserved 8 Reserved LOCATION 47 AUXILIARY OUTPUT 1 relay 1 EVENT AND TIME 2 segments numerical data Segment 1 Use the chart below to select the event that will activate auxiliary output 1 relay 1 Segment 2 Program the timing from 0 255 minutes or seconds depending on the data programmed in segment 1 location 46 Programming a 0 makes the output follow the event LOCATION 48 AUXILIARY OUTPUT 2 relay 2 EVENT AND TIME 2 segments numerical data Segment 1 Use the chart below to select the event that will activate auxiliary output 2 relay 2 Segment 2 Program the timing from 0 255 minutes or seconds depending on the data programmed in segment 2 location 46 Programming a 0 makes the output follow the event NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 113 Table 17 Auxiliary output event selection Data Event Data Event 6 steady sen 36 telephone inefout Try ys 38 Download inprocess O o Aci _ o Rese
106. 1 1 Destination 15 1 1 1 2 Backup Destination 15 1 1 1 3 15 1 1 1 3 1 Arm Disarm Alarm 15 1 1 1 3 1 1 Alarms and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 1 2 Opening Closing 15 1 1 1 3 1 3 Zone Bypass and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 2 Tamper Fault 15 1 1 1 3 2 1 Tampers 15 1 1 1 3 2 2 Zone Trouble and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 2 3 Expander Trouble and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 2 4 Siren Line Cut and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 2 5 RF Sensor Lost and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 2 6 RF Low Battery and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 3 Power 15 1 1 1 3 3 1 Power Trouble and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 3 2 Aux Short Circuit and Restores 15 1 1 1 3 4 Communications 15 1 1 1 4 Report Delay a 15 1 1 1 5 Report When UT 15 1 2 1 1 1 Receiver 1 15 1 2 1 1 1 IP Address Receiver 2 15 1 2 1 1 2 Account Code Same as above 15 1 2 1 1 3 Receiver Number 15 1 2 1 1 4 Line Number 15 1 1 1 3 4 1 Fail to Communicate 15 1 1 1 3 4 2 Test Reports Miscellaneous 15 1 1 1 3 5 1 Program Download 15 1 1 1 3 5 2 Zone Activity Monitor 15 1 2 TCP IP Reporting 15 1 2 1 Receivers 15 1 2 2 Report Format 15 1 2 3 Receiver Polling 15 1 2 4 Polling Time 15 1 2 5 TCP IP Protocol 15 1 3 1 3 1f SIA Single Evts 15 1 3 SMS Reporting 15 1 3 1 1 Receiver 1 15 1 3 1 1 Phone Number ee SIA Comb d Evts Receiver 2 15 1 3 1 2 Account Code SIA partition mods Same as above 15 1 3 1 3 4 Contact ID 15 1 3 1 3 Pr
107. 10 10 10 MN 10 93 PARTITION 3 FEATURE SELECTION Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 LED extinguish enable Open Close 2 Re Exit 2 Require user code for bypassing 2 Bypass zones 6 Awxiioyi 6 Fnablessientoutoom 6 Cancel 8 Multi Keypress Tamper 8 Finalsetdoor e Etero Segment 4 Segment 5 6 Arming with tampermem comm failure 6 Reserved o 8 Keyswitch zone arms in stay mode 8 Reserved o 94 ENTRY EXIT TIMERS Segment 1 Entry Time 1 e E pr ia Segment 2 Exit Time 1 O ee ee Segment 3 Entry Time 2 0 G Segment 4 Exit Time 2 e o yyy Reserved e N Reserved e E 149 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual PARTITION 4 ACCOUNT CODE 10 10 10 10 10 a 10 PARTITION 4 FEATURE SELECTION Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 LED extinguish enable Open Close 2 Re Exit 2 Require user code for bypassing 2 Bypass zones 6 Auxiloy1 Enoblessilentauto arm 6 Cancel 8 Multi Keypress Tamper 8 Finalsetdoor e Etero Segment 4 Segment 5 6 Arming with tomper memJ comm failure 6 Reserved 8 Keyswitch zone arms in stay mode 8 Reserved ENTRY EXIT TIMERS Segment 1 Entry Time 1 Segment 2 Exit Time 1 Segment 3 Entry Time 2 Segment 4 Exit Time 2 Reserved Reserved CONFIGURATION GROUP 1 ALARM CODE ee g 111 CONFIGURATION GROUP 1 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT Segment 1 Numbers To Program Fire enable for fire zone Delay 1 zone enable to follow Timer 1 Entry Ex
108. 11 Threshold 5 1 9 1 1 1 Low Battery Sirens IO 2 4 5 1 9 1 1 2 Low Aux Voltage Same as above 5 1 9 1 2 Voltage Level 5 1 9 1 2 1 Battery 5 1 9 1 2 2 Auxiliary 5 1 9 1 3 Antipassivation 5 1 9 1 4 Traceability 5 1 9 1 4 1 Serial Number 5 1 9 1 4 2 Manufacture Date 5 1 10 Traceability 5 1 10 1 Serial Number 5 1 9 1 4 3 Firmware Revision 5 1 10 2 Manufacture Date 5 1 10 3 Firmware Revision 5 1 10 4 Model 5 1 11 Reset Settings 5 1 12 Switch to EN NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 173 The built in wireless receiver of the NetworX V3 is compatible with wireless sensors and keyfobs of the type 868MHz Generation 2 only Existing receivers 868MHz FM and 433MHz AM can also be connected to the NetworX V3 databus The NetworX V3 built in receiver is enrolled as module 32 Defaulting the wireless modules You must enrol and default each RF receiver before you begin programming the system 1 Ze Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers and press OK Select the relevant module bus ID and press OK In this case select RF Receiver 32 and press OK Select Reset Settings and press OK A confirmation message is displayed Press OK to accept the default settings The keypad sounder beeps once to confirm the reset Programming the wireless detectors 1 Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers and press OK Note It is recommended to not learn any devices from keypad which belongs to a partitio
109. 146 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 133 This location 1s not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 147 CONFIGURATION GROUP 19 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 148 CONFIGURATION GROUP 20 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 148 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 149 CONFIGURATION GROUP 20 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 150 CONFIGURATION GROUP 21 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 150 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table
110. 3 2 4 1 1 1 4 2 4 2 4 1 1 1 4 2 5 2 4 1 1 1 4 2 6 2 4 1 1 1 4 2 7 Tampers Tamper Restore Zone Trouble and Restores Expander Trouble and Restores Siren Line Cut and Restores RF Sensor Lost and Restores RF Low Battery and Restores 2 4 1 1 1 4 3 Power 2 4 1 1 1 4 3 1 2 4 1 1 1 4 3 2 Power Trouble and Restores Aux Short Circuit and Restores A PEO 2 4 1 1 1 4 4 Communications 2 4 1 1 1 4 4 1 Fail to Communicate 2 4 1 1 1 4 4 2 Test Reports 2 4 1 1 1 4 5 Miscellaneous 2 4 1 1 1 4 5 1 Program Download 2 4 1 1 1 5 Partitions to Report 2 4 2 Up Download 2 4 2 1 Callback Phone Number 2 4 2 2 DL Access Code 2 4 2 3 Callback Required 2 4 2 4 Rings to Answer 2 4 2 5 Answer Machine Defeat 2 4 2 6 Call PC on Autotest 2 4 2 7 Require Code for Download 2 4 2 8 1 System Shutdown 2 4 2 8 2 Local Programming 2 3 2 8 3 Comms Settings 2 4 2 8 4 Download Settings 2 4 2 8 Lockout 2 4 3 Autotest 2 4 3 1 Hours Days 2 4 3 2 Interval 2 4 3 3 Hour 2 4 3 4 Minute 2 4 3 5 Time Since Test 2 4 4 Reporting 2 4 4 1 Partition Rprt 2 4 4 1 1 1 Partition 1 Reports 2 4 4 1 1 1 Opening Closing Partitions 2 4 2 4 4 1 1 2 Zone Bypass Same as above 2 4 4 1 1 3 Zone Restore 2 4 4 1 1 4 Zone Trouble 2 4 4 1 1 5 Zone Tamper 2 4 4 1 1 6 Cancel 2 4 4 1 1 7
111. 3 Scroll to Timers gt Sounders gt Internal Siren Timeout and press OK NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 69 Enter 5 and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Interna Siren Timeout Configuring system features You can specify various system features enable the tests that can be performed on the control panel and set clock options The following example programs the control panel to activate the siren and make a manual test call to the central station during the do self tests 1 Ensure the advanced menu is enabled 2 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select and press OK 3 Scroll to Diagnostics gt Manual Siren Test gt Enabled and press OK 4 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Manual Siren Test 5 Scroll to Manual Dialer Test gt Enabled and press OK 6 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Manual Dialer Test Setting arm schedules Figure 22 Arm Schedules menu 2 7 1 1 1 2 7 1 1 2 27d 13 2 7 1 1 4 2 7 1 1 5 2 7 1 6 E e BP 2 7 1 Arm Only After Close TAR 1 Partition 1 Partitions 2 4 Same as above Partitions 2 4 2 7 2 1 2 Monday Same as above 2 7 2 1 3 Tuesday 2 7 2 1 4 Wednesday 2 7 2 1 5 Thursday 2 7 2 1 6 Friday 2 7 2 1 7 Saturday 2 7 2 1 8 45 Minute Retry Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
112. 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 151 CONFIGURATION GROUP 21 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 134 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 152 CONFIGURATION GROUP 22 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 152 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location 1s not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 153 CONFIGURATION GROUP 22 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 154 CONFIGURATION GROUP 23 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 154 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location 1s not used for slow speed format
113. 4 minutes Fire transmitter supervision windows should be set to 4 hours NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 181 Smoke detectors follow the fire window 868 MHz smoke sensors report every 64 minutes Smoke detectors follow the fire supervision window only and report to the central station when not reporting within the fire window On the wired keypad the RF Zone Lost event 1s signalized by three beeps every 5 minutes On the wireless keypad the RF Zone Lost event is signalized after 15 seconds from the wake up and then every 5 minutes from the last signal if the keypad is in the active mode Please be aware that entering a valid code for example arming disarming suppresses beep signalling for 12 hours This functionality depends also on the Beep on RF loss menu option see Glossary in the keypad chapter Testing wireless sensors The Remote Signal Strength Indication Value RSSI is a measure of the RF reception and is similar to the indication on a mobile phone The value is linked to the level of the signal between the wireless sensors and the RF receiver On an 868 MHz system the RF receiver stores the signal strength of the transmission it receives from the sensor in a specified zone The values in this zone are read as follows Values over 105 The sensor will not work properly and must be moved to another location Values between 105 and 90 The sensor will work but ideally should be moved to another location e Val
114. 5 3 1 Device 1 15 3 5 3 1 1 Unit Code Devices 2 10 15 3 5 3 1 2 House Code 15 4 Model 15 5 Version 15 6 Traceability 15 7 Reset Settings 15 8 Switch to EN 15 3 5 HomeText 15 3 5 2 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 197 You must enrol and default the GSM GPRS module before you begin to program the system For more information on enrolling and defaulting see Enrolling the system modules on page 235 To program the GSM GPRS module select Installer Menu gt NX 7002 Module Programmable options You can program the module using a keypad or DL900 software You can select the following e The reporting format to be used e The reporting destination e The reporting connection parameters e The reportable event selections e When reports are sent e The upload download destination e The upload download connection parameters e Download sessions during test calls Reporting Overview When an event occurs depending on how the GSM GPRS module is programmed it is formatted as an XSIA SIA or Contact ID event It can then be sent out via TCP IP or SMS TCP IP reporting can take place over a GPRS PPP network SMS reporting can take place over a GSM network There are twelve configurable report destinations SMS reporting can use a maximum of two TCP IP reporting can use a maximum of two and HomeText reporting can use a maximum of eight report destinations There are six
115. 76 Weve lg pila a vs an 176 COTA T e US E E E E E EE 177 ONC IO Modil iano 177 Setting SUPervisiON WINGOWS ccssessssssssessssesssecsssscsssessecsssscsssssssscssecsssscssscssusessscssssssseessscessecssecssecssecesseeen 180 Testing wireless SENSO Stone peer nao 181 Disabling Wien 182 COS 182 Programming locatons tor Me RF CONIC lai 187 Chapter B6 Setting up the GSM GPRS module NX 7002 omoooooomommomoomomosmmmrsm 191 A A EEE E A E E A 191 Enrolling the GSM GPRS MOS satis 191 Enrolling th SIM card onthe GSM NetWoOr Kessen 192 Enrolling the SIM card on the GPRS MO Osorio pei 192 eca EES e N E E A EEE i 193 TRI 194 Testing Te GSM or GPRS CONNEC ON iii 194 Programming the GSM GPRS module NX 002 scr cicesciscalassdtecoassssoxtsasssccusasusnnciatsdtenalesureneistehassesstetasaite 196 Programmable opor essersi nae A 197 Foca 197 VOI 197 lo en 199 RODO CON MONA Spas 199 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 7 Primary gnd secondary reporting assisas naaie e iE E Eine ins D 199 GSM GPRS module as backups MSP lso tan oes 200 GSM GPRS module as backup audio Fe DOMINO rina 200 o A eee eee 202 a 202 REPO SUMMO rro eii 203 Una me CCPR MOUE asas 207 Obtaining the GSM GPRS module Status 207 TAN ila 208 UO RR RR 208 Reporting protocols ana oro 209 Reporting fixed codes in SIA and Contact Dista 209 Pepoli 210 HP UNITS 210 MCR aaa ee 212 o 0 PR RA 213 Receiving SMS messages from a security SYSTEM ceecsecss
116. A menu option that activates an output after closing time and before opening time During these times codes can be used to arm disarm the system A timer is used to set these times 2 2 1 1 5 4 Only if Open A menu option that activates an output between opening time and closing time 2 2 1 1 5 5 Inverted A menu option that enables a mode that inverts the state of an output normally activated and then deactivated when an event occurs Internal Siren A menu entry that groups options that set the conditions events that activate the internal siren This is a siren which sounds within the building A menu entry that groups events that activate the internal siren Phone Line Cut A menu entry that groups options that activate the internal siren when a phone line cut event occurs 2 2 2 1 1 1 When Armed A menu option that activates the internal siren if a phone line cut event occurs while the system is armed 2 2 2 1 1 2 When Disarmed A menu option that activates the internal siren if a phone line cut event occurs while the system is disarmed Tampers A menu option that activates the internal siren when a tamper occurs Expander Trouble A menu option that activates the internal sound when an expander trouble condition occurs Cross Zone Verification A menu option that activates the internal siren during a cross zone verification time 2 2 2 2 Short Blast On A menu entry that groups internal sounder options Each option specifies a tim
117. A menu option that sends a report to the central station when the system is armed late or disarmed early If an opening occurs before the preset opening time the control panel will send an Early Open report If it fails to close on or before the designated closing time the control panel will send a Late to Close report You can set up the opening and closing times by setting the respective options in the Control Panel gt Arm Schedules menu group 2 5 1 2 1 12 Auto Arm in Stay Mode A menu option that allows to autoarm the partition in Stay mode You can set up the automatic arming and disarming times by setting the respective options in the Control Panel gt Arm Schedules menu group 2 5 1 2 2 Keypads A menu entry that groups keypad options 2 5 1 2 2 1 Silent PA A menu option that prevents all audible and visual indications when a personal attack alarm occurs 2 5 1 2 2 2 Audible PA A menu entry that causes the keypad to beep and sounds the internal and external sirens when a PA alarm is activated 2 5 1 2 2 3 Fire Aux 1 A menu option that activates a key with the Fire Alarm function assigned for all the keypads in the selected partition see also This Keypad gt Function Keys option description When this option is enabled and the Fire Alarm key is pressed at the keypad a fire alarm is generated See Programming the function keys on page 154 Note The report codes in slow formats sent for the keypad aux 1 fire event are configured
118. AMPER RESTORE AC FAIL AC RESTORE LOW BATTERY LOW BATTERY RESTORE POWER SHORT POWER SHORT RESTORE OPENING CODE COMMUNICATOR CODE Segment1 Opening Code for partition 1 O IN Segment2 Opening Code for partition 2 i i ny Segment 3 Opening Code for partition 3 a Segment4 Opening Code for partition 4 a CLOSING COMMUNICATOR CODE Segment1 Closing Code for partition 1 Segment2 Closing Code for partition 2 Segment3 Closing Code for partition 3 Segment4 Closing Code for partition 4 AUTOTEST COMMUNICATOR CODE RECENT CLOSING AND EXIT ERROR START PROGRAMMING END PROGRAMMING RESERVED END DOWNLOAD ANCEL COMMUNICATOR CODE 4 BUS FAULT BUS FAULT RESTORE 85 RESERVED N NI QO i MLR oO mm 7 66 68 69 ES 80 PARTITION 1 ACCOUNT CODE 10 10 10 10 10 10 PARTITION 2 ACCOUNT CODE 10 10 10 10 10 10 PARTITION 2 FEATURE SELECTION Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 LED extinguish enable Open Close zones Audible Panic Enables bypass toggle 148 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 6 Auxiiayi 6 Enablessientauto arm 6 cancel 8 Multi Keypress Tamper 8 Finalsetdoor e eieo Segment 4 Segment 5 6 Arming with tamper mem comm failure 6 Reserved o e Keyswitch zone arms in stay mode 8 Reserved 91 ENTRY EXIT TIMERS Segment 1 Entry Time 1 Segment 2 Exit Time 1 Segment 3 Entry Time 2 Segment 4 Exit Time 2 Reserved Reserved PARTITION 3 ACCOUNT CODE 10 10
119. Arm AWAY if On the Wall 3 4 1 F1 Function F2 F8 Functions Same as above 3 4 Function Keys 3 5 Set KP Language 3 5 1 Language 1 Languages 2 4 Same as above 3 3 14 8 1 1 3 3 14 8 1 2 Unit Code House Code 3 6 Program KP Text 3 6 1 Zones Messages 3 6 1 1 lt Language 1 gt 3 6 1 1 1 Zone Names Languages 2 4 Same as above 3 6 1 1 2 Partition Names 3 6 1 1 3 Custom Message 3 6 1 1 2 1 1 Partition 1 3 6 1 1 3 1 Line 1 User Names 2 99 Same as above 3 6 1 1 4 Shutdown Message 3 6 1 1 3 2 Line 2 3 6 2 User Names 3 5 3 1 1 User Name 1 361 111 1 Zone 1 Zones 2 48 Same as above Partitions 2 4 Same as above 3 6 1 1 5 Copy Language 3 6 3 Zone Type Names 3 5 4 1 1 Day Zone Zone Type Names 2 30 Same as above 3 6 4 Word Library 3 6 5 Copy All Texts To One Keypad 3 7 37 1 3 7 1 1 1 Copy Keypad 1 Partition 1 Partitions 2 4 Keypad 1 Keypads 2 4 3 7 2 To All Keypads Same as above Same as above 3 8 Load Country Defaults 3 9 Reset Settings 3 10 Switch to EN 3 1 Diagnostics 3 11 1 Good Packet Count 3 11 2 Checksum Fail Packet Count 3 11 3 Framing Error Packet Count 3 11 4 Last Bad Packet 3 12 Model 3 13 Version 3 14 Traceability 3 6 1 1 5 1 Language 1
120. B10 Programming with the DL900 software ocoonoonconcoononnonncnnnonacononoconconnonnconconnoncnoonnonos 250 Orca 250 Connecting the panel to the computer asma oi 250 Connecung using G serdi Oraciones ces 250 Sas e AAA 251 Programming with upload download SOMWATE escri aii 251 Forana tak adi Oe nner 252 Chapter B11 UpdoatingfirmwWare asian aaa 255 CV RIE 255 orade O lle 255 Section C References lei 257 Appendix 1 Reporting codes in Contact ID or SIA 258 Appendix lt Overview of Monna 261 NX 1 01E door Swipe Mods eee ae nan en eo EO NRS RRR 262 KR 00 262 o o a 263 Appendix A Service MessadES inscriba 264 ARIES 267 Append O Word 19 OTY oidos 268 APP 96 1 ENSULS COMP INC E AE ES 269 SSN 269 Win ele KA OA 273 lina 274 A 275 PICO 275 CV 275 Scheduled arming diarii PRRSRBRRRRRR RE RR ERRO AC AT 275 PRC Slan 275 a 276 Prevention of setting and fault acknowledging ccccccocnncnnnnncnrreos 279 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 9 Preface This is the NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual This document includes an overview of the product and detailed instructions explaining how to install and configure the components of your NetworX V3 system and e how to program the system To use this document effectively you should have the following minimum qualifications a basic knowledge of alarm systems and components and a basic knowledge of electrical wiring and low voltage electrical c
121. CATION 20 NUMBER OF RINGS TO ANSWER 1 segment numerical data Location 20 contains the number of rings to answer for a download Enter a number from 0 disabled to 15 Factory default is 8 so the NetworX V3 will answer after 8 rings LOCATION 21 DOWNLOAD CONTROL 1 segment feature selection data Location 21 contains the feature selections to control download sessions The following features can be enabled or disabled using this location see the feature definitions on pages 5 11 Segment 1 1 On enables two call answering machine defeat 2 Reserved 3 On requires call back before download session 4 Shutdown can only be viewed from the keypad must be changed by downloading 5 On locks all local programming can only be viewed from the keypad must be changed by downloading 6 On locks programming of all locations associated with the communicator can only be viewed from the keypad must be changed by downloading 102 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 7 On locks out download section If On locations 19 22 cannot be viewed from the keypad can only be viewed from the keypad when Off 8 On enables call back at auto test interval LOCATION 22 DOWNLOAD CALL BACK NUMBER 20 segments numerical data If a telephone number is programmed into this location and Require Call back is enabled in location 21 the control panel will hang up for approximately 36 seconds ensu
122. Cross Zone Verification Arming Exit Delay Expired Closing Kissoff Keyswitch Arming 2 2 3 Keypads 2 2 3 1 Sound On 2 2 3 1 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 3 1 3 2 2 3 1 4 2 2 3 1 5 2 2 3 1 6 2 2 3 1 7 2 2 3 1 1 1 When Armed 2 2 3 1 1 2 When Disarmed Phone Line Cut Mains Failure Low Battery Cross Zone Verification Tampers Expander Trouble Emergency Keys The control panel includes up to 2 programmable on board auxiliary outputs To program on board outputs select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt Outputs Configuring an output You can change the characteristics of each output You must specify the events and or partitions that activate an output and the length of time for which the output is activated The events are grouped in the programming tree A full list of all possible selectable events can be found in the Table 16 Control panel output events The following example configures output 1 to activate for 15 minutes when a burglary alarm occurs 1 press OK Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Outputs gt Prog Outputs gt Output 1 and Scroll to Event gt Alarms gt Burglary Alarm and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Alarms Scroll to Time Unit gt Minutes and press OK NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 59 5 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Time Unit 6 Scroll to Time and press OK 7 Select 75
123. DE 1 segment numerical data Location 124 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 125 CONFIGURATION GROUP 8 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 129 LOCATION 126 CONFIGURATION GROUP 9 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 126 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location 1s not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 127 CONFIGURATION GROUP 9 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 128 CONFIGURATION GROUP 10 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 128 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event
124. Dual reporting configures the control panel to report to two different central stations Events must be reported to both phone numbers The control panel dials the first number twice If it cannot reach this number it dials the second number twice It performs this sequence for the number of times specified in Dial Attempts or until it reports the events to both numbers The same account code is used to report to both numbers Events for phone number 1 are enabled by default and events for phone number 2 are disabled by default Table 13 Dual reporting Level 1 Level 2 Value State Phone Number Phone Number 1 123456 MA Phone Number 2 456789 Account Code Phone Number 1 BE5566 Phone Number 2 445566 i NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 49 Level 1 Level 2 Value Premi aci ee Fmi i premian Freire ee Freire rome mani ins Split reporting Split reporting configures the control panel to report to two different central stations Some events must be reported to phone number 1 and others to phone number 2 The control panel dials the first number twice If it cannot reach this number it dials the second number twice It performs this sequence for the number of times specified in Dial Attempts or until it reports the relevant event to each number The same account code is used to report to both numbers Events for phone number 1 are enabled by default and events for phone numbers 2 are disabled by default Table 14
125. E E EA 56 Setting WINS COUM rias 57 occ I EAE EEE EN AAE 58 CONJUNT ON O ia 58 Ene A 59 Programming mie keypad sound escaso E 60 I AR OA 60 SAna Up the NF 60 Setting COMMUMICAUON ODOT OINS iaa ica 62 Defining communication with a central Station o cccccinnnerreeres 63 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 5 Defining communication with a mobile PONE emanan cimas 64 Defining communication with upload download Software onccocancconannninnnncninnncinnecnnece 64 CONAGUA the yoten IUO E 65 ENDING TEO A seein ikera RO E R 65 UIL 66 NG DU f8 SERRE ZIA COR RR ARR RO RO IA 66 A dii 67 E A VEN E SA V AITA eg eee eee 68 A WNC a E E O RR ees ada ess 68 Conngurnno e 69 SUM ORE E E E gt E RR NAE A E ANNE TES 69 SUO 08 A A 70 Cl 05 AY AEE EAE EA IO RIE O TO 70 Control iso doo rel o e 94 o Teo PCE See ae ETE EEE a 94 Reporing events to phone NUMDET Liasis rel nnn fe Ona 95 E Enea E ke A A AEA ANE A 96 Reporting events to phone NnUMber 2 iaia 97 TAN UDO nina 98 Reporting events to phone NUMDbEeTr 3 sirenas 99 ulivo 100 PORRI Sunat 101 Feature and report selections for partition Uisusntan slds 102 EU ENS ina 103 Zone configurations and partition selection usina allas 104 o 108 Programming ihe Aa 112 Setup for auto test auto arm and opening closing times 113 Communicator codes for slow speed formats OnlyY sssssssssssssesssssssssrrrrrressssssssssssssrsrerrrrrrrreresss 115 Programming partition DO
126. ENT CLOSING AND EXIT ERROR COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 80 contains the tens digit for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Recent Closing and or Exit Error Reporting is enabled Segment contains the tens digit for the Recent Closing Reporting Segment 2 contains the tens digit for the Exit Error Reporting The ones digit 1s the ones digit of the user number that did the opening If the user 1s greater than 9 the numbers will begin repeating e g code 6 6 code 45 5 If you need to report Recent Closings and Exit Errors with a unique code per user Contact ID or SIA format must be used LOCATION 81 START PROGRAM AND END PROGRAM COMMUNICATOR CODES SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 81 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Start End Programming Reporting is enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit of the Start Program Reporting Segment 2 contains the ones digit of the Start Program Reporting Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the End Program Reporting Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the End Program Reporting For a 3 1 format only the segment digit resp segment 3 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 82 END DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data 122 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Locat
127. External Contact For 433 RF receivers only 5 1 5 1 8 Smoke 5 1 5 1 8 1 Tamper For 433 RF receivers only 5 1 5 1 9 Enabled 5 1 6 Outputs 5 1 6 1 I O 1 Output 1 5 1 6 1 1 Event Outputs 2 8 5 1 6 1 2 Zone User Same as above 5 1 6 1 3 Time Unit 5 1 6 1 4 Time 5 1 6 1 5 Partitions 5 1 7 I O Output User Auth 5 1 7 1 User 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 Pulse On 5 1 6 1 6 1 Arming 5 1 6 1 6 2 Exit Delay Expired 5 1 6 1 7 Attributes 5 1 6 1 7 1 Output Latched 5 1 6 1 7 2 Code Stops Timer 5 1 6 1 7 3 Log Event 5 1 6 1 7 4 Global Siren External Siren 5 1 6 1 8 X 10 Address 5 1 6 1 8 1 Unit Code 5 1 6 1 8 2 House Code 5 1 8 Receiver Features 5 1 8 1 Jam Detection 5 1 8 2 Supervision 5 1 8 2 1 Normal Window 5 1 8 2 2 Short Window 5 1 8 2 3 Fire Window 5 1 8 3 Keyfob User ID 5 1 8 4 Keyfob Disarming 5 1 8 5 Wake Up Options 5 1 8 5 1 RF Keypad 1 5 1 8 5 1 1 Wake On Entry Timer 5 1 8 5 1 2 Wake On Exit Timer 5 1 8 5 1 3 Wake On Pulsing Buzzer 5 1 8 5 1 4 Wake On Chime 5 1 8 6 IDs 5 1 8 6 1 Encryption Key 5 1 8 6 2 System ID 5 1 8 7 Attenuated Mode 5 1 8 6 3 Device IDs eN RF Keypads iii RF Sirens IO 5 1 9 Sirens IO Features 5 1 9 1 RF Siren IO 1 5 1 9 1
128. FIRE 20 AUXILLARY 2 PANIC 21 B ALARM x 22 PANIC x 23 KEYPRESS TAMPER x 24 CONTROL BOX TAMPER x 25 CONTROL BOX TAMPER EVENT x 26 AC FAIL 27 AC FAIL RESTORE 28 LOW BATTERY x 29 30 SL Se 33 34 33 36 Sf 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 55 54 DO 56 Y 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 LOW BATTERY RESTORE OVER CURRENT OVER CURRENT RESTORE SIREN TAMPER SIREN TAMPER RESTORE TELEPHONE FAULT TELEPHONE FAULT RESTORE EXPANDER TROUBLE EXPANDER TROUBLE RESTORE FAIL TO COMMUNICATE LOG FULL USER OPENING USER CLOSING USER EXIT ERROR USER RECENT CLOSING AUTOTEST START PROGRAM END PROGRAM START DOWNLOAD END DOWNLOAD CANCEL GROUND FAULT GROUND FAULT RESTORE MANUAL TEST CLOSED WITH ZONES BYPASSED START OF LISTEN IN TECHNICIAN ON SITE TECHNICIAN LEFT CONTROL POWER UP EARLY TO OPEN LATE TO CLOSE RF JAM RF JAM RESTORE ZONE CLEAN ME ZONE CLEAN ME RESTORE RESERVED RESERVED VERIFIED FIRE VERIFIED FIRE RESTORE USER OPENING AFTER ALARM FORCED DOOR FORCED DOOR RESTORE OFF NORMAL AUTOTEST Networx Version 3 Installation Manual x _ xXx _ xXx X XX X X Xx 277 278 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Te 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 95 94 95 96 af 98 99 100 101 103 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 RAM CHECK FAILURE ROM CHECK FAILURE SYSTEM INACTIVITY A
129. FOCOS atea olaaa 122 Programming zone configuration OPUS scr 125 NetworX V3 location programming worksheets cccsssecssescssecssssssseessessssecssessssecssessseecssecssssesseesseeessecseseen 139 Chapter B3 Programming the NX 1048 keypad essesesseseseesesossesessesessesesseseseesesoesesessesessesosseseseesesesees 152 B E AEEA A RIA 152 Contigurind the NX 1948 keypad Tedlur CS isis taae a 154 E OO aa E A E ct 154 Programming the UNION VS lla 154 Seting up NS tan DES We orita nS ect enai a aeae on ES 157 as 157 MOSter IN 160 6 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Pn T OAE E eae nr E este E ere eee 161 E e 161 CNMI 161 Setting installer Messages ecesssesssessssscssessssesssecssussssscssssessscssscsssecssusessscssecssseessscesusessecssvessseessecssecesseeen 162 Setting the keypad partition and keypad NUMBET iii ii 162 Seting the e DUERO DUO unn eiada 162 ce A 164 Espoo o SR A 169 Chapter B4 Programming the other keypadS ssl lies 171 TO tod 171 Chapter B5 Setting up the RF receivers cscsscsscescesscsscsscessssesscescessessesecsassssessececsssessesseesessesseeaseass 172 o TIMI Sy CU eeepc ai 172 Deta lting the wireless MOSS dond 173 Programming the wireless CetectorS ccocnmemmmmmmsrms 173 Learning in additional wireless keypadS sssssessessssssssssresssssssssssssssssrsrerrirrrrrerssssssssssssnsrererirrrnrerrens 174 Deleting Wireless HS DOS ATA 175 Eero g ae e i SEEN diet 1
130. GROUPS CHARACTERISTIC SELECT massa O 126 CONFIGURATION GROUPS ALARM EVENT CODE __ eis 128 CONFIGURATION GROUP 10 ALARM EVENT CODE s ooo 129 CONFIGURATION GROUP 10 CHARACTERISTICSELECT 261278 130 CONFIGURATION GROUP 11 ALARM EVENT CODE 131 CONFIGURATION GROUP 11 CHARACTERSTICSELET son 13 CONFIGURATION GROUP 12 ALARM EVENT CODE S 133 CONFIGURATION GROUP 12 CHARACTERSTICSELECT 467125 245678 134 CONFIGURATION GROUP 13 ALARM EVENT CODE O _ 4 135 CONFIGURATION GROUP 13 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 0425625678 5125625678 138 CONFIGURATION GROUP 15 ALARM EVENT CODE 139 CONFIGURATION GROUP 15 CHARACTERISTICSELECT 457125625678 140 CONFIGURATION GROUP 16 ALARM EVENT CODE 11 CONFIGURATION GROUP 16 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 0 1256 25678 142 CONFIGURATION GROUP 17 ALARM EVENT CODE 143 CONFIGURATION GROUP 17 CHARACTERISTICSELECT OY 145 CONFIGURATION GROUP 18 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 6125725678 146 CONFIGURATION GROUP 19 ALARM EVENT CODE 147 CONFIGURATION GROUP 19 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 61257 25678 148 CONFIGURATION GROUP 20 ALARM Eventeo oo o 149 CONFIGURATION GROUP 20 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 61245 25678 150 CONFIGURATION GROUP 21 ALARM EVENT coo o a 151 CONFIGURATION GROUP 21 CHARACTERISTICSELET 26425278 152 CONFIGURATION GROUP 22 ALARM EVENT CODE a 153 CONFIGURATION GROUP 22 CHARACTERISTICSELECT 265478 154 CONFIGURATION GROUP 23 ALARM EVENT CODE
131. Installation Manual 225 GSM GPRS module location based programming worksheets In the table below you can find all the data required for location based programming In order to program the GSM GPRS module you should follow the procedure below 1 Press OK to enter programming mode 2 Next type your installer code At the OK LOC prompt press OK The Enter the device address prompt displays You are now in the program mode and ready to select the module to program 3 Press 78 to select the GSM GPRS module 4 Program the values from the table below 5 When all the desired changes in programming have been made quit programming mode for the GPRS module by pressing twice the NO key The NetworX V3 will exit programming and return to the Enter the device address level Pressing twice the NO key again will exit the program mode Note Each time you exit programming mode the modem restarts and reads the PIN number network operator and SMSC address number from the NX 7002 configuration Table 35 NX 7002 programming worksheets Factory defaults are in bold italic text DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Segment 2 Circle Numbers To Program 3 Remote initiated download must be from 3 Reserved known source Enable remote download at test time 5 Enable auto answer incoming CSD GSM 5 Reserved download call Callback required for incoming CSD GSM Reserved download ca
132. KP KP KP KP KP KP NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 271 Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt System Reports gt Tamper Fault gt RF Low Battery Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt System Reports gt Tamper Fault gt RF Sensor Lost Control Panel gt Communications gt Central Station gt Phone Numbers gt Phone Number n gt Events gt Communications gt Fail to Communicate Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt System Reports gt Communications gt Autotest Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Clock gt Summer Winter Time Control Panel gt Codes gt Installer Code gt Authority gt Arm Disarm Control Panel gt Codes gt Installer Code gt Authority gt Reports Open Close Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition n gt Feature Select gt Keypads gt LED Extinguish Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt gt Partition n gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt Mains Batt Sounder Alert Control Panel gt System Settings gt Features Select gt Miscellaneous gt Silent Exit Always NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Attempts gt FTC Report Attempts NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Line Fault Indication NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Line Fault Reporting NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Attempts gt Report Timeout NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receiver Polling NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Polling Time NX 7002 Module gt Rep
133. NU 2 Control Panel 3 This Keypad 4 Other keypads 5 RF Receivers 6 NX 1701E Proximity Readers 7 NX 1750 Proxpad 8 NX 216 E Input Expanders 9 NX 320 I Power Modules DO O o 10 NX 507 508E Output Expanders 11 NX 534E Listen in Module 12 NX 535 Voice Module 13 NX 584 Home Automation 14 NX 586E Direct Connect 15 NX 590E TCP IP Module 16 NX 7002 GPRS Module 17 1 NX 910x VVM 18 Enrol Modules 19 Maintenance Mode Note For NX xV1 panels when entering the installer menu the menu tree is limited to the following entries Device Loc Enrol Modules This Keypad and Other Keypads 51 52 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Note Recording and playback of voice messages for example for NX 535 cannot be performed with the NX 1048 location mode You can record and play voice messages using the menu system only NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 53 Chapter B2 Programming the control panel Overview You must default the control panel before you begin to program the system For more information on enrolling and defaulting see Chapter B7 Enrolling modules Programming inputs Figure 15 Inputs menu 2 1 1 Zones 2 1 1 1 1 Zone 1 EEEF Zone Type Zones 2 48 Same as above If more than 8 zones 2 1 1 1 2 Zone Name 2 1 1 1 2 1 lt Language 1 gt zones are first displayed in groups of 8 and then as Languages 2 4 a
134. NetworX Version 3 Alarm System 1070138 Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Manufacturer Certification European Union directives Copyright O 2010 UTC Fire amp Security All rights reserved This document may not be copied or otherwise reproduced in whole or in part except as specifically permitted under US and international copyright law without the prior written consent from UTC Fire amp Security Document number revision 1070138 September 2010 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE UTC FIRE amp SECURITY ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR INACCURACIES OR OMISSIONS AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITIES LOSSES OR RISKS PERSONAL OR OTHERWISE INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY OF THE USE OR APPLICATION OF ANY OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT FOR THE LATEST DOCUMENTATION CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SUPPLIER OR VISIT US ONLINE AT WWW UTCFIREANDSECURITY COM GE and the GE monogram are trademarks of the General Electric Company and are under license to UTC Fire amp Security 9 Farm Springs Road Farmington CT 06034 4065 NetworX product and logo are registered trademarks of UTC Fire amp Security Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products UTC Fire amp Security Americas Corporation Inc 1275 Red Fox Rd Arden Hills MN 55112 6943 USA Authorized EU manuf
135. OUP 8 segments numerical data Location 31 contains the configuration group zone type for zones 25 32 Segment 1 is for zone 25 segment 8 is for zone 32 You will find the default configurations in the table above LOCATION 32 PARTITION SELECT ZONES 25 32 8 segments feature selection data Location 32 is used to select the partition s in which zones 25 32 reside A zone may reside in any combination of the 4 partitions If a burglary zone resides in more than 1 partition that zone will only be active when all the partitions are armed A zone that resides in more than 1 partition will be reported to its lowest partition Segment 1 corresponds to zone 25 and segment 8 corresponds to zone 32 Segment 1 8 1 Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partitions 4 Partition 4 LOCATION 33 ZONES 33 40 CONFIGURATION GROUP 8 segments numerical data Location 33 contains the configuration group zone type for zones 33 40 Segment 1 is for zone 33 and segment 8 is for zone 40 You will find the default configurations in the table above 108 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 34 PARTITION SELECT ZONES 33 40 8 segments of feature selection data Location 34 is used to select the partition s in which zones 33 40 reside A zone may reside in any combination of the 4 partitions If a burglary zone resides in more than 1 partition that zone will only be active when all partitions are armed A zone that resides in more than par
136. PIN is automatically enrolled on the GSM network NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 193 Inserting a SIM card OPEN gt 2 ma lt LOCK A CAUTION You must be free of all static electricity when handling electronic components 1 Power down the system before inserting the SIM Card 2 Locate the SIM card holder Q on the board 3 Open the SIM card holder by sliding the clip as shown in and lifting the holder 4 The SIM card holder opens 5 Slide the SIM card into the holder using the guides Make sure the contacts gold pads facing the circuit board and the angled corner face out 0 6 Make sure that the SIM card is placed properly in the holder and close the SIM card holder O 7 Slide the clip back to the original position as shown in Q 8 Power up the system Do not enter programming mode until the SIM card selects the network operator The SIM card automatically selects a network operator when enrolled on the network To manually select an operator enter the relevant network operator in GSM Operator gt Operator Selection See Appendix A for a list of operator ID codes Most SIM cards contain a pre programmed SMS service center address and under normal circumstances this should not be changed If you do need to change it include the international country prefix using a instead of leading zeros 194 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Testing the RSSI value During the enrolling procedure
137. Panel to PC memory transfer using DL900 software 4 gt Start the DL900 upload download software Select Program gt Setup gt Direct Connect Settings Select the correct port number and baud rate Protocol must be Binary default The baud rate should match the NX 586E Default is 9600 Click OK Select the account to use Select Download gt Direct Connect Note You can also use the tool bar or the F11 key 6 Download as normal You cannot perform the following View keypad status Enroll devices NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 247 Writing data from the DL900 software to the NX 586E Note In the next steps COM and POS can be connected to any 12 VDC source and DATA does not need to be connected 1 Start the DL900 upload download software di Select Program gt Setup gt Direct Connect Settings 3 Select the correct port number and baud rate Protocol must be Binary default The baud rate should match the NX 586E Default is 9600 Click OK Select the account to use Select Download gt Write Panel Data To 586 You will be warned this could overwrite user codes if they were changed by the user dd de Select the location in the NX 586E where the data will be stored Note This will overwrite the existing data without further prompting 8 A screen will appear indicating that the data is being sent When this screen disappears the process is complete Reading data from the NX 586E to the
138. T 1 EVENT amp TIME relays 1 Segment 1 Program the event number for output 1 7 Each siren activation Segment2 Program the timing for output 1 Osec followevent 48 AUXILIARY OUTPUT 2 EVENT amp TIME relays 2 Segment 1 Program the event number for output 2 7 Each siren activation Segment2 Program the timing for output 1 Osec followevent AUTOTEST CONTROL Segment 1 Program a 1 if the interval is hours or a 0 for days Add a 2 to suppress the daily test or a 3 to suppress the hourly test Segment 2 Program the autotest interval from 1 255 days or hours Segment3 Program the autotest report in 24 hour time format Segment4 Program the autotest report time minutes after the hour 55 CLOSING TIME AUTO ARMING TIME 52 OPENING TIME AUTO DISARM TIME Segment 1 Program the hour of the opening time Segment2 Program the minutes after the hour of the opening time 0 lei Segment1 Program the hour of the closing time auto arming time OE 146 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual UE Segment2 Program the minutes after hour of closing auto arming e time 54 Segments 2 3 sudy a oo 100 a Mony 2 2 2 z gt Wednesday 4 4 4 o Thursday 5 5 s 5 Friday 6 6e 6e 6e Reseved 6 s 8 8 55 Segments iL 2 5 Sunday a 1 a monday 222 2 messy 3 3 3 3 Wednesday a 4 4 a musy 5 S 5s s ferdy 6
139. TCP IP Max U D An Up Download setting that contains the maximum number of attempts that are made each time Authentication the Up Download report is made After this number of attempts the system is disabled for the length Attempts of time set in U D Authentication Disable Time Mode An Options setting that configures the mode used for site initiated CSD GSM calls If you are experiencing problems with upload download change this setting from transparent mode to non transparent mode or vice versa See also Transparent mode and Non transparent mode Model A menu option that displays the current model of the GPRS module Module address A Networx bus module number is assigned to each system module The system uses this number to identify the module It is also used to report module problems such as tampers and module supervision lost to the central station The NX 7002 module address is 78 N Network An Options menu entry that groups network options Non transparent An operating mode for CSD on a GSM network An intermediate modem is used on the network to mode transfer data from one modem to another O Only Registered An Options menu setting that allows commands to be accepted only from registered HomeText Phones phone numbers Opening Closing A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control stating when the system is opened disarmed and closed armed Operator Selection An Options setting that configures t
140. TN dialer of the panel Also telephone line monitoring needs to be enabled in location 40 Do not use this feature as the only backup feature of the PSTN dialer but use this in addition with the standard backup options as described in the GSM module manual LOCATION 38 SWINGER SHUTDOWN COUNT Location 38 contains the number of trips on a zone before that zone will be automatically bypassed From 0 to 255 Refer to the feature definitions LOCATION 39 KEYPAD SOUNDER CONTROL 1 segment feature selection data Segment 1 1 On if keypad sounds for Telephone Line Cut when the system is armed 2 On if keypad sounds for Telephone Line Cut when disarmed 3 On if keypad sounds for an AC power failure 4 On if keypad sounds when a low battery is detected 5 On if keypad sounds during cross zone trip time 6 On if keypad sounds for zone and box tampers 7 On if Keypad sounds for Emergency keys 8 Expander trouble LOCATION 40 SYSTEM TIMERS 14 segments numerical data Location 40 contains the duration of various system timing functions Example If you want the duration of the dynamic battery test to be 30 minutes you should program 3 0 in segment 1 of this location The 3 0 is the number of minutes the stores the data and moves to the next segment of this location Segment 1 Dynamic battery test duration in minutes 0 30 minutes 0 no test Segment 2 AC fail report delay in minutes 0 255 minutes
141. The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Remote Initiated Scroll to Phone Number and press OK Press to clear the current value Enter 5666666 and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Phone Number eee aS S DS Navigate to Up Download gt Allow Calls From and select Known Phone Number bd You must configure the GSM GPRS module data phone number on the upload download PC Ask your network provider for this number bd bd You must also configure the GSM modem on the upload download PC Select Program gt Setup gt GSM Modem setup Enter S7 60S10 255X0T MS 9 1 9600 9600 in the Initialization string 2 field NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 203 GPRS connection The connection is made via a TCP IP network Instead of a phone number an IP address is set The Callback Required and Allow Calls From options are ignored 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Up Download gt Connection Type gt TCP IP This sets the connection type and must be done before the phone number and IP address can be programmed 2 Navigate with the NY keys to NX 7002 Module gt Up Download gt IP Address and press OK 3 Press to clear the current value 4 Enter the IP Address and press OK 5 Navigate with the NY keys to NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt Port Numbers gt U D Port and press OK 6 Select the U D port and press OK Note When GPRS reporting TCP IP is set then is recommended t
142. UX COMM FAIL AUX COMM FAIL RESTORE RESERVED RESERVED BUS PROBLEM SMS MQC494 BUS PROBLEM RESTORE SMS MQC494 USER CODE CHANGED USER CODE AUTHORITY CHANGED RF JAM RF JAM RESTORE USER CODE ADDED USER CODE DELETED HOLD UP HOLD UP RESTORE OVERRIDE RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED PULSE COUNT 10 UNSUCCESSFUL U D ATTEMPTS XX xX XX XX X XX XX X NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 115 SHUTDOWN RESTORE 116 SHUTDOWN 117 DEVICE ENROLLED 118 OUTPUT RESTORE 119 CLOCK SET 120 FIRST TO OPEN 121 LAST TO CLOSE 122 PIN USED WITH BIT 7 SET 123 BEGIN WALK TEST MODE 124 END WALK TEST MODE 125 RE EXIT 126 OUTPUT TRIP 127 DATA LOST x Prevention of setting and fault acknowledging Faults indicate problems in the system Some of them can be solved by the user like closing an open zone but others may require calling the installer In the EN 50131 Mode every fault in the system must be acknowledged or overriden by the user Active critical faults prevent arming of the system You can tell you need to acknowledge faults when Zones Not Ready or Service Required is displayed on the keypad Fault Acknowledging Overriding mechanism can be activated by pressing the key or is activated au
143. V Maximum ripple voltage Vpp 3 300 mV typical 600 mV max 14 Networx Version 3 Installation Manual Standard onboard outputs NX xx GSM EUR NX xx GSM LB EUR Built in Siren Driver BELL BELL Electronic output rating 1 A at 13 8 V 10 High current outputs RLY1 and RLY2 Relay rating 1 A at 13 8 V 10 Control panel fuses NX xx GSM EUR NX xx GSM LB EUR Battery 5 A resettable AUX PWR 1 A resettable POS 1 A resettable Mains mains fuse 4 630 mA T 250V 20x5 a A Environmental NX xx GSM EUR NX xx GSM LB EUR Operating temperature 55 C Humidity Max 95 non condensing IP protection grade IP30 Colour Beige Dimensions 220 x 253 x 112 mm 394 x 256 x 118 mm Shipping weight 1 8 kg 2 8 kg EN 50131 grade and class Securuty Grade 2 Environmental Class Il AM General features NX xx GSM EUR NX xx GSM LB EUR Code combinations 6 From 10 000 4 digits to 1 million 6 digits End of line resistor 3 3 KQ Data retention log program settings 20 years 1 Current available for AUX PWR POS and battery charge outputs non EN mode 2 Maximum permanent current to power devices external to the control equipment in the absence of alarm conditions EN mode 3 Max ripple voltage only when empty battery is charging 4 Mains fuse is a part of the mains terminal block 5 Minimum voltage only when mains supply voltage is disconnected and system is running on battery 6 Ther
144. Version 3 Installation Manual Chapter B5 Setting up the RF receivers Programming the RF system Figure 25 RF menu 5 1 RF Receiver 32 Sia Start Zone RF Receivers 33 39 For additional 868 RF receivers only Same as above 3 5 1 2 Learn RF Device 5 1 2 1 Learn RF Zone 5 1 2 1 1 1 Zone 1 5 1 2 2 Learn RF Keypad 5 1 2 1 1 RF Keypad 1 5 1 2 3 Learn RF Sir IO 5 1 2 1 1 RF Siren IO 1 5 1 2 1 1 1 Internal Siren 5 1 2 1 1 2 External Siren 5 1 2 4 Sequential Programming 5 1 3 Del RF Device 5 1 3 1 Del RF Zone 5 1 3 1 1 RF Zone 1 5 1 3 2 Del RF Keypad 5 1 3 2 1 RF Keypad 1 5 1 3 3 Del RF Sir IO 5 1 3 3 1 RF Siren IO 1 5 1 4 RSSI RF Device 5 1 4 1 RF Sensors 5 1 4 1 1 RF Zone 1 5 1 4 2 RF Keypads 5 1 4 2 1 RF Keypad 1 5 1 4 3 RF Sirens IO 5 1 4 3 1 RF Siren IO 1 5 1 4 44 RSSI Check Zone RSSI Value Last Round Count For additional 868 RF receivers only For 433 RF receivers only 5 1 5 Inputs 5 1 5 1 Sensor 1 5 1 5 1 1 Supervised Sensors 2 48 5 1 5 1 2 Fire Supervision Same as above 5 1 5 1 3 Option 1 5 1 5 1 4 Option 2 5 1 5 1 5 Option 3 5 1 5 1 6 Keyfob 5 1 5 1 6 1 Keyfob Funct 1 5 1 5 1 6 2 Keyfob Funct 2 5 1 5 1 6 3 Partitions 5 1 5 1 7 Door Window 5 1 5 1 7 1 Internal Reed 5 1 5 1 7 2
145. Window 20 RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Receiver Short Window minutes RM Features gt Supervision gt Short Window RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Inputs gt Sensor Supervised Yes RM n gt Supervised for each sensor RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Receiver Features gt Wake Up Options gt RF Keypad n gt Wake On Wake On Entry Timer Yes RM Entry Timer for each keypad RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Receiver Features gt Wake Up Options gt RF Keypad n gt Wake On Wake On Exit Timer Yes RM Exit Timer for each keypad RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Receiver Features gt Wake Up Options gt RF Keypad n gt Wake On Wake On Pulsing Buzzer Yes RM Pulsing Buzzer for each keypad Maximum of 15 minutes RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Outputs gt I O x Output y ees gt Time Unit gt Minutes for each siren tnan 15 tos RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Outputs gt I O x Output y then 3 gt Time for each siren minutes All sirens must be learned in before switching to the Alarm signal timer for sirens are set RM EN mode Users Access levels According to the EN 50131 standard there are 4 access levels which determine who can operate the system Access Level 1 General public limited to viewing status Access Level 2 Users and the Master user Access Level 3 Installer but only with Access Level 2 permission Access Level 4 Manufacturer but only with with Access Level 2 and Access Level 3 permission Access Level 4 is
146. abled and press OK 3 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Jam Detection Configuring IO modules The I O module is a PCB only device which can be connected to any application thus allowing the application to be controlled through a wireless link The application to be controlled must have a power supply of its own One important application for the I O module is the wireless siren beacon which has its own battery pack to operate on while using the I O module for wireless control and supervision see Installing the wireless sirens on page 33 The I O module and its batteries must be located inside the tamper protected housing of the application it controls and supervises Opening of this housing is reported to the panel as a tamper condition 178 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Any new IO module is learned in by default as a universal siren 1 e its both outputs are triggered by the Any Siren event In order to assign another trigger you have to select an appropriate event under RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Outputs gt I O x Output y gt Event You can program the event triggering a particular output set time the output is on in minutes or seconds or until the user code is entered and assign user permissions to activate outputs The following example sets the event triggering the output 1 on the IO module 3 as Not Ready to Arm The partition selected to trip this output is partition 1 The output is sw
147. acturing representative UTC Fire amp Security B V Kelvinstraat 7 6003 DH Weert Netherlands Certified EN 50131 1 System requirements EN 50131 3 Control and indicating equipment EN 50131 6 Power Supplies EN 50131 5 3 Requirements for interconnections equipment using radio frequency techniques EN 50136 1 1 Alarm systems Alarm Transmission systems EN 50136 2 1 General requirements for alarm transmission equipment PSTN transmission path ATS Class 2 D2 M2 T2 SO 10 with notification options A B C GPRS transmission path ATS Class 5 D3 M3 T4 S2 13 with notification options A B C D Security Grade 2 Environmental class Tested and certified by Telefication B V 1999 5 EC R amp TTE directive Hereby UTC Fire amp Security declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC 2002 96 EC WEEE directive Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union For proper recycling return this product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment or dispose of it at designated collection points For more information see www recyclethis info 2006 66 EC battery directive This product contains a battery that cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union See the product documentation for specific battery information The battery is marked with this
148. ad download session Setting up polling You can set up the GSM GPRS module to report periodically to a receiver that it is still active This is known as polling Polling is more frequent than a daily test call but less frequent than continuous monitoring If you configure a very short polling time polling occurs very frequently and can generate large quantities of data When setting the polling time you should consider the speed of the GPRS network possible connection delays and the cost of data transmission e Navigate with the NY keys to NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receiver Polling select On and press OK to enable polling Navigate with the NY keys to NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Polling Time and enter the time in minutes 0 255 and press OK to set the TCP IP polling time Upload download GSM CSD connection The upload download access code is set on the control panel in Communications gt Up Download gt Download Access Code The following example configures the GSM GPRS module GPRS module to answers calls from phone number 5666666 only The PC initiates the upload download session 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Up Download gt Connection Type gt CSD This sets the connection type This must be done before the phone number and IP address can be programmed Navigate with the NY keys to NX 7002 Module gt Up Download and press OK Scroll to Remote Initiated gt Enabled and press OK
149. additional modules are to be programmed press the NO key twice again to display the OK to Exit prompt and press OK to exit the program mode If there 1s another module to be programmed you can select it by entering its address followed by the key see Selecting the module to program above Note If you are not in a value selection mode nor in a value edit mode you can press to display the OK to Exit prompt It also means you can exit any menu level immediately and display the OK to Exit prompt by pressing NO Note You can set up the timeout for the program mode using the Control Panel gt System Settings gt Timers gt Miscellaneous gt Programming Mode Timeout menu option or by programming location 40 segment 14 47 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Chapter A5 Setting up a communicator Reporting The NetworX system supports different modes of reporting events to multiple central stations There are three phone numbers each phone number has 1t own account code protocol and events The configured prefix is common to all three phone numbers If a four second delay is specified in the prefix the panel does not look for a dial tone but performs blind dialling The following scenarios are examples of how to set different modes of reporting Reporting to one phone number The control panel reports events to one central station only You specify settings for phone number 1 Events for phone number 1 are enabled b
150. allation Manual TX 4131 03 2 TX 2211 03 1 TX 2411 03 1 TX 1011 03 1 TX 1011 03 3 TX 8001 05 1 4 BUTTON KEYFOB 868 MHz GEN2 Mirror PIR 868 MHz GEN2 DUAL MOTION SENSOR PIR MW 868 MHz GEN2 SLIMLINE DWS 868 MHz GEN2 IO MODULE 868 MHz GEN2 The 4 button keyfob is a portable wireless device allowing you to arm or disarm the system without having to memorise access codes or race to beat entry or exit delays It offers two additional programmable buttons which can be used to turn lights on and off before entering the premises or any other function defined in the system It can also be programmed to send a panic alarm by pressing the Lock and Unlock buttons simultaneously or to send a medical alarm by pressing the Light and Star buttons simultaneously This motion detector uses mirror technology to cover up to 16 metres It has a rich feature set including standard 4D or bi curtain processing providing improved detection and false alarm immunity This dual motion detector combines mirror technology and microwave to provide you with excellent false alarm immunity on a range of up to 12 metres It also features GE s patented Range Controlled Radar technology This wireless universal transmitter protects anything that opens and closes such as doors windows and cabinets Moreover there is an extra terminal that allows to connect an additional wired detector The lO module allows you to
151. ames custom message shutdown message zone names and partition names in all languages set on the source keypad Copying happens after exiting from the installer menu 3 7 Copy Keypad A menu option that copies the current keypad settings to another or multiple keypads in the system 3 7 1 To One Keypad A menu option that specifies that the current keypad settings are copied to one specific keypad To All Keypads A menu option that specifies that the current keypad settings are copied to all connected keypads IMPORTANT In the system with mixed wired and wireless keypads it is strongly recommended to start this command from a WIRED keypad Triggering this command from a wireless keypad in the mixed system can end with a timeout and cause incorrect copying results Load Country Defaults A menu option that defaults the keypad to the country settings for the selected country Reset Settings A menu option that defaults the keypad to factory defaults Switch to EN A menu option that switches the keypad to the EN 50131 compatible settings For additional information about the EN 50131 norm see Appendix 7 Diagnostics A menu entry that groups the wireless keypad options related to keypad s diagnostics like good packet count last bad packet etc NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 169 Location Term Definition Model A menu option that displays the current model of the keypad 3 13 Version A menu option that displays
152. and the partition number have been entered When in the menu Press to scroll to the end of the LCD message Press to select a zone to bypass Bypass The Enter Zone No prompt displays Type the zone number and press OK Repeat this action for subsequent zones you want to bypass To remove a zone from the bypassed zone set enter its number again To partially arm the system with the selected zones bypassed enter the user code Disarming the system clears the bypassed zone set Night Mode Press to arm the system in Night mode Note For this mode to work correctly entry guard zones must be set Also see notes below Es Press to toggle the Chime mode on and off A chime is often used as an indication on Sl Chime a n a shop door There is a beep on chime activation and no beep on deactivation For more information see the Chime menu option description No Press No to eCancel a change to the menu selection or NO eNavigate to a higher level in the menu structure or eCancel a sequence when entering numeric data Note Press NO key to clear any incorrectly entered user code or other information OK Press OK to eActivate the menu or OK eAccept selection changes or eMove forward in the menu structure or Complete a sequence when entering numeric data Hash When editing text and phone numbers ePress F4 to move to the first character or digit H ePress F5 to move to the last character or digit ePress HH to delete a
153. anually by the installer with the Attenuated mode menu option or is disabled automatically when switching from the programming mode to the user mode 276 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Event logs In the EN 50131 compliant system two event logs are created one containing all events and the other containing events that are mandatory to log according to the norm see Table 52 In order to access the full log select from the menu User Menu gt Log review To access the mandatory log select from the menu User Menu gt Mandatory log review Events in the mandatory log are limited to three the same events from the same source in one arm disarm cycle If the event from one source was stored in mandatory log 3 times during one cycle next identical events are not stored in the mandatory event log The following table contains list of all events available in the NetworX V3 system with numbers and their original names Events marked with X are mandatory All other events are non mandatory Table 52 Mandatory and non mandatory events Event number Event name Mandatory 0 ALARM x 1 ALARM RESTORE x 2 BYPASS x 3 BYPASS RESTORE x 4 TAMPER x 5 TAMPER RESTORE x 6 TROUBLE 7 TROUBLE RESTORE 8 TX LOW BATTERY x 9 TX LOW BATTERY RESTORE x 10 ZONE LOST x 11 ZONE LOST RESTORE x 12 START OF CROSS TIME 13 RESERVED 14 RESERVED 15 ZONE INACTIVE 16 ZONE INACTIVE RESTORE 17 SPECIAL EXPANSION EVENT ELC_EXPANSION_EVENT_TYPE 18 DURESS x 19 MANUAL
154. any already available Compliance labeling should be removed In order to stay fully compliant with EN regulations these options must stay set according to the Table 51 only in this case it is allowed to add the compliance labeling Note The installer needs to learn in I O modules and sirens first and then to switch the Radio Module to the EN 50131 mode otherwise default values for I O modules and sirens will not be set automatically 270 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Table 51 Default EN 50131 settings Option Setting Clock Off Arm with Low Battery No Arm with Tamper Mem FTC No Box Tamper Yes Bypass code required Yes EN Display Restrict Yes EN Mode Yes Entry Time 305 Exit Time 30 S Forced Arming No Immediate Zone Restore Yes Log Protection No Quick Arm No Tamper if Zone Lost No User Code Resets Tamper Memory Yes Swinger Shutdown 0 10 Phone line cut fault delay seconds Autotest in days Days Autotest interval 1 Keypress Tamper Yes Open Close event reporting Yes Exit Error reporting Yes Siren sounds for expander trouble No Failure To Communicate report enabled Yes Where CP CP CP CP CR CP CP CP CP CP Cr CP CP CH CR CP CP CR CP CP CP CP CP Menu path Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Clock gt Use Cristal for Clock Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition n gt Feature Select gt Arming gt Arm with Low Battery Contr
155. any time Guard code 17 will only be able to arm disarm during an alarm condition Only when an alarm condition occurs guard code 17 will be able to disarm the system After having evaluated the alarm condition guard code 17 can arm the system again but will not be able to disarm anymore see also location 41 segment 1 option 7 78 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Definition User Auth for Progrm A menu option specifying that user authorisation is required in order to enter program mode 2 4 Communications A menu entry that groups options for communication between the control panel and the up download software or central stations Central Station A menu entry that groups options relating to the central station This is a remote location that is designed to monitor signals and reports from alarm systems and summon assistance if necessary This is also known as a control station or ARC 2 4 1 1 Phone Numbers A menu entry that groups phone number reporting options 2 4 1 1 1 1 Phone Number A menu option that sets the phone number to which events are reported The control panel can report to up to three phone numbers 2 4 1 1 1 2 Account Code A menu option that specifies the unique code sent from the modem in the control panel to the selected phone number This code is used to identify and charge the user Separate account codes can be set up for each phone number and each partition This is also known as the
156. are 6 digits long Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receivers gt Receiver n gt Receiver Number Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receivers gt Receiver n gt Line Number Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt XSIA Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Report Format gt SIA Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt HomeText gt Keypad for Zone Text Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt HomeText gt Users gt HomeText User n gt Phone Number Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt HomeText gt Site Address Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt HomeText gt Users gt HomeText User NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 205 Information required Menu Option Report type language n gt Language Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt HomeText gt Users gt HomeText User n gt Report Groups HomeText Report groups Send unrecognised text messages to the administrator Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt HomeText gt Relay Unrecognised SMS to Admin Note Phone 1 is the administrator phone User Menu gt Users gt User n gt User Code User code HomeText Control When HomeText control is enabled you can control your alarm system by sending SMS text messages from your mobile phone Note In order to be recognized by the system every HomeText user must have a valid user code configured in the control panel otherwise the sys
157. at value 00 99 LOCATION 137 CONFIGURATION GROUP 14 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 138 CONFIGURATION GROUP 15 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 138 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 139 CONFIGURATION GROUP 15 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 140 CONFIGURATION GROUP 16 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 140 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 132 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 141 CONFIGURATION GROUP 16 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the
158. ata to the panel The data that is downloaded and the downloading speed depend on the Send All Read All settings The default number of strings sent to the keypad is 192 but it is possible to limit the number of strings sent If the default number 1s reduced download time decreases For more information on setting up download options see the DL900 Online Help Note It is recommended to up download data when the keypad is in the operating mode only not in the programming mode If you are in the Installer Menu the keypad can time out and start copying process which will interfere with or stop up downloading in progress Programming tasks You can perform all available programming tasks using the DL900 software Table 40 DL900 menu paths shows the DL900 menu path for each task Table 40 DL900 menu paths Task DL900 menu option Changing a master or operator password Changing the download options Changing the system 1 settings Changing the system 2 settings Changing the system 3 settings Changing the user arm disarm codes Connecting via the modem Download gt Connect gt Connect using AMD Connecting via the serial port Download gt Connect gt Direct connect using 586 Copying a customer s panel settings Program gt Setup gt Copy options NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 253 Task DL900 menu option 254 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Task DL900 menu option Setting the download access Setting the format o
159. ating until the total number of attempts designated in Dial Attempts is completed 2 4 1 1 1 6 Events A menu entry that groups settings that control which events are reported for phone communication 2 4 1 1 1 6 1 Arm Disarm Alarm A menu entry that groups the events that are reported to Location Term NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Definition 2 4 1 1 1 6 1 1 2 4 1 1 1 6 1 2 2 4 1 1 1 6 1 3 2 4 1 1 1 6 1 4 2 4 1 1 1 6 2 2 4 1 1 1 6 2 1 2 4 1 1 1 6 2 2 2 4 1 1 1 6 2 3 2 4 1 1 1 6 2 4 2 4 1 1 1 6 2 5 2 4 1 1 1 6 2 6 2 4 1 1 1 6 2 7 2 4 1 1 1 6 3 2 4 1 1 1 6 3 1 2 4 1 1 1 6 3 2 Alarms Alarm Restores Opening Closing Zone Bypass and Restores Tamper Fault Tamper Restores Zone Trouble and Restores Expander Trouble and Restores Siren Line Cut and Restores RF Sensor Lost and Restores RF Low Battery and Restores Power Trouble and Restores Aux Short Circuit and Restores A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when an alarm occurs A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when the alarm has been restored after an alarm A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number stating when the system is opened disarmed and closed armed A menu option that sends a report to the selected phone number when a zone is bypassed A report is also sent when the zone is restored un bypassed A menu
160. ation due to an intensive radio communication you should not perform any additional actions on other wireless keypads Installing the wireless sirens In order to guarantee communication between the panel and the siren each siren must be learned in This procedure requires starting the learn in mode in the control panel with the menu and then tripping the tamper switch of the siren For all steps required to program a new siren see Learning in wireless sirens on page 176 To install the wireless siren 1 Select the appropriate location to install the siren and mount the siren base to the wall i Insert the batteries to power the siren In case of the indoor siren the battery holders for four 4 AA 1 5 V batteries and one 1 9 V battery are located inside the housing of the siren In case of the outdoor siren you should install the battery pack inside the housing of the siren The battery pack contains independent batteries for the speaker and the beacon 3 Wire the battery pack to the siren s terminals 4 Learn in the siren see Learning in wireless sirens on page 176 5 When installing the outdoor siren before final commission cut jumper J3 on the siren PCB This jumper is used as start up protection 6 Close the cover plate on the siren CAUTION When replacing siren s batteries follow instructions in the siren s manual delivered with your device Batteries can explode or cause burns when recharged incorrectly dis ass
161. ax Format key Description Account number for the event that follows Hexadecimal digits A F are in upper case Shows that this is a Contact ID message i Contact ID qualifier 1 activation 3 restore Three digit Contact ID event number decimal Two digit group number decimal This contains the partition that generated the event or zero for a non partition event PE Three digit point number decimal This contains the zone user or module number for the event EI Contact ID checksum This 0 can be ignored Example The following example shows Partition 3 account code E9D3 has a keypad tamper Contact ID 137 on zone 30 partition 3 e E9D318113703030 Table 33 Contact ID example Part of Message Format key Description E9D3 Account number E9D3 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 213 Part of Message Format key Description e 137 nnn Contact ID event number HomeText control Users can use HomeText to send commands and information to and receive information from the security system Message format Messages can consist of a registered telephone number assigned to the particular user a password commands and values All these elements are not case sensitive No national characters are allowed and should not be used neither in commands nor in values for example you should type espanol instead of Espa ol The telephone number part is necessary only if the system is config
162. based on alarm events Also in case of tamper on the zone assigned to all partitions Siren On flag is activated only for Partition 1 so alarm icon is activated on keypads ly on keypads with assigned Partition 1 partition 1 keypads and master Learning in additional wireless keypads Wireless keypads are a separate type of wireless devices that require different programming procedures The procedure below allows to program additional keypads in the system For step by step instructions about installing procedure section the very first wireless keypad see the Wireless keypad learning in 1 Using the existing keypad enter the programming mode navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers and press OK Note It is recommended to not learn any devices from a keypad which belongs to a partition different then Partition 1 2 Select the relevant module bus ID and press OK For example you can select RF Receiver 32 which is the NetworX V3 built in receiver 3 Select Learn RF Device gt Learn RF Keypad and then select the new keypad number RF Keypad 1 to 4 and press OK The panel starts the learning in procedure and the Learn in Mode message is displayed NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 175 4 Insert the batteries into the new wireless keypad It starts the keypad initialization process Note If the wireless keypad is not brand new i e it was already used with another system it must be re programmed flashed
163. be repeated one or more times The settings and events in Table 31 are transmitted in the following messages e gt 123456 BA001 BA003 e gt 987654 YTOOO e gt 345678 TA030 Table 31 Example settings and events Setting Value System account code for the given destination 987654 Partition 1 account code 123456 Partition 3 account code 345678 Combined events Account codes are used to identify partitions Events for separate accounts codes can be sent in the same message using the syntax e aaaaaa eennn eennn aaaaaa eennn eennn See Table 30 for a detailed syntax description The settings and events in Table 31 are transmitted in the following message e gt 123456 BA001 BA003 987654 YT000 345678 TA030 212 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Reporting with partition modifiers Partition modifiers are used to identify partitions Events with partition modifiers are sent using the syntax e gt aaaaaa eennn Rin eennn Rin See Table 30 for a detailed syntax description The settings and events in Table 31 are transmitted in the following message e gt 987654 BA001 Ri1 BA003 Ri1 YT000 TAO3O RI3 SMS Contact ID reporting Each SMS message contains only one event The information in the message 1s the same as a Contact ID message sent over the PSTN with the digits coded using ASCII instead of DTMF The following syntax is used e a2aaal8gnnnggppp Table 32 Contact ID reporting synt
164. block when an incorrect SIM PIN is entered repeatedly R Receiver Number A Reporting setting that configures the phone line receiver number associated with the receiver account Receiver Polling A Reporting setting that configures the NX 7002 to send polling messages to the report receivers Receivers A Reporting menu entry that groups TCP IP receiver options Registered Phone A Reporting menu entry that lists all the users with rights to send HomeText commands from the Access phone registered in the system Note Only users listed here are granted rights to send HomeText commands to the system Removing a user from this list suspends all user s rights to send HomeText commands including Any Phone Access privileges Relay Unrecognised An Options menu option that if enabled sends any unrecognised text messages to the administrator SMS to Admin 222 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Term Definition Remote Initiated An Up download setting that allows an upload download session between the NX 7002 and the PC to be initiated by the PC The PC dials into the NX 7002 You must dial the data phone number to dial into the GSM for upload download This setting is dependent on other settings Allow Calls From Auto answer and Callback Required Report Attempts A Reporting menu entry that groups report options Report Control A block of reporting data that contains configurations to format selected events into one or more messages acc
165. bove Same as above 2 1 1 1 3 Partitions 2 1 1 1 4 Copy Zone 2 1 2 Swinger Count 2 1 3 Zone Types 2 1 3 1 1 Day Zone TETEN Input Type 2 1 3 1 1 1 Fire Zone Types 2 30 2 1 3 1 1 2 24 hour Same as above 2 1 3 1 1 3 Keyswitch 2 1 3 1 1 4 Delay 1 2 1 3 1 1 5 Delay 2 2 1 3 1 1 6 Interior 2 1 3 1 1 7 Entry Guard 2 1 3 1 1 8 Cross Zone 2 1 3 1 1 9 Trouble 2 1 3 1 1 10 Follower Access Enabled according to 24 hour zone option 2 1 3 1 2 Zone Type Name 21303 Attributes 2 1 3 1 3 1 Resistor Configuration 2 1 3 1 3 2 EOL Resistor Defeat 2 1 3 1 3 3 Loop Response 2 1 3 1 3 4 Swinger Zone 2 1 3 1 3 5 Bypassable 2 1 3 1 3 6 Force Armable 2 1 3 1 3 7 Group Bypass 2 1 3 1 3 8 Zone Activity Monitor 2 1 3 1 3 9 Access Control 2 1 3 1 3 10 Pulsed Keyswitch 2 1 3 1 3 11 Req To Exit Holdup Enabled according to Keyswitch zone option 2 1 3 1 4 Sound 2 1 3 1 4 1 Yelping Siren Burglary 2 1 3 1 4 2 Steady Siren Fire 2 1 3 1 4 3 Audible Keypad 2 1 3 1 4 4 Chime 21515 Reporting 2 1 3 1 5 1 Local Only 2 1 3 1 5 2 Restore Reporting 2 1 3 1 5 3 Dialer Delay 2 1 3 1 5 4 Listen in Enabled according to Keyswitch zone option 2 1 3 1 6 Copy Zone Type 2 1 3 1 6 1 1 Day Zone An input or zone represents a single input in the system 54 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual
166. cation will be sent as the tens digit of the tamper event code The zone ID will always be reported as the ones digit of the zone number e g zone 12 2 zone 44 4 This location contains 4 segments Any segment left as 0 will follow the segment 1 selection Segment 1 Partition 1 Tamper Code Segment 2 Partition 2 Tamper Code Segment 3 Partition 3 Tamper Code Segment 4 Partition 4 Tamper Code LOCATION 59 TROUBLE COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 59 contains the event code for a zone Trouble with a 4 2 and 3 1 format For the 4 2 format the digit programmed in this location will be sent as the tens digit of the trouble event code The zone ID will always be reported as the ones digit of the zone number e g zone 12 2 zone 44 4 This location contains 4 segments Any segment left as 0 will follow segment 1 selection Segment 1 Partition 1 Trouble Code Segment 2 Partition 2 Trouble Code Segment 3 Partition 3 Trouble Code Segment 4 Partition 4 Trouble Code LOCATION 60 SENSOR LOW BATTERY COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 60 contains the event code for a zone Sensor Low Battery for a 4 2 and 3 1 format For a 4 2 format the digit programmed in this location will be sent as the tens digit of the sensor low battery event code The zone ID will always be reported as
167. ch to EN 8 Program remaining settings like user codes reporting etc 9 Reset the control panel by switching the control panel s power supply off and on including the battery When the existing system 1s being migrated to EN 50131 compliant settings perform only steps 2 to 8 Please note that when the system is switched to EN many options take EN specific default values that may differ from the previously set ones For the list of default EN values see Table 51 below Note Setting the EN mode in the system without the telephone line connected or without the GSM modem configured will cause the Fail to Communicate error It is recommended to connect and configure both means of communication when switching to the EN mode If the telephone line is not going to be connected the Phone Line Cut Delay must be set to O after setting the EN mode Control Panel gt System Settings gt Timers gt Communications gt Phone Line Cut Delay If GPRS is not going to be configured Receiver Polling must be set to Disabled NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receiver Polling Please note that the Switch to EN command causes configuration copying that takes about 15 additional seconds to finish after the menu is exited It is strongly recommended to wait for all actions to end before entering anything on the keypads in the updating system Note Changing default EN options will make the panel not compliant with EN 50131 regulations and
168. code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location 1s not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 129 CONFIGURATION GROUP 10 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 130 CONFIGURATION GROUP 11 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 130 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location 1s not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 130 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 131 CONFIGURATION GROUP 11 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 132 CONFIGURATION GROUP 12 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 132 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This locatio
169. configurable report controllers Each report controller can be assigned a main and backup destination There are three reporting protocols each is allocated a maximum number of instances Reporting protocol Number of instances CO CI 198 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual The module can send primary secondary and backup reports Important Actual reports sent depend on both control panel report settings Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting and GSM GPRS module report settings NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control For example if the particular partition event like Opening Closing is to be reported it must be enabled at both Control Panel gt Communications gt Reporting gt Partition Rprt gt Opening Closing and at NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Events gt Opening Closing The same applies to system reports like Box Tamper Programming or Expander Trouble HomeText HomeText is a new report protocol that sends an SMS message of reported events to a telephone number The Hometext reports are similar in appearance to the reports in the event log that are viewed on the keypad HomeText uses SMS messaging to send a report in a specified language HomeText can use six reporting destinations Each report destination consists of a primary reporting transport option Hometext groups 1 8 SMS 1 SMS 2 etc and e an event list HomeText can store up to 16 telephone numbers for reporting
170. creased automatically This option allows easier programming A menu option that specifies the short supervision window for RF devices RF devices on 868 MHz typically report every 15 minutes Depending on the country regulations this timer must be set to specific values A menu entry that groups troubleshooting options for IO modules A menu entry that groups smoke sensor options A menu option that specifies the first zone number of zones on the RF receiver Note In case of the RF Receiver 32 the Networx V3 built in 868 MHz Gen2 receiver this option is not visible In the Networx V3 system you can set this value for additional RF receivers only For the receiver 32 the starting zone is always zone 1 A menu option that enables supervision of the selected RF sensor A menu entry that groups wireless supervision options A menu option that switches the RF receiver to the EN 50131 compatible settings For additional information about the EN 50131 norm see Appendix 7 A menu entry that allows to set the SysID value System ID is a 3 digit code which should be unique for the panel A menu option that enables disables the tamper of a smoke sensor A menu entry that allows to set the Low Battery threshold and the Low Aux Voltage threshold for the particular IO module siren Selects the amount of time an output will remain activated when an output triggers If this location is programmed as a zero the output will follow t
171. csccssssscssccsessscssscseesscsssessesessacsssesseseceasees 39 o nee een ome One EEE E O OE ORTO E NOT OT 39 E A RE TTT O ee ee 39 SONE SIC RR E OE 40 ERICIANOPFOGFAMMIADTAO0 dti ela 40 Changing the user Ie naci 6 0c ala 40 NOMINA US anta snoot 41 4 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual A e 41 Ss io MO la 41 CANTAN toe 41 Changing selection listientres ciinnaina iaa dicci n 41 changing Ndr ioni 42 CRAngiPor UN 42 Changing phone numbers and phone PrefixeS ceccsesccsescssecsseesssecssesessecsseesssesssecsssssssessseessseesseeesees 42 AT E AAA A E RR EA 43 e e 0 43 VOR e IE AT 43 Cei 44 Obi 45 Guidelines for location based programming sr iii 45 Selecung the module to 000 45 PO 46 EP 46 Chapter A5 Setting Up a communicator oetcrrrrrrercre cere eee eenezinz eee sica cenno resine zine ze zicezinzecizioneoe 47 ROUNO e A RR EEA 47 Reparing ito dne phone AUDE o cios 47 DOCU TO lia 47 Er 48 Pica 49 Section B Programming the SysteM coocconcconnconconaconncnnnonaconccnnconaconconccon see sena cene zee zena zene eee zena zeneeze zena zene zione 50 Chapter B1 Selecting the programming Mode rrrrrrrrerreeeen een eene eee zen zenzene zen zenzenzene einen 51 Chapter B2 Programming the control pahel o rorrrrrrrrrrrenrenseeeeneenzenzene era zenzenzena zen zenzenzececeeo 53 CARE EEE ee ee ee 53 PESO A ie D Dodi ee 55 NZ OVS SIA a 56 Food YDE isnin
172. curity system HomeText can be set up to send two types of text messages to a user s phone Confirmation messages are sent after a message has been received They let the user know the message has been received and the command has been carried out 216 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Report messages are sent after events These are similar to the reports in the event log viewed on the keypad Message Meaning Partition n Open zone list The zones listed in this partition are open Partition n Bypassed zone list The zones listed in this partition are bypassed Not ready partition list The partitions listed cannot be armed HomeText reporting The following is an example of a HomeText report sent to a control centre GE Security 01 04 05 57 Close Arm P1 User 1 01 04 05 57 Close Arm P2 User 1 Table 34 HomeText example Part of Message Description GE Security Site address 01 04 05 57 Date and time Close Arm Action reported P1 Partition number Glossary Term Definition A NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 217 Term Definition Account Code A Reporting setting that configures the SIA or Contact ID account number for the selected report receiver SIA account numbers are 6 digits long Contact ID account numbers are 4 digits long The letters A B C D E and F can be included in account codes Alarm Restores A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report co
173. d is in the operating mode only not in the programming mode If you are in the Installer Menu the keypad can time out and start copying process which will interfere with or stop up downloading in progress Enabling memory transfer using the keypad The following example uses the NX 1048 keypad to copy the control panel s programming memory to the NX 586E programming memory 2 It then copies programming information from the NX 586E programming memory 3 to the control panel 1 di 8 Navigate with the NY keys to NX 586E Direct Connect Module gt Files and press OK To write information from the control panel to the NX 586E scroll to File 2 gt Panel to File and press OK Select Yes to confirm and press OK The control panel s programming memory is copied to the NX 586E direct connect module s programming memory 2 The Receiving Data LED on the NX 586E direct connect module flashes while the data is received The keypad sounder chimes when the operation is successful To read information from the NX 586E to the control panel scroll to File 3 gt File to Panel and press OK Select Yes to confirm and press OK The information in the NX 586E programming memory 3 is copied to the current control panel The Sending Data LED on the NX 586E direct connect module flashes while the data is received The keypad sounder chimes when the operation is successful A triple beep sounds if any error occurs when reading or sending data
174. d is selected as something other than partition 1 keypad 1 program the appropriate address in location 212 Select the address from the location chart Keypad Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 192 193 194 195 200 201 202 203 208 209 210 211 216 217 218 219 138 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 213 PROGRAMMING THE COUNTRY CODE 1 segment numerical data The NetworX system has the ability to set different country codes Each country code has specific default settings Before start programming the system it is important to select the country code that is required see table below Once the country code has been selected it will remain set even after an installer reset When changing the country code during programming all existing programming will be cleared to the defaults for that country Code Country 0 menyra es dee e se o Srna NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual NetworX V3 location programming worksheets Factory defaults for NetworX V3 are in bold italic text These defaults are for the country code 2 Belgium Poland Description Default Programming data PHONE 1 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 1 PHONE 1 ACCOUNT CODE 10 10 10 10 10 10 2 PHONE 1 REPORTING FORMAT E PHONE 1 DIAL ATTEMPTS BACKUP CONTROL PHONE 1 SELECTING EVENTS TO REPORT TO PHONE 1 Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program Segment 2 Circle Numbers To
175. delay Segment 4 Exit time 2 Exit time that will be used for all zones designated as delay 2 Segment 5 Reserved Segment 6 Reserved LOCATION 95 ACCOUNT CODE FOR PARTITION 4 6 segments numerical data The account code that is sent when reporting partition 4 is programmed in location 95 If location 95 is left unprogrammed all 10 then the account code corresponding to the phone number that is dialled will be used If the account code is less than six digits program a 10 in the segment immediately after the last digit of the account code If the account code is 6 digits long program all 6 segments LOCATION 96 PARTITION 4 FEATURE AND REPORTING SELECTIONS 5 segments feature selection data Location 96 is used to enable certain features that the user can access or see from the keypad of the system In addition certain communicator reports are enabled in this location Each of these features can be enabled by partition This location contains 5 segments with eight possible features per segment Refer to location 23 for the feature selections If all the segments are blank nothing enabled the features for partition 1 will be used NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 125 LOCATION 97 PARTITION 4 ENTRY EXIT TIMERS 6 segments numerical data Location 97 1s used to enter the entry and exit times in seconds There are 2 separate entry and exit times Valid entries are 10 255 seconds If all the segments are 0 t
176. e 5 Carefully close the keypad and tighten the 2 screws at the bottom side Note Any opening of the keypad enclosure will cause tamper alarm in the system 6 Power up the panel Select a language from the list with the NY keys and press OK di Select default settings from the Load Country Defaults list with the AW keys and press OK 8 At the Partition Number prompt type the partition number and press OK 9 At the Keypad Number prompt type the keypad number and press OK 32 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual There 1s a slight difference in keypad reaction speed between the wired and wireless keypad because the wireless keypad needs more time to communicate with the control panel Please allow appropriate time to send data between the panel and the wireless keypad especially during programming when large amount of information 1s exchanged Wireless keypad learning in procedure Prior to installing a new wireless keypad into the system the keypad should first be learned in by the panel in order to guarantee mutual recognition With the first keypad successfully installed the installer can use this keypad to help learning in additional ones The installer can also delete any or all of the keypads from the system For adding the first wireless keypad to the panel the keypad learn in procedure should be executed as shown below For instructions about installing additional wireless keypads see Learning in additiona
177. e keypad until a user selects the Detector Reset menu option from the Quick User or User menu ENTRY EXIT DELAY 2 A trip will start entry delay 2 Absence of a trip during the exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed 24 HOUR AUDIBLE SUPERVISED Creates an instant audible alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel It will display on the keypad This zone is not abortable and cannot be bypassed MOMENTARY KEYSWITCH ZONE This zone type will arm and disarm the partition or partitions of the control panel where it is resident every time the zone state changes for a short time from R to 2R for example the Door Window Switch is momentarily opened and then closed Keyswitch arming will report as User 99 in logs and reports This zone type can only belong to 1 partition INTERIOR FOLLOWER WITH CROSS ZONE ENABLED This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delay is being timed It is delayed during entry and exit delay times If a Cross Zone is not being timed it will start a Cross Zone timer If a Cross Zone is being timed it will create an instant alarm This zone will bypass automatically when enabled in segment 1 of location 23 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 105 INSTANT ENTRY GUARD This zone creates an instant alarm whenever it is tripped and the zone is timed It will start an entry delay time 2 if it is tripped prov
178. e Cancel and or Abort features of a dialer automatic when the system is disarmed It means that pressing the Cancel button programmable function button is not required after a disarm code is entered The Cancel and Abort features must be enabled to permit this Auto feature to work For proper operation of these features Dialer Abort Delay must be enabled in the zone configuration group A menu entry that groups options used to control download sessions between the up download software and the control panel A menu option that specifies the telephone number that the control panel dials if the Callback Required option is enabled A menu option that specifies the eight digit access code sent by the up download software to the control panel The panel permits downloading to occur when it receives this code A menu option that controls access of the up download software to the control panel When the software calls the control panel the panel answers the call and then hangs up After approximately 36 seconds the panel calls the software back A menu option that sets the number of rings that must occur before the panel answers to start a download session If the value is O the panel will never pick up the phone line NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 81 Location Definition 2 4 2 5 Answer Machine Defeat A menu entry used to defeat an answering machine If two call Answer Machine Defeat AMD is enabled two telephone cal
179. e N 2 If you do not want dual or split reporting location 10 and location 11 should be left at the factory default of 0 If you want multi reporting or split reporting and the split is based on the event type such as alarm open close etc location 10 should be used to select only those events that should be reported to phone N 2 and location 11 should be left at the factory default of 0 If you want dual or split reporting and the split is based on partition then location 10 should be programmed as 0 and location 11 should be used to select those partitions that are to be reported to phone N 2 If no events are to be reported to phone N 2 both locations should be at 0 98 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 10 EVENTS REPORTED TO PHONE N 2 2 segments of feature selection data Segment 1 1 Alarms 2 Opening and closings 3 Zone bypass and bypass restores 4 Zone trouble and trouble restores 5 Power fail AC failure low battery power restore AC restore and low battery restore 6 Bell cut bell cut restore telephone line restore 7 Test reports 8 Start and end programming download complete and log full Segment 2 1 Zone and box tamper 2 Auxillary power overcurrent and restore 3 Wireless sensor missing and restore 4 Wireless sensor low battery and restore 5 Expander trouble and restore keypads are considered as expanders 6 Failto communicate 7 Alarm restore
180. e Robofon format value 00 99 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 127 LOCATION 115 CONFIGURATION GROUP 3 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 116 CONFIGURATION GROUP 4 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 116 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 117 CONFIGURATION GROUP 4 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 118 CONFIGURATION GROUP 5 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 118 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location 1s not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 119 CONFIGURATION GROUP 5 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use t
181. e are no disallowed codes 7 Optional function for the EN 50131 compliance A WARNING Before removing the mains fuse mains power must be disconnected Auxiliary current and battery capacity Table 3 NX xx GSM EUR maximal available auxiliary current Battery 7 2 Ah Discharge Charge Auxiliary current mA Time h Time h NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 15 Table 4 NX xx GSM LB EUR maximal available auxiliary current 7 2 Ah 12 Ah Discharge Charge Auxiliary current mA Battery Time h Time h NetworX V3 system NetworX V3 Number of wireless zones Number of onboard hardwired See Table 1 zones Maximum number of hardwired 42 zones Maximum number of zon i A FARA LO if 2 hardwired zones are used than there are 46 wireless zones left to use Maximum number of wireless 8 including sirens outputs Outputs on board 2 NC NO relays 1 internal siren Maximum number of output expanders Maximum number of input 5 expanders Maximum number of RF output 4 including sirens modules Report formats Contact ID Ademco 4 2 Express Siren Tone Vocal Radionics extended fast with parity Ademco Silent Knight Slow Silent Knight 4 2 fast Sescoa Franklin Fast SIA XSIA and custom formats 4 Maximum number of wireless keypads Support for Proximity Reader RF Dual Transceiver Internal built in GPRS module Internal built in in NX xx GSM EUR and NX xx GSM LB EUR panels onl
182. e at which the sounder blasts These options are Arming Exit Delay Expired Closing Kissoff and Keyswitch Arming 76 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition A menu option that causes the internal sounder to blast when the system arms Exit Delay Expired A menu option that causes the internal sounder to blast when the exit time expires Closing Kissoff A menu option that causes the internal sounder to blast when the central station receives a closing report Keyswitch Arming A menu option that causes the internal sounder to blast when the system is armed by keyswitch or armed and disarmed by keyswitch There is one blast for arming and two blasts for disarming 2 2 2 3 Output Signal Type A menu option that converts the internal siren to accept a speaker The built in 112db siren driver can be converted to a 1 amp voltage output The siren can be 15 or 30 Watt maximum with an impedance of 4 8 or 16 ohms Keypads A menu option that groups keypad buzzer options 2 2 3 1 A menu entry that groups events that activate the keypad buzzer Phone Line Cut A menu entry that groups options that activate the keypad buzzer when a phone line cut event occurs 2 2 3 1 1 1 When Armed A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer if a phone line cut event occurs while the system is armed 2 2 3 1 1 2 When Disarmed A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer if a phone line cut event occurs while the s
183. e casing is not damaged and is mounted correctly on a flat surface If there is no damage close the casing securely The battery may need replacing This may be a temporary condition caused by a long power failure Check the module for wiring faults Reconnect the mains power supply and ensure it is working properly Repair the open circuit Ensure that the module is connected properly to the control panel Check the zone and zone sensors for damage and repair any faults 265 266 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Message Definition CleanMe Low Battery Short Loss A specific smoke detector for example DP721 is dirty The panel detects a degree of pollution in the chamber of the fire smoke detectors There is a problem with the wiring The system has not received RF sensor transmissions for a long period of time Depending on how the system Is programmed this condition activates a service report In addition it may activate a tamper alarm if armed An RF sensor battery is low The system has not received RF sensor transmissions for a short period of time This condition prevents arming Action Clean the detection chamber of the smoke detector Note This message is not shown on the LCD display only listed in the event log Check the zone and zone sensors for damage and repair any faults Note This message Is displayed in case of wired zones only Ensure that
184. e changes 9 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Zone Name 10 Scroll to Partitions and press OK The current partition s for that zone are displayed for example means that the zone is assigned to partition 1 11 Press the corresponding numerical key to include or exclude a partition for example press 1 to exclude partition 1 and press 3 to include partition 3 The display changes to 3 The zone is now assigned to partition 3 You can assign a zone to multiple partitions Common zone 12 Press OK to accept the changes 13 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Partitions Copying zone settings You can copy the settings for the current zone to another zone or a set of other zones All the zone settings except the user defined zone name and RF settings are copied to the target zones The following steps explain how to copy the settings from one zone to another Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Inputs gt Zones and press OK bd Select the relevant zone number and press OK Scroll to Copy Zone and press OK The keypad prompts you to enter the start zone Enter the number of the first zone to which the settings will be copied and press OK The keypad prompts you to enter the end zone Enter the number of the last zone to which the settings will be copied and press OK The keypad prompts you to confirm your selection Press OK te A ae e oa bn
185. e control panel with the menu and then tripping the tamper switch in the sensor For all steps required to program a new sensor see the section Programming the wireless detectors on page 173 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 39 Chapter A4 Programming guidelines Getting started This chapter describes a NetworX V3 installation with the menu driven keypad allowing you to program the system easily using a menu structure Country codes The NetworX V3 has the ability to set different country codes Each country code has specific default settings When you start your system for the first time see Powering up the system below and select keypad defaults during the initial keypad setup the respective country code is also set up automatically for the panel Once the country code has been selected it will remain set even after an installer reset When changing the country code during programming all existing programming will be cleared to the defaults for that country Note Fora detailed first keypad installation description see Wireless keypad learning in procedure on page 32 The table below lists the default country codes Table 9 Country codes Country No country factory setting Holland Belgium Poland Sweden Italy Spain Greece South Africa Israel Spain PRSGR E Turkey France E NI Turkey Pronet On S For all the countries there are the following default codes Table 10 Default code
186. e learned into the zone The following example removes sensor 10 learned in on receiver 32 1 Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 and press OK 2 Scroll to Inputs gt Sensor 10 gt Enabled gt No and press OK 3 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Enabled Glossary Definition 1 Pulse On A menu entry that groups options enabling disabling a single siren pulse at arming or at the exit delay expiration This options work for the following output events only Any siren Burglary siren Burglary alarm 24 hour alarm Antipassivation A menu entry that enables disables the siren s battery antipassivation feature When enabled a small current flows through IO module output 2 every 30 seconds in order to improve the siren s battery life Attributes A menu entry that groups additional configuration options for IO modules Code Stops Timer A menu option that specifies the way entering code by the user affects the way the output is timed If set to Yes the output should be reset if a code is entered while it is being timed When set to No the output stays timed not reset after a code is entered Note Do not set up this option for system status events such as Ready to Arm Not Ready to Arm Armed Disarmed because once the output is triggered it will not reset to reflect current status unless the user code is entered Del RF Device A menu entry that groups entries related to dele
187. e one most to the left indicates absence of RF the one most to the right indicates full signal strength It will flash as long as the keypad is not registered yet 11 AN This icon indicates a system trouble condition for example fire trouble day zone trouble or AC power loss You can display the trouble list by Trouble pressing the hash button on the keypad see Appendix 4 Service messages on page 264 12 dC This icon is ON in case the system needs to be serviced It can indicate gt many conditions for example ground fault phone fault fail to Service communicate box tamper loss of system time and similar problems You can display the service message list by pressing the hash button on the keypad see Appendix 4 Service messages on page 264 sl J If the system is OK to arm the V sign icon is displayed If it is NOT OK to arm the V sign disappears In case a force armable zone is open it will show a flashing V sign see Table 15 Default zone types and Force Armable menu option description in the glossary Ready to arm Note In case of power supply problems the following icons are displayed Normal Screensaver Power mode mode ON ON NO faults ON ON Blinking AC fault Q Battery OK AC OK Battery fault A Blinking O ON Blinking A A A 24 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual AC fault Battery low Blinking AC OK Battery low NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual
188. ected to trigger an output 2 2 1 1 1 6 Tamper Fault A menu option that groups together the tamper and trouble events that can be selected to trigger an output 2 2 1 1 1 7 Tests An Outputs menu option that groups together the test events that can be selected to trigger an output Time Unit A menu option that specifies whether the outputs are timed in minutes or seconds Time A menu option that sets the length of time for which an output is activated If it is set to O the output follows the event NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 75 Location Definition Partitions A menu entry that lists the partitions assigned to the selected output The selected output can be triggered by an event on these partitions A zone may reside in any combination of partitions A zone that resides in more than one partition becomes a common zone and is reported to its lowest partition number A common zone is armed only when all the partitions that it belongs to are armed It is disarmed the moment one of the partitions it belongs to is disarmed Attributes A menu entry that groups the programmable attributes of the selected output 2 2 1 1 5 1 Latched A menu option that causes an output to remain activated until a code is entered at the keypad 2 2 1 1 5 2 Code Stops Timer A menu entry that allows the timer used on programmable outputs to be reset by entering a valid user code 2 2 1 1 5 3 Only if Closed
189. ed Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt HomeText gt Any Phone Access gt Users n Allow the user to send HomeText commands from any phone Note Sending a HomeText message from the unregistered phone requires the following syntax Registered Phone Number password command values TCP IP network connection GPRS Access Point Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt GPRS APN Number PPP Login Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt User ID PPP Password Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt Password TCP IP Alarm Port Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Network gt Port Numbers gt TCP IP Alarm Port This should match the port number on the receiver side Status Check Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Status Check gt GSM Connection gt GPRS Connected TCP IP reporting Destination Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Report n gt Destination gt TCP IP 1 or 2 IP address Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receivers gt Receiver n gt IP Address Account Code Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receivers gt Receiver n gt Account Code Note SIA account numbers are 6 digits long Contact ID account numbers are 4 digits long Add leading zeros to create an 8 digit number Receiver Number Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receivers gt Receiver n gt Receiver Number Line Number Select NX 70
190. ed In this condition the Ready icon will flash indicating the zone is not secure At the end of the exit delay the zone will be bypassed If the zone becomes secured at any time during the arming cycle it will be unbypassed and will become active in the system If Bypass Report is enabled the force arming zones can be programmed to report bypass when they are force armed default ENTRY EXIT DELAY 2 FORCE ARMABLE A trip will start entry delay 2 Absence of a trip during exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed This zone is force armable see description above ENTRY EXIT DELAY 1 WITH CHIME ENABLED A trip will start entry delay 1 Absence of a trip during exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed When the control panel is disarmed and the chime mode has been set this zone will act as a chime zone TECHNICAL ALARM SUPERVISED AUDIBLE Any trip on a technical zone creates an audible alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel This zone can be bypassed TECHNICAL ALARM SUPERVISED SILENCE Any trip on a silent technical zone creates a silent alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel Only the transmitter will be activated This zone can be bypassed INTERIOR INSTANT ZONE This zone creates an instant alarm whenever it is tripped during the arming state of the control panel This zone will bypass automatically if enabled i
191. ed Siren tamper Disamedse 52 Autoomwomingime Ready 55 Ary siren when in way mode 53 buzzer Zone inactivity When event 48 is programmed it is possible to program a user code authorisation to select the output s which a particular code will activate de Events 49 and 50 require one or more of the following to operate wireless receivers or cardreaders Y If set to follow condition these events will be 1 second Setup for auto test auto arm and opening closing times LOCATION 51 AUTOTEST CONTROL 4 segments numerical data Segment 1 Program a 1 if the interval is to be in hours program a 0 for days Add a 2 to suppress the daily test or a 3 to suppress the hourly test if any report has been sent Segment 2 Program the autotest interval from 1 255 hours days Segment 3 Program the autotest report hour in 24 hour format if the interval is in hours this segment Is ignored Segment 4 Program the autotest report time number of minutes after the hour 114 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 52 OPENING TIME AUTOMATIC DISARMING TIME 2 segments numerical data Location 52 contains the time in 24 hour format when the NetworX V3 will enable the disarm capability for codes designated as arm only after closing This time is only valid on those days programmed in location 54 This is also the time when the panel will automatic disarm Note Opening time must be earlier than
192. ed when using Contact ID or SIA formats The numbers in brackets following the event is the number that is reported as the zone number If there are no parentheses the zone is 0 An asterisk represents the first character from the event code of the zone that 1s bypassed or in fault Table 41 Event codes Contact o Report AC fail 301 AC fail restore SIA Report Contact ID SIA Panic RAM Check Failure WN O aa Alarm restore R Auto test AUX Comm Fail 304 AUX Comm Fail Restore 304 CA O NS X X zj Auxiliary 2 panic 100 Bus Fault 307 Bus Fault Restore 307 Bypass zone number 570 a zone 570 406 Closed with zones bypassed 456 401 Control box tamper 137 Cancel user number Sprinkler supervisory 200 Sprinkler supervisory restore 200 3 120 303 59 344 344 344 344 304 130 321 321 200 200 11 138 627 304 137 137 628 627 351 351 80 84 384 304 Siren tamper restore device number Telephone fault Telephone fault restore IC E itv batten restore SM uomen soni Closing user number Control box tamper restore 137 Control power up 602 Duress 121 Early to open 451 End download 412 End program 628 Exit error user number 457 Expander trouble device number 333 Expander trouble restore device number aa U Fail to communicate 54 PA IA C A A IA B A S U LF LB A R LX LB LT LR 7 Faults Overwrite R 7 Y Y S S Y T T
193. ed X 10 devices The following example programs the unit code 3 and house code L for device 1 L eee a a Navigate with the AV keys to This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt Light Control gt Device I and press OK Scroll to Unit Code and press OK Select 3 and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Unit Code Scroll to House Code and press OK Select Z and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to House Code Copying keypad settings The current keypad settings can be copied to one or multiple keypads in the system The following example copies the current keypad settings to another keypad in the system L Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad gt Copy Keypad gt To One Keypad and press OK Select the relevant partition number and press OK Select the number of the keypad to which the settings will be copied and press OK The keypad displays the message Copying while copying the settings and returns to Keypad when copying 1s complete Note In case of wireless keypads settings are copied from the keypad to the RF receiver first and then sent to the target keypad or one by one to consecutive keypads It takes some time and can sporadically affect other communication with the source target keypad including false state of the range indicator and or status icons It is a temporary state and after copying is finished all icons will again sh
194. ed by default 3 Use the ANY keys to change the status to enabled and press OK 4 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Custom Message To edit the custom message 1 Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad and press OK 2 Select Program KP Text press OK and then select a language using the MY keys 3 Scroll to Zones Messages gt Custom Message press OK and then edit the appropriate line of the message 4 Press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Custom Message Edit the other line of the message if required Setting the keypad partition and keypad number When you first power up the keypad you are prompted to set the language the default country and the partition and keypad number for the current keypad The keypad can connect to the bus only after you set these numbers The partition number and keypad number prompts are displayed for the initial setting only To change these numbers again scroll to This Keypad gt Partition Number and This Keypad gt Keypad Number Setting the exit buzzer options You can configure a behaviour of the warning signal emitted during the exit delay when the user is leaving premises The menu entries responsible for the keypad buzzer are partially located in the NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 163 Partition Settings and System Settings groups of the Control Panel menu These settings affect all the keypads in the system or all the keypads
195. ed module information Number of Modules A menu option that displays the total number of installed modules NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 237 Chapter B8 Reading the event log Overview Figure 28 Maintenance Mode menu structure 18 11 Zone Status Log Review m El N 18 3 Mand Event Log 18 4 Alarm Memory 18 5 Service Check 18 6 Detector Reset 18 7 Light Control 18 8 Advanced Menu The event log displays the details of all the events that occur from when you turn the system on A maximum of 512 events are held in the event log To read the event log 1 Press OK at the system prompt and enter your installer code 2 Navigate with the NY keys to Maintenance Mode and press OK 3 Scroll to Log Review and press OK 4 The last event added to the log is shown The gt symbol indicates that the message must be scrolled horizontally Press F5 to scroll to the right and view the rest of the event description Table 36 Event description explains each part of the event description Alarm P3 Warehouse Press F5 P Warehouse 17 32 25 09 48 gt 48 Office 028 In this case an alarm occurred in zone 48 with the assigned zone name Office in partition 3 with the assigned partition name Warehouse at 17 32 on September 25 No report was sent to the central station This is the twenty eighth event in the log 5 Press the NY keys to scroll th
196. egment 86 87 88 89 90 5 1 2 1 2 1 2 5 1 2 1 2 1 2 5 1 2 1 2 Type dec value option option hex value hex value dec value dec value dec value option option hex value hex value dec value dec value dec value option option hex value hex value Description Time Special configuration Partition X 10 unit code X 10 house code Event number Zone user number Time Special configuration Partition X 10 unit code X 10 house code Event number Zone user number Time Special configuration Partition X 10 unit code X 10 house code IO module IO module 4 LOCATION 70 PROGRAMMING THE EVENT USER ZONE AND TIME FOR OUTPUT 1 3 segments numerical data Segment 1 Event Selects the event that will trigger the output See chart below for the specific events that can be selected Segment 2 Zone user Selects the zone or user number necessary to trigger an output If this location is programmed as a zero 0 any zone or user will activate the output see also location 68 The zone user filter is active only for following events Burglary Alarm Fire Alarm 24h Alarm Zone Tamper it filters out zones for all these events and Code Entry it filters out users For all other events this setting is ignored Segment 3 Time Selects the amount of time an output will remain activated when an output triggers If this location is programmed a
197. el to ensure that you have the correct country defaults according to your local regulations see Country codes section Also see the Reset Settings command description in the control panel section glossary NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 27 Chapter A3 Installing a basic system Installing the NetworX V3 A CAUTION Before installing the panel e Ensure that the unit is mounted on a flat solid vertical surface so that the base will not flex or warp when the mounting screws bolts are tightened e Leavea50 mm clearance between equipment enclosures mounted side by side and 25 mm between the enclosure and the cable pathway e The battery mounting facility inside the housing is only useful for steady state use of the control panel Remove the battery for transport of the control panel e Take care that wire terminals are isolated Use tie wraps to prevent contact with any other wires or circuits in case wires break Polycarbonate housings Small polycarbonate housing is adequate for systems with a just a single additional module installed usually the TCP IP module Figure 5 Small polycarbonate housing 28 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual When expanding the small system switching to the large polycarbonate box may be required since more modules cannot physically f1t the smaller housing Figure 6 Large polycarbonate housing Mount the panel housing on the wall using mounting holes shown as items 4 in Figu
198. embled or exposed to fire or high temperatures Dispose of used battery according to battery directive instructions and or as required by local laws Keep away from children Always use batteries that are from the same batch and always replace all batteries with fresh ones simultaneously 34 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Figure 12 Wireless indoor siren pe E y 3 O Pad E7 2 5 6 A gt A a 16 G 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 Speaker 11 Tamper 2 4x AA battery pack 12 Tamper 3 9 V battery 13 9 V battery terminal 4 Siren PCB 9 V battery terminal 5 Siren driver 15 4x AA battery pack 6 Siren driver 4x AA battery pack 9 Open collector output 17 IO module PCB NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 35 Open collector output TX 7001 05 1 Wireless indoor siren specifications Power supply specifications Battery capacity 600 mAh Bottey Mine typical ear General feature specifications Environmental 10 C to 40 C max 95 non condensing CE Certification EN 50131 1 System requirements EN 50131 4 Warning devices EN 50131 5 3 Requirements for interconnectio
199. emories within the direct connect module There are four possible programming memories Panel Type A menu option that displays panel type information currently stored in one of the four programming memory files in the direct connect module Panel to File A menu option that copies a panel s programming to one of the programming memories in the direct connect module There are four possible programming memories in the NX 586E File to Panel A menu option to copy programming memory from one of the four memory locations contained in the direct connect module to the control panel Speed A menu option that sets the data communications speed from the NX 586E direct connect module to the control panel This can be set from 600 baud to 76 8k baud It is recommended to use the default setting of 9600 baud NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 249 Technical Specifications Power supply specifications Power supply voltage 12V 2 Consumption 30 mA at 12V 2 General feature specifications Housing Size Dimensions width x height x depth 42x96x22 mm 250 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Chapter B10 Programming with the DL900 software Other methods of programming You can program the system using the NX 1048 keypad or using the DL900 software This software allows you to download the programming information on the control panel to the computer running the DL900 software change it and upload the changes from the c
200. ends an alarm when the system is armed and trouble when the system is disarmed 213 1 1 10 Follower Access A zone type that follows a state of the entry exit zone Usually it is a delayed zone when the system is open and an instant burglary zone during non entry times This option allows to toggle the follower setting This option is visible only if the 24 hour input type option is disabled Zone Type Name A menu option that specifies the name of a particular zone type This option also allows the name to be edited Attributes A menu entry that groups the additional characteristics of the selected zone type 2 1 3 1 3 1 End of Line Resistor A zone characteristic that specifies that two 3k3 end of line resistors are used An end of line resistor EOL is a resistor that is placed on the line to stop the signal being bounced back 2 1 3 1 3 2 Defeat EOL Resistor A menu option that disables the end of line resistor of the specified zone type 2 1 3 1 3 3 Loop Response A zone characteristic of on board control panel zones that specifies the response rate This can be either 500 ms or 50 ms 2 1 3 1 3 4 Swinger Zone A zone characteristic that allows the selected zone to be automatically bypassed after a specified number of alarms 2 1 3 1 3 5 Bypassable A zone characteristic that allows the zone to be bypassed 2 1 3 1 3 6 Force Armable A zone characteristic that allows the zone to be force armed 2 1 3 1 3 7 Group Bypass A z
201. enu entry that groups reporting options for the GPRS module An Options menu option that displays a status message when reporting is taking place Reset Settings A menu option that defaults the GPRS module This is a necessary procedure on all components before starting to program the system RF Low Battery and A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control when a low battery condition Restores occurs in an RF sensor A restore report is also sent when the low battery condition is no longer active RF Sensor Lost and A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control when an RF sensor is missing A Restores restore report is sent to the central station when the receiver receives a valid signal from the lost transmitter RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator This indicates the field signal strength of the NX 7002 RSSI in test call A Reporting menu entry that adds the RSSI strength into the test report RSSI Value Received Signal Strength Indication Value This is a measure of the RF reception and is similar to the indication on a mobile phone An Options setting that displays the current RSSI value The RSSI value is periodically updated when logged into the network RSSI values range from 0 to 31 with 99 as unknown S Secondary reporting The means of reporting events that the control panel fails to report Sending SMS An Options menu option that indicates that the module is sending an SMS me
202. enu is enabled pm Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Arm Schedules and press OK Scroll to Auto Arm gt Partition 1 gt Sunday gt Yes and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Sunday Scroll to 45 Minute Retry gt Enabled and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to 45 Minute Retry Navigate with the NY keys to Schedule Times gt Closing Autoarm gt Hour and press OK Enter 18 and press OK SS ee ee SS A The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Hour jh Scroll to Minute and press OK h h Enter 0 and press OK bd gt The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Minute Glossary Location Term Definition 2 Control Panel This groups all options relating to the central processing unit of the alarm system The control panel monitors the detection devices and activates any number of signalling devices A menu entry that groups zone options a rem 2 1 1 1 1 Zone Type A menu option that specifies the zone type of a particular zone Zone Name A menu option that allows the installer to define names for each installed zone For example Zone 1 can be named Living Room PIR A menu entry that groups options relating to all zones NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 71 Location Term Definition Partitions A menu entry that lists the partitions assigned to the selected zone The selected zone can
203. eport as User 99 in logs and reports This zone type can only belong to one partition Interior Follower This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delay is being timed It is with Cross Zone delayed during entry and exit delay times If a Cross Zone Is not being timed it will start a Cross Zone timer If a Cross Zone is being timed it will create an instant alarm This zone will bypass automatically if enabled by the Group Bypass command Instant Entry Guard This zone creates an instant alarm whenever it is tripped and the zone is timed It will start an entry delay time 2 if it is tripped provided that the system is armed and the stay instant mode is on Entry Exit 1 with A trip will start entry delay 1 This zone will bypass when the Group Bypass command Is entered Group Bypass at the keypad Absence of a trip during exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed Interior Follower This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delays are being timed It with Group Bypass is delayed during entry exit delay times This zone will bypass when the Group Bypass command is entered at the keypad This zone will bypass automatically if enabled by the Group Bypass command Instant with Group This zone creates an instant alarm whenever it is tripped and the system is armed This zone will Bypass Keyswitch Maintained Entry Exit
204. er __ STEEN User Number for Phone Number d __ S A User Number for Phone Number OO SESSI User Number for Phone Numbers __ STATE User Number for Phone Numberd 0 O 228 HOMETEXT REPORT GROUPS FOR PHONE NUMBERS 1 16 SPEER SU Assigned Report Groups to Phone 1 10 00 0000 STE assigned Report Groups to Phone2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEM Assioned Report Groups to Phone 3 00000000 STE assigned Report Groups to Phones 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEEM assigned Report Groups to Phone 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSS STE assigned Report Groups to Phones 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 STE assigned Report Groups to Phone 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSS STE Assioned Report Groups to Phones 00000000 STE assigned Report Groups to Phone9 00000000 SSS SETE Assigned Report Groups to Phone 10_ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSS STEAM Assigned Report Groups to Phone 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SETA A Assigned Report Groups to Phone 12 00000000 SSS STEP Assigned Report Groups to Phone 13 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 segment 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A A Assigned Report Groups to Phone 15 00000000 SSS A ssioned Report Groups to Phone 16 00000000 SS 229 Mox number of concatenated SMS messages a o 232 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOC DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA 230 231 HomeText Phone Number 1 HomeText Phone Number 2 HomeText Phone Number 3 HomeText Phone Number 4 HomeText Phone Number 5 HomeText Phone Number 6 HomeText Phone Number 7
205. er trouble device number Expander restore device number 210 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Report Contact ID SIA Report Contact ID SIA Low battery device 309 YT RF jamming number Low battery restore device 309 YR RF jamming restore number Mains restore device 301 AR Smoke detector clean me number restore Box tamper device 137 TA Box tamper restore device number number Special Reports Table 29 Special Reports Report Contact ID SIA Fail to communicate over PSTN RTOOO Fail to communicate over SMS Fail to communicate over GPRS GSM Login Success 551193 LR193 Low RSSI 351 194 Good RSSI 351 194 LR194 GPRS Down 351 195 LT195 GPRS OK 351 195 LR195 RSSI Value combined with test call vvv RSSI RXvvv value SMS SIA reporting message format SIA reporting over SMS can be set to one of three modes separate events combined events and reporting with partition modifiers Separate events Account codes are used to identify partitions Events for separate account codes are sent in separate messages using the syntax e gt aaaaaa eennn eennn See Table 30 for a detailed syntax description NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 211 Table 30 Reporting syntax Format key Description The message opening character A six digit account code A two digit SIA code AA Partition modifier Ri is literal n is the partition number A pee O X is optional and may
206. esistor defeat on non fire non keyswitch zones 3 On enables zone to act as request to exit input disables for alarm activation 4 On enables zone to act as access entry point Door Shunt 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Segment 5 1 8 Reserved Note Refer to NX 17xx door control installer manual Do not enable this segment unless configured with Door Control LOCATION 112 CONFIGURATION GROUP 2 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 112 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 113 CONFIGURATION GROUP 2 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 114 CONFIGURATION GROUP 3 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 114 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for th
207. ets the phone number of the PC running the upload download software Polling Time A Reporting setting that configures the length of theTCP IP polling time This value must match the TCP IP polling time set on a TCP IP receiver The value chosen is determined by the level of security required and the cost of data transmission This can be from 1 to 255 minutes on the NX 7002 and 1 to 255 seconds on the NX 590 If set to 0 the option is disabled Polling Units A Reporting setting that sets polling time in either hours or minutes Port Numbers An Options menu entry that groups TCP IP port options Power A Options menu entry that groups power related status messages Power A Reporting menu entry that groups the power events that are reported to the selected report control Power Trouble and A Reporting setting that reports mains failure mains restore low battery and low battery restore Restores events to the selected report control Primary reporting The main means of reporting selected events See also Secondary reporting Program Download A Reporting setting that reports programming and up download events to the selected report control Protocol A Reporting setting that configures the communicator format used to report to the selected SMS receiver Consult the instructions for your central station receiver to determine which format is compatible PUK code Personal Unblocking Key The code to use to unblock the SIM card The SIM card can
208. etween the panel and wireless keypad s and is unique for each panel Any 24 digit value can be entered The same encryption key must be entered when successive wireless keypads are enrolled 11 The new keypad communicates with the panel and sends data entered in steps 5 to 10 The Learn in Mode message displays briefly 12 The new keypad is learned in and displays the Programming in Progress message To clear this message you have to exit programming mode on the first keypad Important You should not program zero only strings for example 000 as values for SysID KID1 KID2 nor Encryption Key as it will make the keypad non operational Note If the learned in keypad s configuration stored in the RF receiver differs from the actual keypad s configuration the RF receiver will start the configuration copying process It takes a couple of seconds and during this process the keypad displays the Copying message During this operation due to an intensive radio communication you should not perform any additional actions on other wireless keypads Deleting wireless keypads You can delete wireless keypads from the system The following example deletes the wireless keypad number 2 1 Using the other keypad enter the programming mode navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers and press OK 2 Select the RF Receiver 32 and press OK 176 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 3 Select Del RF Device gt Del RF Keypad and then selec
209. eypad 169 wireless indoor Siren 0 35 wireless outdoor Siren a7 PU 0 0 8 a piro 49 Status messages i 208 SUECAS Ol caos 180 SWINger COUNt iii 57 System AMOO E EEE dad 65 OG iaia 60 CU ARRE SERA 68 CASK S EEA AE 267 A A sansune E 68 System status ic s asccccweszesncsnoateersaaseaadeearcccasais 207 T Networx Version 3 Installation Manual TCP IP network connection 206 POM UNO iero 206 MAR biencatboncndesncncnecanmiaeuaesssuoraktoness 43 Troubleshooting 00 208 U Up dewnlo4diio iii 202 A AA EA 207 E A A A T 206 Updating O A 255 Upload download 250 NSO NO AGI A 231 254 User interface language 40 161 y Voicechanne l ascii 207 W Wireless indoor siren specifications certera eta 35 Wireless keypad 19 Wireless outdoor siren specifications 0 noo nnonnnnnos 37 Wiring control panel 26 Word library A 45 268 A EE RE T 161 XSIA VIS A o 204 AAA iaia 204 Z Zone SITI OLO O en ESA IR OR E ARR AP A 55 SENOS aria 56 a E P E AT A O 56 Zones maximum number of 15 modi 1G ies 56 285 286 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual
210. f Gti Oe fl LCD icons Name Power Bypass Full Part armed Stay Night Away Chime Fire Description If mains power is present the left icon is displayed If mains power is not present the right icon shows up Panel battery low is indicated by flashing the icon either the left one or the right one In MASTER mode the left icon shows up if ANY zone in any partition is bypassed In PARTITION mode the right icon is being displayed if ANY zone is bypassed In MASTER mode the FULL icon left shows up only if ALL partitions are ARMED while the PART icon right shows up if NOT ALL partitions are ARMED In PARTITION mode the STAY icon left shows up if armed and staying and the NIGHT icon right if the night function is enabled In PARTITION mode one of these icons shows up if armed and leaving the left one if ANY zone is bypassed the right one if NO zone is bypassed In CHIME mode this icon will be ON If the CHIME mode is disabled it will be OFF This icon will be displayed when a fire zone has been activated fire alarm and it will flash in case of fire trouble NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 23 8 h P This icon is only available on the wireless keypad and flashing when the Battery low keypad battery is low gt 1 This icon flashes in case of an alarm condition Alarm This icon is only available on the wireless keypad and indicates RF link 10 x field strength Th
211. first to erase any previous keypad settings otherwise it will not initialize the learning mode see Chapter B11 Updating firmware on page 255 5 On the new keypad select a language from the list with the NY keys and press OK 6 Select default settings from the Load Country Defaults list with the ANY keys and press OK 7 At the Partition Number prompt type the partition number and press OK 8 At the Keypad Number prompt type the keypad number and press OK 9 At the Sys D KID1 KID2 prompt 3 values need to be entered SysID this value represents the System ID or a 3 digit code which should be unique for this panel KID1 this value represents Keypad ID 1 and contains the first 3 digits of the code which should be unique for this wireless keypad o KID2 this value represents Keypad ID 2 and contains the last 3 digits of the code which should be unique for this wireless keypad Each of these three values must range from 001 to 255 If any typed value is incorrect the keypad displays the blank SysID KID1 KID2 prompt again The combination of unique panel and wireless keypad identifiers is required in order a wireless keypad is to communicate with the appropriate panel only In case multiple wireless keypads are used on the same panel each wireless keypad should have different KID1 and KID2 values 10 At the EncKey prompt enter a 24 digit encryption key and press OK This encryption key is to secure the wireless communication link b
212. fter close window will arm disarm on Monday 3 Arm only after close window will arm disarm on Tuesday 4 Arm only after close window will arm disarm on Wednesday 5 Arm only after close window will arm disarm on Thursday 6 Arm only after close window will arm disarm on Friday 7 Arm only after close window will arm disarm on Saturday 8 Reserved LOCATION 55 DAYS OF THE WEEK FOR AUTO ARMING IN PARTITIONS 1 THRU 4 4 segments feature selection data Location 55 selects the days on which each partition will auto arm Segment is for partition 1 and segment 4 is for partition 4 If a zone is faulted before the warning timer and stays faulted during the NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 115 warning timer the zone will automatically be bypassed If the zone restores it will be unbypassed and active in the system Segment 1 4 1 Auto arming on Sunday 2 Auto arming on Monday 3 Auto arming on Tuesday 4 Auto arming on Wednesday 5 Auto arming on Thursday 6 Auto arming on Friday 7 Auto arming on Saturday 8 Disable retry timer Communicator codes for slow speed formats only Note Locations 56 83 are only used when reporting events to a pager or when using a slow format such as 4 2 When using Contact ID or SIA there is no need to program these locations LOCATION 56 RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 56 contains the event code for a zo
213. full Segment 2 1 Zone and box tamper 2 Auxiliary power over current and restore 3 Wireless sensor missing and restore 4 Wireless sensor low battery and restore 5 Expander trouble and restore keypads are considered as expanders 6 Fail to communicate 7 Alarm restore 8 Tamper restore LOCATION 5 PARTITIONS REPORTED TO PHONE N 1 1 segment feature selection data Location 5 1s used when the events to be reported to a phone number are based on the partition regardless of the event If you use this location you should program location 4 as 0 Segment 1 l Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 4 Partition 4 Telephone number 2 LOCATION 6 PROGRAMMING PHONE N 2 20 segments numerical data Phone N 2 is programmed in location 6 A 14 indicates the end of the phone number Delays of four seconds can be programmed at any point in the phone number by programming a 13 in the appropriate segment The system will always wait for a dial tone unless the first digit of the phone number is a 13 in this case it will only delay Tone DTMF dialling is default If you want pulse tone dialling program a 15 in the segment where pulse dialling should begin If the entire number should be pulse dialling program a 15 in the first segment Program an 11 for a and a 12 for a FP Note A zero is programmed as a 0 LOCATION 7 ACCOUNT CODE FOR PHONE N 2 6
214. g GSM CSD The module is sending data GPRS Connected The module is communicating with the GPRS network a Good RSSI Good level of the received signal Battery Fault There is a problem with the main battery SM PSU Fault There is a problem with the 3 8 V power supply for the GPRS modem caused by a problem with the main battery a Bus Power Fault There is a problem with the 13 8 V voltage supplied by the bus to the module Troubleshooting Table 27 Troubleshooting problems and solutions Problem Caused by Do this The module is not sending messages The antenna is faulty or Ensure the antenna is attached Replace the missing old or faulty antenna The SIM PIN Accepted message is off The The SIM card is not inserted or Insert the SIM card correctly module provides GSM modem inserted incorrectly information but no GSM operation works The SIM card is blocked The SIM PIN The SIM PIN code is not Insert the SIM card into a mobile phone and Accepted message is off and the SIM PUK correctly programmed enter the PUK code Required message is displayed The Logged into GSM Network message is The GSM operator ID number Enter 00000 to enable automatic operator off and the Current Operator menu entry is incorrect selection is blank Autotest You can run a periodic autotest to ensure the system is working correctly Autotest parameters are configured on the control panel You can configure the control panel to run autotests and
215. g state of the control panel It will display on the keypad This zone type will NOT be reported This zone creates an instant alarm whenever the system is armed This zone is force armable This zone creates an instant alarm whenever the system is armed It will send a report if the zone activity time is reached without a change of state This zone creates an instant alarm whenever the system is armed When the loop is closed the zone Is ready Opening of the loop means a faulted zone Creates an instant audible alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel It will display on the keypad A medical report will be sent to the CMS Defining a zone You must select the language in which to program the new name and also assign partitions to the zone You can select the zone type and zone name for each new zone The following steps explain how to select the zone type and zone name for a new zone 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Inputs gt Zones and press OK 2 Select the zone number of the new zone to be configured and press OK 3 Select Zone Type and press OK 4 Scroll to the relevant zone type and press OK 5 Select Zone Name and press OK 56 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 6 Scroll to the relevant language and press OK The current name for zone 1s displayed for example Zone 1 T Press to enter overwrite mode and press the keys 0 to 9 to insert new characters 8 Press OK to accept th
216. g that configures the NX 7002 to automatically answer any incoming calls To enable this setting you must enable Remote Initiated Aux Short Circuit and A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control when too much current is Restores detected A restore report is also sent when the overcurrent condition is fixed B Backup Destination A Reporting setting that configures the backup destination for the selected report control If using another device as the backup destination set the reporting format in Reporting gt Backup Format and enable test report events in the backup device Backup Format A Reporting setting that configures the reporting format when using another device as backup You must set the same reporting format on the backup device Battery Fault An Options setting that indicates that there is a problem with the battery Bit Error Rate An Options setting that displays the current Bit Error Rate BER The BER value is periodically updated when the NX 7002 is logged into the network This information is used for verification purposes only BER values range from 0 to 7 with 99 as unknown It is applicable to GPRS only Bus Power Fault An Options setting that indicates that there is a problem with power to the bus C Callback Required An Up download setting that configures the NX 7002 to call back the PC in order to initiate an upload download session To enable this setting you must enable Remote Initia
217. he Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 120 CONFIGURATION GROUP 6 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 120 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm 128 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 121 CONFIGURATION GROUP 6 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 122 CONFIGURATION GROUP 7 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 122 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 123 CONFIGURATION GROUP 7 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 124 CONFIGURATION GROUP 8 ALARM EVENT CO
218. he particular event latched 186 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Term Time Unit Traceability Traceability Unit Code Version Voltage Level Wake On Entry Timer Wake On Exit Timer Wake On Pulsing Buzzer Wake Up On Chime X 10 Address Zone User Definition A menu option that specifies the time unit set in Control Output Events gt Time option as minutes or seconds A menu entry that groups additional information like serial number manufacture date and firmware revision for the particular IO module siren A menu entry that groups additional information like serial number manufacture date and firmware revision A menu option that sets the X 10 unit number used to identify a particular X 10 device on the selected module A menu option that displays the current software version of the selected receiver A menu entry that displays battery voltage level and auxiliary voltage level for the particular IO module siren When this option is set to Enabled all the wireless keypads get active on Entry Timer start i e they wake up from the sleep mode in order to indicate it When this option is set to Disabled keypads do not wake up When this option is set to Enabled all the wireless keypads get active on Exit Timer start i e they wake up from the sleep mode in order to indicate it When this option is set to Disabled keypads do not wake up When this option is set to Enabled al
219. he GSM network operator used by the NX 7002 Set this to 00000 to allow the SIM card automatically select a network operator Alternatively enter an operator ID code to manually select a network operator The Logged into GSM Network message does not appear if an invalid selection is made or the network is unreachable Options A menu entry that groups the NX 7002 options p 221 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Term Definition Partition Account A Reporting menu entry that lists the account codes for each partition The account code is sent Codes when the relevant partition is reported There are two sets of account codes The first set assigns an account code to each report destination The second set assigns an account code to each partition If you attempt to use both sets the partition account code takes precedence See also Account Code Password An Options setting that configures the password for a PAP login Contact the network provider to confirm if a PAP login is required and to obtain the user ID and password Password Always An Options menu setting that requires a password to be included when a HomeText message is sent Required to the system Passwords must be between 6 and 16 characters and contain at least one number between 0 9 They should only have alphanumeric characters and no spaces Phone Number A Reporting setting that sets the phone number to which SMS reports are sent An Up download setting that s
220. he armed state of the system They are held in a sequential event buffer with a time and date stamp When the log is full it overwrites the oldest entries with new data These events can later be viewed through downloading 18 3 Mand Event Log A menu command that is used to view the mandatory event log 18 4 Alarm Memory A menu option that displays a list of alarms and where they occurred Only the alarms that have occurred during the last arm disarm cycle are shown in the alarm memory log The way the list of alarms is displayed depends also on a setting of the First Alarm Logic menu option see First Alarm Logic 18 5 Service Check A menu command that is used to verify service messages The service message disappears when the installer enters and then leaves programming mode If User Code Resets Tamper Memory is enabled a user can reset the service message by entering a user code Detector Reset A menu command that resets two wire and four wire smoke detectors and the Fire symbol display on the keypad For hardwired smoke detectors the power supply to the smoke detectors is cut temporarily i 00 RF smoke detectors have an auto reset because the RF communication is uni directional from RF detector to RF receiver This command does not reset RF smoke detectors but should still be used to reset the Fire symbol displayed on the keypad Light Control A menu option that lists the X 10 devices that can be turned ON OFF 18 8
221. he entry and exit times for partition 1 will be used Segment 1 Entry time 1 Entry time that will be used when a delay 1 zone type initiates an entry delay Segment 2 Exit time 1 Exit time that will be used for all zones designated as delay 1 Segment 3 Entry time 2 Entry time that will be used when a delay 2 zone type initiates an entry delay Segment 4 Exit time 2 Exit time that will be used for all zones designated as delay 2 Segment 5 Reserved Segment 6 Reserved Programming zone configuration groups Locations 110 169 are used to change the zone configurations as listed in the table on page 104 These locations are considered as advanced programming and they should only be changed if you have a thorough understanding of the operation of each bit LOCATION 110 CONFIGURATION GROUP 1 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 110 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 111 CONFIGURATION GROUP 1 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Segment 1 1 Fire turn on if this is a fire zone 2 24 hour turn on for non fire 24 hour zones 3 Keyswitch zone normally open switch 4 F
222. he keypad can be numbered from one to eight The selected number links to the module number reported to the central station in the case of tampers or expansion troubles 3 Partition Number A menu entry menu option that specifies the partition that the selected keypad can access if it is a single partition keypad Together with the keypad number it determines the keypad bus module number for both single partition and master keypads Keypad Features A menu entry that groups keypad options closed tamper switch When opened a box case tamper is reported as an event 3 3 2 Silent Keypad A menu option that silences the keypad s entry exit sounder and chime only 333 Ding Dong Chime A menu option that sets the sound a chime makes It is either a ding dong or a beep Case Tamper A menu option that sends a tamper report to the central station and activates a siren and or the keypad when interference with keypad housing occurs A tamper occurs when the casing of a piece of hardware for example the control panel sound box or keypad is interfered with The panel has an input for a normally 1 5 1 Location 3 3 4 5 5 1 3 3 8 3 3 10 3 3 11 3 3 12 3 3 13 3 3 14 3 3 14 1 N EN o Term NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 165 Definition 5 sec silence A menu option that silences the pulsing keypad sounder for five seconds when a key is pressed Armed Zone Info Master Keypad Serv
223. hows the keypad with the optional function keycaps placed in their default positions factory setting Optional keycaps available for assigning to the four programmable keys are Keycap symbol Name Default factory setting PANIC F1 FIRE F2 MEDICAL F8 NIGHT MODE F7 CANCEL Not assigned Note The function keycaps can be placed randomly over the four available positions Actual function activation is accomplished through a menu option during installation For more information about programming function keys F1 to F8 see Programming the function keys on page 154 Table 7 Key functions Press to arm the system Arm Away Chi Note Exact behavior of this key depends on the system settings configured by the installer For more information see the Master Keypad and the Quick Arm menu option descriptions in the glossary 4 Arm Stay Press to arm the system in Stay mode Note For this mode to work correctly interior zones must be set You can also configure this key to toggle the Stay Instant mode of the armed partition For more information on this button behavior see the Master Keypad Instant Stay Toggle and the Quick Arm menu option description in the glossary NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 21 When in the menu Press to scroll to the start of the LCD message When in master mode Disarm at gt Press to disarm the system Note The Disarm key works in the master mode only after the user code
224. ic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 164 CONFIGURATION GROUP 28 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 164 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 165 CONFIGURATION GROUP 28 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 166 CONFIGURATION GROUP 29 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 166 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 167 CONFIGURATION GROUP 29 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 137 LOCATION 168 CONFIGURATION GROUP 30 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data
225. ications gt Central Station and press OK Ze Scroll to Phone numbers gt Phone Number 2 gt Phone Number and press OK 3 Type 0 to enter the letter G then type your phone number and press OK The letter G at the beginning of the phone number tells the panel to use a GSM dialer NX 7002 instead of a panel s analog dialer The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Phone Numbers Navigate with the NY keys to Protocol and press OK Select Siren Tone and press OK E oS Navigate with the NY keys to Events and select Arm Disarm Alarm gt Alarms enable it and press OK Make sure all other options under Events are disabled So The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Events 9 Navigate with the NY keys to Backup Control enter 1 and then press OK Entering a 1 will cause the panel to ring your phone after executing a call to the regular central station Phone Number 1 10 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Backup Control Defining communication with upload download software You can set up a number of conditions that must be met before a communication session 1s established between the control panel and the up download software For more information on programming using the upload download software see Chapter B10 Programming with the DL900 software NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 65 Configuring the system autotest The autotest 1s run at configured inte
226. ice Message Custom Message Custom Message Lock 24 hour Clock Battery Change Allowed Advanced Options Type OK for Menu A menu option that enables the mode that displays zone status on the keypad when the system is armed When this mode is disabled zone status information is not displayed when armed A menu option that sounds a keypad beep when the panic function key personal attack alarm medical alarm or fire alarm is held down When this option is disabled all three panic function keys are mute no keystroke sound is emitted A menu option that sets the default mode of the selected keypad to master mode This is a mode of operation on a keypad that allows a user or installer access multiple partitions within the system and to perform functions in these partitions In order to arm in Stay Night or Away mode or disarm a partition the user must enter the user code select the partition and then press the appropriate function button A master keypad can be temporarily switched to operate in single partition mode and a single partition keypad can be temporarily switched to operate in master mode A menu option that enables or disables the service messages on the keypad A message displayed on the LCD keypad informing the user or installer of a system fault The service message disappears from the keypad when the installer enters and leaves programming mode The message is used as an Engineer Reset A menu o
227. ich operate as a unit and can be armed and disarmed independently of other partitions in the system A partition is also known as an area The control panel can be divided into separate partitions with distinct zones keypad and user codes for each partition Arming and bypass options can be set for each partition To program partition settings select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt Partition Settings Setting timers You can specify the time in which a user must disarm or arm a system before a full alarm occurs The following example sets time within which the user must disarm the system 10 seconds It also sets the time within which the user must leave the protected zone after arming the system 12 seconds 1 A Ul gt U N Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition 1 gt Timers gt Entry 1 and press OK Enter 10 and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Entry 1 Scroll to Exit 1 and press OK Enter 12 and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Exit 1 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 67 Configuring a partition Y ou can set partition features including arming and bypassing options You can also enable life safety keys for the partition keypads The following example allows the system to be armed silently according to the auto arm schedule and enables the personal alarm combination keys so they activate a personal attack ala
228. ided that the system is armed and the stay instant mode is on ENTRY EXIT DELAY 1 WITH GROUP BYPASS ENABLED A trip will start entry delay 1 This zone will bypass when the Group Bypass command is entered at the keypad Absence of a trip during exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed INTERIOR FOLLOWER WITH GROUP BYPASS ENABLED This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delays are being timed It is delayed during entry exit delay times This zone will bypass when the Group Bypass command is entered at the keypad This zone will bypass automatically if enabled in segment 1 of location 23 INSTANT WITH GROUP BYPASS ENABLED This zone creates an instant alarm whenever it is tripped and the system is armed This zone will bypass when the Group Bypass command is entered at the keypad MAINTAINED KEYSWITCH This zone type will arm disarm the partition or partitions of the control panel where it is resident as long as the zone state is changed from R to 2R for example the Door Window Switch is opened or closed and kept in this state Keyswitch arming will report as user 99 in logs and reports ENTRY EXIT DELAY 1 FORCE ARMABLE A trip will start entry delay 1 Absence of a trip during exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed This zone is force armable which means the system can be Force Armed even if this zone has been violat
229. igate with the NY keys to I O 4 Output 1 gt Partitions and press OK Select partition 1 only and press OK 11 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Partitions 12 Navigate with the AV keys to I O 4 Output 1 gt Attributes gt Output Latched and press OK Select No and press OK 13 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Output Latched The Code Stops Timer option is ignored in this case so it does not have to be set 180 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual After the siren IO module is learned in you need to set up threshold values and turn the antipassivation feature ON if necessary Lithium cells require regular exercising to prevent electrode passivation which leads to an increase of the internal cell resistance Antipassivation is a function that avoids formation of this passivation layer The following example sets the threshold low battery value to 30 x 0 1 V threshold low auxillary voltage to 98 x 0 1 V and turns the antipassivation feature ON for the RF siren IO module 1 1 Navigate with the AV keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Sirens IO Features and press OK 2 Scroll to RF Siren IO I and press OK 3 Scroll to Threshold and press OK 4 Scroll to Low Battery and press OK Set the low battery threshold to 30 x 0 1 V with the AN keys and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Low Battery 5 Scroll to Low Aux Voltage and press OK Set the low auxil
230. ime and date instead of the Please Enter Your Code prompt navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt KP Shutdown shows Clock gt Enabled and press OK 5 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to KP Shutdown shows Clock There 1s an additional option to disarm the system directly from the blanked state without waking 1t up first 1 e avoiding the necessity to enter the user code twice 1 Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options and press OK 2 Scroll to KP Shutdown allows Disarm gt Enabled and press OK 3 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to KP Shutdown allows Disarm Programming the function keys The NX 1048 keypad has 8 function keys F1 to F8 The keys F1 F2 F7 and F8 can be configured to perform any action listed in the Table 19 Available function key actions The other function keys F3 F4 F5 and F6 have a permanent assigned function and cannot be configured This way you can create shortcuts for actions that otherwise require selecting a number of the user menu options or NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 155 entering codes The way the functions actually work depends on other system settings for example the Arm Away function works as a single button shortcut only in the single partition mode if the Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition 1 gt Feature Select gt Arming
231. in the partition For example to cancel the keypad exit buzzer completely for all the keypads 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel and press OK 2 Scroll to System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt Silent Exit Always 3 Use the NY keys to change the status to Yes and press OK 4 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Silent Exit Always You can also silence the particular keypad The following options cancel the exit buzzer and chime on the current keypad only 1 Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad and press OK 2 Select Keypad Features gt Silent Keypad and press OK 3 Use the NW keys to change the status to Yes and press OK 4 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Silent Keypad To set advanced buzzer options for the keypad on partition 1 when exit delays are set to 20 seconds and 10 seconds respectively 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel and press OK 2 Scroll to Partition Settings gt Partition 1 gt Timers gt Exit Time I and press OK Type 20 and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Exit Time 1 Scroll to Partition Settings gt Partition 1 gt Timers gt Exit Time 2 and press OK Type 10 and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Exit Time 2 Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad and press OK lt lt SS aS SS Scroll to Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt Buzzer On Exit gt Exi
232. ing When HomeText reporting is enabled you will receive SMS text messages about the alarm system status to your mobile phone Information required SMS Service Centre Phone Number Account code Enable XSIA Destination Protocol SMS Service Centre Destination IP address Account Code Receiver Number Line Number Enable XSIA Protocol Set the keypad from which zone and user names are obtained HomeText phone number HomeText system location HomeText Menu Option Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt GSM gt SMS Service Center Address Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Phone number Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Account Code Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt XSIA Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Report n gt Destination gt SMS1 or SMS 2 Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Protocol Select SIA Separate SIA Combined or SIA Partition Modified Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt GSM gt SMS Service Center Address Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Report n gt Destination gt TCP IP 1 or 2 Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receivers gt Receiver n gt IP Address Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt TCP IP Reporting gt Receivers gt Receiver n gt Account Code Note XSIA account numbers
233. ion 82 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if End Downloading Reporting is enabled Segment and 2 are reserved Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the End Download Reporting Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the End Download Reporting Note A start download report will be sent to the internal event log For a 3 1 format only the segment 1 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 83 CANCEL COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 1 segments numerical data Location 83 contains the tens digit for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Cancel Reporting is enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit for the Cancel Communicator Reporting The ones digit is the ones digit of the user number that did the opening If the user is greater than 9 the numbers will begin repeating e g code 6 6 code 45 5 If you need to report Cancels with a unique code per user Contact ID or SIA format must be used LOCATION 84 BUS FAULT AND BUS FAULT RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODES SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 84 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Short circuits and ground faults reporting is enabled Segment contains the tens digit of the Bus Fault Reporting Segment 2 contains the ones digit of the Bus Fault Reporting Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the Bus Fault Restore
234. ireless keypad SPECIFICAMONS criari 169 NX 586E COMING CUI lean 243 memory transfer i 246 AA 246 aii MA 246 NX 590 setting for NX 7002 200 NX 7002 backup format i 200 enro LINE 191 liana 194 PODON gerreg aooe ORE IE seca 198 O OUDOT ria i 15 P Partition 66 Ubi 66 Phone o A 42 DICI A A 42 A nieces 202 POWEL CONNECHOD csi 25 Primary reporting c ci 199 Programi loin 253 Programming mode 40 Q Quick User Menu n 41 R Ss ree 9 Report A e 15 Report controllers 199 Report MGthOS asiatica 199 Report 47 A OR RO RARI 47 control panel scan 62 65 o 48 IS 47 A 49 Reporting SUMMALY 203 RF sensors SUSPENAIM Birra 182 RS232schnal poten 250 RSSI value IN PA np PA 194 OSLO riencia A 194 S Safety terms and symbolS 9 A 69 Secondary reporting ccccccccccncncnnncnnnnnonnno 200 SC MOI lists 41 Sensors MS iia 38 Service MESSAGES mrerirrrnird criada 264 SA EA E 15 209 258 N A A 203 SIM card A IO RAC 193 Sirens alinea 33 SMS SIA combined events scri 212 partition modifiers ccccccccncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 212 076 1010 credo dndcnaas 211 separate Cy CUS siciliana 211 Specifications modal on ios cie 35 NX 1048 wired keypad 170 NX 1048 wireless k
235. is triggered on events that cannot be assigned to a partition for example an expander tamper If there is a Siren On flag on any partition the Global Siren flag is not tested A menu option that sets the code used to identify a particular premises lt is necessary in case any neighbouring premises also has an X 10 home automation system More information on the X 10 home automation system can be found at www x 10europe com When activating outputs with a user code event 45 this option can be used to restrict certain codes from activating certain outputs A menu entry that groups options relating to RF zones only A menu option on an RF door window sensor that enables the internal reed contact A menu option that enables the detection of RF jamming A menu entry that groups options relating to any device that sends commands by a wireless receiver When this option is set to Normal loc 193 bit 6 user can arm and disarm using keyfob buttons When this option is set to Restricted user can arm but can disarm only during entry time or when partition is part armed A menu option that enables the light bulb button on the keyfob for the selected RF zone on the selected RF receiver If this option is enabled pressing the light bulb button sends a keyfob function 1 event Control panel auxiliary outputs and NX 507E NX 508E outputs can be programmed to respond to this event If this option is disabled pressing the light bulb but
236. it times y 24 Hour enable for non fire 24 hour zone M Delay 2 zone enable to follow Timer 1 Entry Exit times En Keyswitch zone La Interior Enable for auto bypass or stay arming Follower enable for burglary zones that Local Only enable if zone is not to be reported are instant during non entry times Segment 2 Circle Numbers To Program Soc ne 1 2 Velping siren on alarm 6 GroupBypass ___________ 4 Chime a CI Segment 3 Circle Numbers To Program 2 Double Endof Line Tamperzone 6 Swingerzone a st Segment 4 Circle Numbers To Program tndoflineresistor defect 6 reserved SSOSC S 150 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Segment 5 Circle Numbers To Program Reserved Note The defaults listed in the odd numbered locations below represent the five segments of each of those locations Use the five segment charts from location 111 to understand these defaults 112 CONFIGURATION GROUP 2 ALARM EVENT CODE 2125298 14 CONFIGURATION GROUP 3 ALARM EVENTO __ 512525078 ooo 116 CONFIGURATION GROUP 4 ALARM EVENT CODE 117 CONFIGURATION GROUP 4 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 46412825678 118 CONFIGURATION GROUP 5 ALARM EVENT CODE eras 208 CONFIGURATION GROUP 6 ALARM EVENT CODE 4 012525678 122 CONFIGURATION GROUP 7 ALARM EVENT CODE 0 123 CONFIGURATION GROUP CHARACTERSTIC SELE zean O 124 CONFIGURATION GROUP 8 ALARM EVENT CODE __ 125 CONFIGURATION
237. it delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed This zone is force armable see description above A trip will start entry delay 1 Absence of a trip during exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed When the control panel is disarmed and the chime mode has been set this zone will act as a chime zone Any trip on a technical zone creates an audible alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel This zone can be bypassed Any trip on a silent technical zone creates a silent alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel Only the transmitter will be activated This zone can be bypassed This zone creates an instant alarm whenever it is tripped during the arming state of the control panel This zone will bypass automatically if enabled in segment 1 of location 23 or when this system Is armed in the Stay mode A trip will create an alarm when the system is armed When the control panel is disarmed and the chime mode has been set this zone will act as a chime zone This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delays are being timed It is delayed during entry and exit delay times This zone will not bypass automatically even if the Group Bypass command is active When the control panel is disarmed and the chime mode has been set this zone will act as a chime zone Creates an instant audible alarm regardless of the armin
238. it is mandatory to check the RSSI value signal strength of the NX 7002 and record it in the system documentation The RSSI value is linked to the signal level of the GSM network and ranges from 0 31 with 99 as unknown The RSSI value may change due to environmental circumstances for example additional furniture or metal constructions If an RSSI reading is not satisfactory move the antenna to get a better reception Table 24 RSSI values Value Explanation Values between 1 and 4 The module will not work properly and must be moved to another location Values between 5 and 9 The module will work but ideally should be moved to another location Values between 10 and 16 These are normal working values for the module located at a longer distance from the receiver Values above 17 Perfect conditions 1 Enter programming mode 2 Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt GSM gt RSSI Value and press OK 3 Note the RSSI reading 4 Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Status Check and press OK 5 Scroll through the status messages to ensure the SIM card is logged onto the GSM network and the SIM card PIN is not blocked See Obtaining the GSM GPRS module status on page 207 for more information on status messages Testing the GSM or GPRS connection You can test if the module is logged into the GSM network by selecting NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Status Check gt GSM Connection gt Logged into GSM Network o You can test if the m
239. itch aux 1 to activate aux output 1 on the panel Changes your user code user code 0101 to change your own user code to 0101 Changes another persons user code 2 0101 to change the user user code code to 0101 for the user 2 delete user code user number Deletes a user code delete user code 2 to delete the user code for the user 2 start reporting Sends reports from the start reporting tte O emee NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 215 To Do This Send This Explanation Example Stop reporting until system re stop reporting Stops reports being sent stop reporting arm form the NX7002 until the system is rearmed Stop reporting until you start it stop reporting permanent Stops reports being sent stop reporting permanent again from the NX7002 until the start reporting command is sent Register your phone register phone number user The phone is registered with register 32444123456 2 to register the number your alarm system number 32444123456 to user 2 Register your phone with a new register phone number user The phone is registered with register 32444123456 1 440044 to password number Password your alarm system with a register the number 32444123456 to new password user 1 with a password 44a044 To change language language language The language the SMS texts language deutsch to change the use is changed The interface to German available arguments languages are English Dutch Espanol Suomi Italiano
240. itched on for 6 minutes jh Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Outputs and press OK Scroll to O 3 Output I and press OK Select Event gt Not Ready to Arm and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Event Navigate with the NY keys to Time Unit and press OK Select Minutes and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Time Unit Navigate with the NY keys to Time enter 6 and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Time ee eae PP Navigate with the NY keys to Partitions and press OK Select partition 1 only and press OK 10 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Partitions Note Activation time of the external siren can be between 3 and 15 minutes The following example sets the event that switches on the output 2 on the IO module 4 as Follow X10 Commands The IO module behaves then like a standard X10 device The X10 unit code assigned to this output is 5 and the X10 house code is P 1 Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Outputs and press OK Scroll to O 4 Output 2 and press OK Select Event gt Follow X10 Commands and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Event Navigate with the NY keys to X10 Address gt Unit Code enter 5 and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Unit Code Navigate with the NY keys to X1
241. l the wireless keypads get active on Pulsing Buzzer i e they wake up from the sleep mode in order to emit it When this option is set to Disabled keypads do not wake up and sound is not emitted Please note that also other keypad settings can affect whether the acoustic signal is actually emitted or not for example Keypad Features gt Silent Keypad When this option is set to Enabled all the wireless keypads get active on Chime i e they wake up from the sleep mode in order to emit it When this option is set to Disabled keypads do not wake up and chime is not emitted Please note that also other keypad settings can affect whether the acoustic signal is actually emitted or not for example Keypad Features gt Silent Keypad A menu entry that groups X 10 configuration options for IO modules Selects the zone or user number necessary to trigger an output If this location is programmed as a zero 0 any zone or user will activate the output see also location 68 The zone user filter is active only for following events Burglary Alarm Fire Alarm 24h Alarm Zone Tamper it filters out zones for all these events and Code Entry it filters out users For all other events this setting is ignored NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 187 Programming locations for the RF receivers In the Table 23 you can find list of locations related to the output events Please note that descriptions for locations 70 71 and 72 gi
242. l wireless keypads section 1 Power up the panel It starts the learning mode automatically The panel stays in this mode for 2 minutes allowing you to program the first wireless keypad If the keypad does not communicate with the panel in this time window the learning mode is exited The learning mode can be restarted by switching panel power off and on again 2 Insert the batteries in the wireless keypad It starts the keypad initialization process Note If the keypad is not brand new i e it was already used with another system it must be re programmed flashed first to erase any previous keypad settings otherwise it will not initialize the learning mode see Chapter B11 Updating firmware on page 255 Select a language from the list with the NY keys and press OK 4 Select default settings from the Load Country Defaults list with the ANY keys and press OK 5 At the Partition Number prompt type the partition number and press OK 6 At the Keypad Number prompt type the keypad number and press OK 7 At the Sys D KID1 KID2 prompt 3 values need to be entered SysID this value represents the System ID or a 3 digit code which should be unique for this panel KIDI1 this value represents Keypad ID 1 and contains the first 3 digits of the code which should be unique for this wireless keypad KID2 this value represents Keypad ID 2 and contains the last 3 digits of the code which should be unique for this wirele
243. lary voltage threshold to 98 x 0 1 V with the NY keys and press OK The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Low Aux Voltage 6 Navigate with the NY keys to Sirens IO Features gt RF Siren IO 1 gt Antipassivation and press OK 7 Select Enabled and press OK 8 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Antipassivation Recommended settings depend on the type of application the IO module is used for and are as follows Application Low Battery Trip Antipassivation Outdoor Siren Operational battery Enabled Indoor Siren Operational battery Disabled Standalone IO module Operational battery Disabled Setting supervision windows There are three wireless supervision options Short Window Normal Window and Fire Window The PIR sensor and door window sensors follow the short and normal supervision windows If a PIR or door windows sensor does not report within the time specified in Short Window the system does not allow the user to arm the system If a PIR or door windows sensor does not report within the time specified in Normal Window an RF Sensor Lost condition is reported to the central station and a service message is displayed on the keypad 868 MHz transmitters typically report every 20 minutes Note Ifyou are installing a system in Holland or Belgium you must set the supervision values to 2 hours as long supervision window Set the short supervision window in Belgium and Holland to 2
244. lement you want to upgrade Control board GSM module Radio module or Keypad click the Browse button next to it and open the appropriate FDK file for this element on your computer If you like to verify if the new file contains a different firmware version than the one already programmed in the panel or the other module you want to update click Verify to compare the contents and to display a status message Click the Program button The upgrade operation starts and the status bar displays progress Also the keypad displays progress messages After all data is copied Flasher success message displays on the computer Repeat steps 8 to 10 for all the modules you want to upgrade Unplug the mini USB connector from the board If the NX 9104 VVMIQ module was disconnected in step 7 disconnect the power supply connect the VVMIQ ribbon cable and then reconnect power to the panel Close the housing Start installer mode and enable the previously disabled tamper switch using the menu select Enabled in step 3 IMPORTANT After the Radio Module is reflashed it must be defaulted or fully programmed with the NX 586E direct connect module with the previously stored sensor configuration NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 257 Section C References 258 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Appendix 1 Reporting codes in Contact ID or SIA Table 41 Event codes lists the event codes sent for different reports if enabl
245. lephone Line Cut when armed 2 On if siren sounds for Telephone Line Cut when disarmed 3 Onvifsiren blast at arming pulse 4 On if siren blast at exit expiration pulse 5 On if siren blast at closing kiss off pulse 6 On if siren sounds during a Cross Zone verification time 7 On if siren sounds for a zone or box tamper 8 On if siren blasts 1 time for keyswitch or wireless arming 2 times for disarming BELL output only on Networx V3 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Segment 5 Segment 6 Segment 7 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 109 On if siren driver should be a voltage output Off if on board siren driver is enabled On if sirens sound for expander trouble On for zones to restore immediately Off for zones to restore only when the siren is off or disarmed On if dynamic battery test is performed at arming Off if dynamic battery test is performed at disarming See location 40 On if battery missing test is performed every 12 seconds On if manual bell BELL output I O and relays test is performed during self test function On if manual communicator test is performed during self test function On if Box Tamper terminals on the control panel are enabled BELL output only on Networx V3 On if box tamper report is enabled On if AC fail reporting is enabled On if low battery reporting is enabled On if Aux power overcurrent report is enabled On if siren supervision report
246. link a wired application to your wireless security system using two open collector outputs and a supervised external power input NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 19 Keypads Wireless keypad The wireless LCD keypad allows you to program the NetworX V3 system using a menu structure There 1s also an option to use the wired keypad with the same functionality Figure 3 Keypad The LCD features the white backlight to allow keypad operation in the dark Illumination level is as low as possible to save energy LCD backlight turns ON gradually when the user hits the first key and turns OFF gradually 30 seconds after the last key operation The status light logo in the top left corner indicates the current partition status In the single partition mode logo is red when the partition is armed in any mode logo is green when the partition is disarmed In the master multi partition mode logo is red when any partition is armed in any mode logo is green when all the partitions are disarmed 20 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual The NetworX V3 keypad has the following key layout out of the box Figure 4 Default keypad layout F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 a RM Aar Ga I e fe fon e S ABC DEF GHI JKL 7 8 9 DEL to Pe om we ox W The four top row keys with the blank keycaps can be replaced by the installer as they are supplied with the keypad for this purpose Figure 3 s
247. ll MEP II initiated CSD GSM calls Segment 3 Circle Numbers To Program Segment 4 Circle Numbers To Program e Resened 6 reee SSC S 8 reserved 8 Up downloading using GSM CSD GSM GPRS if off 1 DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 1 2 BACKUP DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 1 226 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOC DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA 3 REPORT DELAY FOR REPORT CONTROLE segment 1 12345678 SOI Open ciose rezar segments 0 a IN segment 4 Za N Segment 5 Power Trouble AC Failure Low 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 aa Batt segmente sven Telephone fat Res TE test repors a segments program Download Glogful 12345678 SEINE tampers conesond bo rzssse7s segment10 storciu reses Segment 12545678 SEO sensor Low Batey 25456988 O Expander Trouble indi keypod 12345678 segment 14 12545678 STA Zone Activity Monitoring reresere segmente reserved reses DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 2 BACKUP DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 2 7 REPORT DELAY FOR REPORT CONTROLE TER Alors and Restores 00600000 Segment 2 Open close oooooooo segment 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 segmenta zone rose 00000000 Segment 5 Power Trouble AC Failure Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Batt segmente sien Telephone fat 00006600 Segment 7 test repors oooooooo segments program Download Glogful 00000000 STINE tampers G
248. ls are required to defeat the answering machine On the first call the phone rings once or twice The control panel detects the rings and starts a 45 second timer During this timer the control panel answers the next call on the first ring This is not recommended for commercial applications 2 4 2 6 Call PC on Autotest A menu option that allows the panel to use call back when the central station performs an autotest After the test report is delivered to the central station the panel calls the up download software using the call back phone number Actions such as upload event log and download phone numbers can be selected in the up download software 2 4 2 7 Require Code for Download A menu option that requires a user code to be entered before downloading can start 2 4 2 8 Lockout A menu entry that groups options that lock certain system functions System Shutdown A menu option that allows the up download software to shutdown the control panel This option can be set only from the up download software The shutdown LCD message is shown to explain the reason for the shutdown During shutdown the system is completely inactive It is not possible to arm disarm the system and no reports or sirens are activated Local Programming A Communications menu option that disables the installer menu This option can be set only through the up download software Comms Settings A menu option that prevents the installer changing the communicatio
249. matic bypass feature of interior zones 4 On enables the silent keypad panic feature overrides the audible panic selection 5 On enables the audible keypad panic feature 6 On enables the keypad Aux 1 feature FIRE 7 On enables the keypad Aux 2 feature MEDICAL 8 On enables the keypad multiple code attempt tamper feature keypad lockout Segment 2 1 On enables the LED extinguish feature 2 On enables the require code for bypassing feature 3 On enables the zone bypassed sounder alert feature 4 On enables the AC power low battery sounder alert feature 5 On enables bypass toggle 6 On enables silent auto arm 7 On enables the automatic instant feature of entry exit zones 8 On enables final set door Segment 3 1 On ge ON S On 4 On 5 On 6 On fa ON 8 On Segment 4 be On 2 On e On 4 On 5 On Networx Version 3 Installation Manual enables opening and closing reports enables zone bypass reporting enables zone restore reporting enables zone trouble reporting enables zone tamper reporting enables the cancel reporting enables the recent closing report enables the exit error report enables late to close early to open reporting enables auto arm in STAY mode enables instant NIGHT mode tamper when sensor lost if armed enables instant STAY mode toggle 6 On arming allowed with tamper memory communication failure expander trouble 7 On arming allowed with battery trouble
250. means a faulted zone see locations 110 169 24 HOUR MEDICAL AUDIBLE SUPERVISED Creates an instant audible alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel It will display on the keypad A medical report will be sent to the CMS LOCATION 25 ZONES 1 8 CONFIGURATION GROUP 8 segments numerical data Location 25 contains the configuration group zone type for zones 1 8 Segment 1 is for zone 1 and segment 8 is for zone 8 You will find the default configurations in the table above LOCATION 26 PARTITION SELECT ZONES 1 8 8 segments feature selection data Location 26 is used to select the partition s in which zones 1 8 reside A zone may reside in any combination of the 4 partitions If a burglary zone resides in more than 1 partition that zone will only be active when all the partitions in which it is resident in are armed A zone that resides in more than 1 partition will be reported to its lowest partition number Location 26 has 8 segments Segment 1 corresponds to zone 1 and segment 8 corresponds to zone 8 Segment 1 8 1 Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 4 Partition 4 LOCATION 27 ZONES 9 16 CONFIGURATION GROUP 8 segments numerical data Location 27 contains the configuration group zone type for zones 9 16 Segment 1 is for zone 9 and segment 8 is for zone 16 You will find the default configurations in the table above LOCATION 28 PARTITION SELECT ZONES 9 16 8 segments feature selec
251. mended to limit destinations for a single report control to the primary destination only For example for the Report Control 1 the Destination should be set as GPRS TCP IP 1 and Backup Destination as Disabled When the primary channel is GPRS TCP IP backup shouldn t be set as Other Dialer through NX10GSM as it can slow down the transmission The transmission path PSTN and GPRS can be tested after installation by using the function Manual Dialer Test in the user menu To make it working you need to enable it in the Installer menu Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Diagnostics gt Manual Dialer Test A guide to the identfication of simple common faults can be found in Chapter B6 Setting up the GSM GPRS module NX 7002 A PD iii 251 252 254 Audio reporting 200 AU 209 B Backup reporting 47 Battery replacement 137 Binary entri S nda 42 C Central station 63 Code QUIRES E E T 60 A A ITA 258 installer rientrino 60 aria E 60 Communications 1 000 rr 62 Communicator formats 263 Connection o eo ee eer eee 194 Comact ID atacan cogio 15 209 258 SA 203 Control panel communication 62 Control panel Illica 53 A eoomcoveaemcee ie 58 Control panel upload download ooccccccccncnnnnnnnns 64
252. ment immediately after the last digit of the account code If the account code is 6 digits long program all 6 segments If location 6 is left un programmed account code 1 will be used when phone N 3 is dialled LOCATION 14 COMMUNICATOR FORMAT FOR PHONE N 3 1 segment numerical data Location 14 contains the communicator format used to transmit to the receiver that is connected to phone N 3 Consult the instruction manual for your central station receiver in order to determine which format is compatible See Appendix 3 for all available format selections If you require a format other than those listed review the override options described in location 18 to create the appropriate format In order to create a special format a 15 must be programmed in location 14 in addition to the entries in location 18 If this location contains a 0 format 1 will be used when phone N 3 is dialled LOCATION 15 DIAL ATTEMPTS BACKUP CONTROL FOR PHONE N 3 2 segments numerical data Segment 1 dial attempts Segment 1 of location 15 1s used to enter the number of dial attempts 1 to 15 that the communicator will make to phone N 3 before it ends the notification process Factory default is 0 and the communicator will make the same number of attempts as those programmed in location 3 There will be a waiting time of 12 seconds between the first two dial attempts and a waiting time of 60 seconds between each subsequent dial attempt
253. mmunicator see Appendix 3 Communicator formats You can set a number of conditions that must be met before a communication session 1s established between the control panel and the central station To enable restore report options you must enable the advanced menu The following example configures the control panel to ring the central station three times before a fail to communicate condition occurs for the Phone Number 1 1 Ensure the advanced menu is enabled 63 64 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 2 Navigate with the AV keys to Control Panel gt Communications gt Central Station and press OK 3 Scroll to Phone numbers gt Phone Number 1 gt Dial Attempts and press OK 4 Select 3 and press OK 5 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Dial Attempts Defining communication with a mobile phone You can also treat a telephone for example your mobile phone as a central station This way you can send voice messages with the NX 535 voice module if installed when particular events happen or you can send a siren tone to your mobile phone in case of an alarm When you do not have a PSTN analog line installed you can easily program the panel to use a built in or external GSM dialer instead The following example configures the control panel to ring your phone using the built in GSM dialer and send a siren tone to your phone in case of an alarm 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Commun
254. n enables the Go To Program Code for partition 1 2 On enables the Go To Program Code for partition 2 3 On enables the Go To Program Code for partition 3 i On enables the Go To Program Code for partition 4 LOCATION 44 DURESS CODE 6 segments numerical data Location 43 contains the Duress code This Location contains either 4 or 6 digits If the 6 digit code option is enabled in location 41 THIS CODE MUST CONTAIN SIX 6 DIGITS If the 6 digit option is not enabled in location 41 the last 2 digits will be ignored If the duress code 1s programmed it will work for all partitions 112 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Programming the outputs LOCATION 45 AUXILIARY OUTPUT 1 2 PARTITION SELECTION 2 segments feature selection data Location 45 is used to select the partition s in which the events must occur before the output relay will activate Location 45 has 2 segments Segment 1 corresponds to output 1 and segment 2 corresponds to output 2 Segment 1 Segment 2 Auxiliary 1 Auxiliary 2 1 Partition 1 1 Partition 1 2 Partition 2 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 3 Partition 3 4 Partition 4 4 Partition 4 LOCATION 46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT 1 2 SPECIAL TIMING 2 segments feature selection data Location 46 contains special timing feature activation for the 2 auxiliary outputs relays Segment 1 corresponds to output 1 segment 2 corresponds to output 2 Segment 1 2
255. n different then Partition 1 2 Table 21 Select the relevant module bus ID and press OK In this case select RF Receiver 32 and press OK Scroll to Start Zone and press OK Enter the starting zone of the receiver In case of the RF Receiver 32 the NetworX V3 built in 868MHz Gen2 receiver this option is not visible In the NetworX V3 system you can set this value for additional RF receivers only For the RF receiver 32 the starting zone is always zone 1 Scroll to Learn RF Device and press OK To learn in more than one device scroll to Sequential Programming select Yes and press OK Scroll to Learn RF Zone and press OK Enter the zone number to start with In this case enter 9 to program the detectors in zones 9 and 10 and press OK Tamper the different detectors in sequence To do this you activate the sensor s tamper switch Table 21 Learning RF transmitters explains how to activate each type of sensor Learning RF transmitters Transmitter Action Door Window Activate the tamper switch by removing the cover Activate the tamper switch by removing the cover Activate the tamper switch by removing the back plate from the DUAL 174 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Transmitter Fire detector Two Button Panic Four Button Keyfob Action Press and hold the test button Note Some fire detectors require activating the tamper switch instead See the detector manual for exact instructions
256. n is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 133 CONFIGURATION GROUP 12 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 134 CONFIGURATION GROUP 13 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 134 contains the event code that 1s sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 135 CONFIGURATION GROUP 13 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 131 LOCATION 136 CONFIGURATION GROUP 14 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 136 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location 1s not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon form
257. n segment 1 of location 23 or when this system is armed in the Stay mode INSTANT ZONE WITH CHIME ENABLED A trip will create an alarm when the system is armed When the control panel is disarmed and the chime mode has been set this zone will act as a chime zone FOLLOWER ZONE WITH CHIME ACTIVATED This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delays are being timed It is delayed during entry and exit delay times This zone will not bypass automatically even if enabled in segment 1 of location 23 When the control panel is disarmed and the chime mode has been set this zone will act as a chime zone 24 HOUR AUDIBLE SUPERVISED LOCAL Creates an instant audible alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel It will display on the keypad This zone type will NOT be reported INSTANT ZONE FORCE ARMABLE This zone creates an instant alarm whenever the system is armed This zone is force armable see feature definitions pages 5 11 28 INSTANT ZONE ACTIVITY MONITOR ENABLED This zone creates an instant alarm whenever the system is armed It will send a report if the zone 106 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual MA activity time is reached without a change of state see location 40 segment 11 and locations 110 169 INSTANT ZONE WITH END OF LINE RESISTOR DEFEAT This zone creates an instant alarm whenever the system is armed When the loop is closed the zone is ready Opening of the loop
258. n settings telephone numbers account codes and so on This option must be set using the up download software A menu option that prevents the installer changing the following download settings Download Settings Answer Machine Defeat Callback Required Lockout gt System Shutdown Lockout gt Local Programming Lockout gt Comms Settings Lockout gt Download Settings Call PC on Autotest This option must be set through the up download software 2 4 3 Autotest A menu entry that groups options that configure the automatic test run by the system 2 4 3 1 Hours Days A menu option that specifies whether the autotest occurs after a specified number of days or hours The autotest can be suppressed if another report has been sent 2 4 3 2 Interval A menu option that sets the length of time between autotests The basic unit is set in the Hours Days option The Hour and Minute options set the time at which the test 82 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition i IE Time Since Test A menu option that sets the length of time since the last autotest It controls when the next autotest report is sent to the central station Reporting A menu entry that groups reporting options Partition Reports A menu option that specifies the events that are enabled for each partition Events specified in this option are related to all partitions in the system 2 4 4 1 1 Opening Closing A menu option that enables opening closings
259. nd a Ensure that the phone line is connected properly Fail to message to the central station but Use a test phone to check that the phone service Communicate failed is available Ensure that the central station phone number account and protocol options are correct Panel The control panel has had a total loss off Reset the system clock and date using the User Loss of Time power and the clock must be reset Menu gt Set Date Time menu option Message Panel Low Battery Panel Over Current Panel Line Fault Panel Mains Fault Panel Siren Fault Remote Fail to Communicate Remote Box Tamper Remote Low Battery Remote Over Current Remote Mains Fault Remote Siren Fault Remote Trouble Tamper Zone X Zone Problem Press OK Definition The standby battery for the control panel is low The control panel has detected an excessive amount of current being drawn from one of the outputs and has disabled the output as a means of protection The phone line connected to the control panel is not working properly The mains power supply to the control panel is missing The connection to the control panel s siren is broken A reporting module tried to send a message to the central station but failed There has been interference with the casing of an expansion module The standby battery in an expansion module is low The expansion module has detected an excessive amoun
260. ne Restore for a 4 2 and 3 1 format For a 4 2 format the digit programmed in this location will be sent as the tens digit of the restore event code The zone ID will always be reported as the ones digit of the zone number e g zone 12 2 zone 44 4 This location contains 4 segments Any segment left as 0 will follow the segment 1 selection Segment 1 Partition 1 Restore Code Segment 2 Partition 2 Restore Code Segment 3 Partition 3 Restore Code Segment 4 Partition 4 Restore Code LOCATION 57 BYPASS COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 57 contains the event code for a zone Bypass with a 4 2 and 3 1 format For a 4 2 format the digit programmed in this location will be sent as the tens digit of the bypass event code The zone ID will always be reported as the ones digit of the zone number e g zone 12 2 zone 44 4 This location contains 4 segments Any segment left as 0 will follow the segment 1 selection Segment 1 Partition 1 Bypass Code Segment 2 Partition 2 Bypass Code Segment 3 Partition 3 Bypass Code Segment 4 Partition 4 Bypass Code 116 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 58 TAMPER COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS 4 segments numerical data Location 58 contains the event code for a zone Tamper with a 4 2 and 3 1 format For a 4 2 format the digit programmed in this lo
261. ne No prompt displays Type the telephone ID 1 to 3 and press OK The Enter Phone No prompt displays Type the telephone number the way it should be dialled by the communicator including the all necessary prefixes and press OK Arms the system in Night mode Arming with the function key will report as User 98 Note This shortcut works only if the Quick Arm menu option was set For this mode to work correctly entry guard zones must be set It works differently in the master mode and in the single partition mode For more information on this button behavior see the Master Keypad and the Quick Arm menu option description in the glossary Pressing the Cancel button stops sending reports to the central station This function displays the Custom Message on the LCD screen Displaying is finished after OK or No key is pressed NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 157 Setting up the tamper switch The wireless keypad has a pry off switch The installer decides how the keypad behaves whenever removed from its wall mounting plate The option Always Tamper actually fixes the wireless keypad to the wall just like a wired one while disabling this option renders the keypad fully portable within the reach of the RF link An additional option Only Arm AWAY if On the Wall ensures that the keypad 1s always mounted onto 1ts bracket before arming in the Away mode Both these options together ensure that the keypad will stay on the wall as long as the s
262. nerated This can be from 0 to 255 seconds Line Fault Indication A Reporting setting that enables the display of GSM GPRS line faults Line Fault Reporting A Reporting setting that enables the reporting of GSM GPRS line faults 220 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Term Definition Line Fault RF Level An Options setting that configures the acceptable level of the RSSI signal If the signal falls below this level for the amount of time set in Line Fault Delay a line fault is generated This can be from 1 to 31 If set to O the setting is disabled Line Number A Reporting setting that configures the line number associated with the selected receiver account Logged into GSM An Options setting that indicates that the GSM module is logged into the GSM network Network M Manufacturer An Options setting that contains the GSM Engine Manufacturer Identification Max Joined SMSs A Reporting option that sets the maximum number of text messages that can be joined together and sent as a single SMS Max Report Attempts A Reporting setting that configures the number of attempts the NX 7002 makes to send a report This can be from 0 to 15 Max Reports in 24h A Reporting setting that configures the maximum number of reports that can be sent by the NX 7002 in 24 hours The NX 7002 stops reporting when the number of messages in a 24 hours exceeds this number This can be from 1 to 255 If set to 0 there is no limitation This applies to SMS and
263. ng modules For step by step instructions concerning the very first wireless keypad installation see the Wireless keypad learning in procedure section and for instructions about installing additional wireless keypads see the Learning in additional wireless keypads section To program the current keypad select Installer Menu gt This Keypad Figure 23 NX 1048 keypad menu 3 1 Keypad Number 3 2 Partition Nbr 3 3 Keypad Features 3 3 1 Case Tamper 3 3 2 Silent Keypad 3 3 3 Ding Dong Chime 3 3 4 5 sec silence 3 3 5 Armed Zone Info 3 3 6 Beep on Panics 3 3 7 Master keypad 3 3 8 Service Message 3 3 9 Custom Message 3 3 10 Custom Msg Lock 3 3 11 Clock 3 3 12 24 hour Clock 3 3 13 Battery Change Allowed 3 3 14 Advanced Options 3 3 14 1 Type OK for Menu 3 3 14 2 LED Extinguish 3 3 14 3 Hide PINs 3 3 14 4 Beep on RF loss 3 3 14 5 Always Master mode 3 3 14 6 User Phone Editing i NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 3 3 14 7 Buzzer On Exit 3 3 14 7 1 Exit Time 1 3 3 14 7 2 Exit Time 2 3 3 14 8 Light Control 3 3 14 8 1 Device 1 Devices 2 10 Same as above ai 3 3 14 9 Latch Faults Until Viewed 3 3 14 10 Display Contact Central Station 3 3 14 11 KP Shutdown shows Clock 3 3 14 12 KP Shutdown allows Disarm 3 3 14 13 Status LED 3 3 14 14 Status LED Always On 3 3 15 Pry Off Switch 3 3 15 1 Always Tamper 3 3 15 2 Only
264. ng that allows an upload download session between the NX 7002 and the PC to be initiated from a keypad SM PSU Trouble An Options setting that indicates that there is a problem with its 3 8 V Switched Mode Power Supply Unit SMS Short Message Service SMS is a service for sending short text messages to mobile phones SMS Reporting A Reporting menu entry that groups SMS reporting options SMS Service Centre An Options setting that configures the SMS service centre phone number Usually this number should Address SMCS be left blank as it is dialled automatically by the SIM card It should include the country code Software Revision An Options setting that displays the current software version of the GSM engine Speed An Options setting that configures the baud rate for CSD GSM download This setting must match the baud rate set on the PC modem Status Check An Options menu entry that groups status messages for GSM events See chapter 5 for more information on status messages Switch to EN A menu option that switches the NX 7002 module to the EN 50131 compatible settings For additional information about the EN 50131 norm see Appendix 7 System Control An Options menu entry that groups together HomeText system settings T Tamper Fault A Reporting menu entry that groups together the tamper and trouble events that are reported to the selected report control Tampers and A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report contr
265. nications A global standard for wireless communications It supports narrowband Time Division Multiple Access TDMA An Options menu entry that groups GSM connection options GSM Connection An Options menu entry that groups GSM connection settings GSM Engine Comms An Options setting that indicates that communication with the GSM module is established GSM Engine Info An Options menu entry that groups information returned from the on board GSM module on the GSM module GSM Operator An Options menu entry that groups information on the current GSM operator and allows a specific GSM operator to be manually selected H Hit 24H Report Limit An Options setting that indicates that the maximum number of reports allowed in 24 hours has been reached This applies to SMS and GPRS reports HomeText An Options menu entry that groups together HomeText information HomeText Control An Options setting that enables or disables HomeText IP Address A Reporting setting that configures the address of the selected TCP IP receiver An Up download setting that configures the address of the selected TCP IP receiver K Keypad for Zone Text An Options setting that selects the keypad from which zone and user names are obtained L Language A Reporting setting that sets the language used for SMS messages Line Fault Delay An Options setting that configures the length of time the RSSI signal must be below the Line Fault RF Level before a line fault is ge
266. nly the segment 1 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 63 KEYPAD AUXILIARY 1 COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 63 contains the tens and ones digits that will be sent for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if the keypad Auxiliary 1 FIRE is enabled in the partition feature selection Segment 1 contains the tens digit segment 2 contains the ones digit For a 3 1 format only the segment 1 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 64 KEYPAD AUXILIARY 2 COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 64 contains the tens and ones digits that will be sent for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if the keypad Auxiliary 2 MEDICAL is enabled in the partition feature selection Segment 1 contains the tens digit segment 2 contains the ones digit For a 3 1 format only the segment 1 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 65 KEYPAD PANIC COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 65 contains the tens and ones digits that will be sent for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if the keypad Panic is enabled in the partition feature selection Segment 1 contains the tens digit and segment 2 contains the ones digit For a 3 1 format only the segment 1 digit tens will be sent 118 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 66 KEYPAD MULTIPLE CODE ENTRY TAMPER COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 66 c
267. nrolled a beep sounds and the message disappears 4 When the modules have been enrolled the keypad returns to Enrol 5 Verify the enrolled modules Navigate with the NY keys to Maintenance Mode and press OK 6 Scroll to Log Review and press OK When the control panel enrols a module it adds an enrol event to the event log This event contains the module number Scroll through the event log to verify that each module has been enrolled Note The modules are enrolled each time you leave programming mode In this case the Enrolling message is displayed but no beep sounds Note Installer should enroll the system after adding or deleting NX devices Not doing this can cause unexpected messages or tamper alarms Defaulting the modules Each module can be defaulted It 1s recommended that you default each module before modifying its settings 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Reset Settings in the relevant module menu and press OK In this case select Control Panel gt Reset Settings to restore the default control panel settings 2 A confirmation message is displayed Press OK to accept the default settings 3 The keypad sounder beeps once to confirm the reset 236 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Glossary Location Term Definition 17 Enrol Modules A menu option that activates the process by which the control makes an internal list of all keypads and modules connected to the system A menu entry that groups enroll
268. ns equipment using radio frequency techniques Tested and certified by Telefication B V Assumption maximum 20 siren activations of 3 minutes per year Wireless I O module specifications Power supply specifications 160 UA at31V 25 General feature specifications 36 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Figure 13 Wireless outdoor siren Q CUT OFF 00 TIMER HOLD OFF PROGRAMMING 1 lt IBA ERA Ed Z 8 6 00 000000000 LL OL Siren PCB Tamper Speaker Tamper Beacon Open collector output 2 for beacon 3X lithium battery pack Open collector output 2 for beacon IO module power cable black Open collector output 1 for speaker IO module power cable blue QOO QOO Q o o 2 Open collector output 1 for speaker NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 37 7 IO module power cable red IO module PCB To allow the IO module to control the output on the outdoor siren you need to cut jumper 3 and then optionally 1 and or 2 Jumper 3 is a start up protection Jumpers and 2 are responsible for timer settings and you can cut one of them or both according to the table below The maximum siren activity time is limited both by hardware jumper setting and software RF Receiver 32 gt Outputs gt Siren IO gt Time time setting whichever is shorter For example even if the software setting for a siren is set at 255 minute
269. ntrol when the alarm has been restored after an alarm Alarms A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control when an alarm occurs All abort A Control Panel menu entry that cancels all pending reports if the system is disarmed during reporting Allow Calls From An Up download setting that answers calls from a known phone number only To enable this setting you must enable Remote Initiated and program the phone number of the PC in Up Download gt Phone Number Any Phone Access A Reporting menu entry that lists all the users with rights to send HomeText commands from the phone unknown to the system Note Sending a HomeText message from the unknown phone requires adding the phone number registered for the user and the user password at the beginning of the command They are used by the system to confirm the user s identity For example type 32444123456 440044 status to send a status command where 32444123456 is your telephone number registered in the system and 440044 is your password Application An Options menu entry that groups application related status messages Arm Disarm Alarm A Reporting menu entry that groups the events that are reported to the selected report control Auto U D at Test An Up download setting that configures the NX 7002 to automatically dial the PC to initiate an Time upload download session after an autotest You must program the autotest on the control panel Auto answer An Up download settin
270. numerical data Location 71 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if siren supervision reporting is enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit of the Bell Tamper Reporting Segment 2 contains the ones digit of the Bell Tamper Reporting Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the Bell Tamper Restore Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the Bell Tamper Restore For a 3 1 format only the segment resp segment 3 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 72 TELEPHONE LINE CUT RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODES SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 72 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Telephone Line Cut Restore Reporting is enabled Segment 1 and segment 2 are reserved Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the Telephone Line Cut Restore Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the Telephone Line Cut Restore For a 3 1 format only the segment 3 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 73 Reserved LOCATION 74 EXPANDER TROUBLE AND EXPANDER TROUBLE RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODES SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 74 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if Expander Trouble Reporting is enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit of the Expander Trouble Reporting Segment 2 contains the ones digit of the Expander Trouble Reporting Segmen
271. o use the TCP IP Up Download by default Up Download is set to CSD This will cause the 7002 to be connected to GPRS and reporting will be faster and cheaper Reporting summary The following table summarises the programming information required for different types of reporting Table 25 Reporting Summary Report type Information Menu Option required Contact ID over SMS Phone Number Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Phone number Account code Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Account Code Protocol Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Protocol gt Contact ID Destination Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Report n gt Destination gt SMS1 or SMS 2 SMS Service Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt GSM gt SMS Service Center Address Centre SIA over SMS Phone Number Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Phone number Account code Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Account Code Protocol Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt SMS Reporting gt Receiver n gt Protocol Select SIA Separate SIA Combined or SIA Partition Modified Destination Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Report n gt Destination gt SMS1 or SMS 2 204 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Report type XSIA over SMS XSIA over TCP IP reporting HomeText Report
272. odes sent for the keypad aux 1 fire event 2 4 4 3 3 3 Keypad Aux 2 Medical A menu entry that groups the report codes sent for the keypad aux 2 medical event 2 4 4 3 3 4 Keypad Panic A menu entry that groups the report codes sent for the keypad panic event 2 4 4 3 3 5 Keypad Tamper A menu entry that groups the report codes sent for the keypad tamper event Power A menu entry that groups report codes sent to the central station when power related events occur 2 4 4 3 4 1 Mains Failure A menu entry that groups the codes used to report a mains failure event 2 4 4 3 4 2 Low Battery A menu entry that groups report codes sent to the central station for a low battery event A restore report is sent to the central station when this condition is no longer active 2 4 4 3 4 3 Aux Overcurrent A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when an overcurrent event occurs Tamper Fault A menu entry that groups together the codes used to report tamper and fault events to the central station 2 4 4 3 5 1 Box Tamper A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when a box tamper event occurs 2 4 4 3 5 2 Siren Tamper A menu entry that groups report codes sent to the central station when a siren tamper has occurred 2 4 4 3 5 3 Zone Fault A menu entry that groups report codes that are sent to the central station when a zone fault condition occurs 2 4 4 3 5 4 Siren Tamper A menu entry that groups re
273. odule is logged into the GPRS network by selecting NX 7002 Module gt Options gt GSM gt Status Check gt GPRS Connected You can also check the NETW and GPRS LEDs on the NetworX V3 board Reporting LEDs The LEDs located on the NetworX V3 board indicate the current status of the GSM GPRS module e The flashing BUS LED indicates that the module is receiving messages over the bus rather than from the GSM GPRS network The NETW LED indicates that the GSM GPRS module is currently using the GSM network voice channel or CSD e The GSM COM LED indicates that the module is connected to the GSM network NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 195 The SIM ERR LED indicates that the SIM card is blocked and a PUK code is required to unblock it The GPRS LED indicates that the module is connected to the GPRS network This LED turns off when the module is no longer connected to the GPRS network for example when it uses the voice channel or CSD The REP LED indicates that TCP SMS reporting is taking place The PSU ERR LED indicates that there is a problem with the 3 8 V Switched Mode Power Supply Unit the modem power source is too low The GSM LED indicates that the module is using the CSD channel 196 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Programming the GSM GPRS module NX 7002 Figure 26 NX 7002 menu structure 15 1 Reporting 15 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 Report 1 Reports 2 6 Same as above 15 1 1
274. ogramming is done via the panel Protocol Select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt Communication gt Central Station gt Phone Numbers gt Phone Number n gt Protocol Note Use any of the panel protocols SIA ContactID Select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt Communication gt Phone Number gt Phone Number n gt Events gt Communications gt Test Reports Note Use GSM reporting as backup Using the GSM GPRS module This section provides information on using the GSM GPRS GPRS module Obtaining the GSM GPRS module status System status information is GSM GPRS specific 1 Enter programming mode 2 Navigate with the keys to NX 7002 Module gt Options gt Status Check and press OK 3 Scroll through the status messages to view the current status of the module Table 26 Status messages explains each status message Table 26 Status messages Message Description GSM Connection GSM Engine Comms The modem is responding to AT commands SF SIM PIN Accepted The SIM is valid and programmed correctly SS Logged into GSM Network The SIM has been enrolled on the GSM network SIM PUK Required The SIM PIN code is blocked Put the SIM into a mobile phone and enter the PUK code to unblock it 208 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Message Description Sending SMS The module is sending a report to the SMS destination Using GSM Audio The module is sending an audio report from the control to the audio destination Usin
275. ol Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition n gt Feature Select gt Arming gt Arm with Tamper Mem FTC Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Inputs gt Box Tamper Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition n gt Feature Select gt Bypass gt Code Required Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt EN Display Restrict Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt EN Mode Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition n gt Timers gt Entry Time 1 2 Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition n gt Timers gt Exit Time 1 Exit Time 2 Control Panel gt Inputs gt Zone Types gt Zone Type n gt Attributes gt Force Armable for all zone types Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Inputs gt Immediate Zone Restore Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt Log Protection Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition n gt Feature Select gt Arming gt Quick Arm Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition n gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt Tamper if Zone Lost Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt User Code Resets Tamper Memory Control Panel gt Inputs gt Swinger Shutdown Control Panel gt System Settings gt Timers gt Communications gt Phone Line Cut Delay Control Panel gt Communications gt Autotest gt Hours Days Control Panel gt Communications gt Autotest gt Interval
276. ol when a tamper occurs A report Restores is also sent when the tamper is no longer active TCP IP Alarm Port An Options setting that configures the number of the TCP IP port to which polling and alarms are reported The default is 9999 and under normal circumstances should not be changed TCP IP Reporting A Reporting menu entry that groups TCP IP reporting options 224 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Term Definition Test Reports A Reporting setting that sends a test report to the selected report control at pre programmed intervals The units can be set in days or hours Traceability A menu entry that groups additional information like serial number manufacture date and firmware revision Transparent mode An operating mode for CSD on a GSM network Data is transferred directly from one modem to another modem Type An Options setting that displays the type of GSM modem used by the NX 7002 U U D Authentication An Up Download setting that contains the length of time for which the system is disabled after the Disable Time maximum number of authentication attempts has been exceeded U D Call Back after An Up Download setting that starts an up download session after a voice call Voice Call U D Port An Options setting that indicates that configures the port for GPRS up download Up Download A menu entry that groups options used to control download sessions between the up download software and the control panel Upload The p
277. ollower turn on for burglary zones that are Instant during non entry times 5 Delay 1 zone follows timer 1 Entry and Exit times 6 Delay 2 zone follows timer 2 Entry and Exit times 7 Interior turn on if this zone should Automatically Bypass or Bypass for Stay Arming 8 Local only turn on if this zone should not be reported Remark for a maintained keyswitch ON OFF program both keyswitch and local Segment 2 1 On if configuration group will beep the keypad for alarm 2 On if configuration group will sound the yelping siren for alarm 3 On if configuration group will sound the steady siren for alarm 4 On if configuration group will chime 5 On if configuration group can be bypassed 6 On if configuration group is included in the group shunt 126 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 7 On if configuration group is force armable 8 On if configuration group is entry guard Segment 3 1 On enables Fast Loop Response 50mS Off 500mS 2 On enables Double End Of Line Tamper zone Mainly used for tamper on wireless zones 3 On enables Trouble Reporting zone Day zone and Fire zones 4 On if configuration group is a Cross Zone 5 On enables Dialer Delay zone See location 40 6 On if configuration group will use swinger shutdown See location 38 7 On enables Restore reporting 8 On enables Listen In See location 40 Segment 4 1 On enables zone activity monitor 2 On enables end of line r
278. omputer to the panel It also allows you to view the program log and event log To program the system using this software you must connect the control panel to the computer Note If you want to change the download access code you have to do it both in the panel through the menu Control Panel gt Communications gt Up Download gt DL Access Code and in the DL900 program Control Panel gt Advanced gt Download access gt Access code otherwise DL900 will use a default access code Connecting the panel to the computer Y ou can connect the control panel to the computer either directly via the RS232 serial port or remotely via a modem Connecting using a serial port Connecting via a serial port is useful if you are on site and want to connect directly to the alarm system The connection to the NetworX V3 panel is made through the RS232 port using the NX 586E module which provides a standard RS232 bi directional DB 9 connector The NX 586E can be used as a programming tool on any panel as it is connected to the data bus It stores control panel settings that can be up downloaded using the keypad or a computer For more information on reading data from the NX 586E see Chapter B9 NX 586E To use the DL900 software with a direct connection 1 Double click the icon for the software or click Start gt Programs gt Caddx gt DL900 The DL900 Download Software window and the Master access screen open Enter the operator name and password and click OK
279. one and is reported to its lowest partition number A common zone is armed only when all the partitions that it belongs to are armed It is disarmed the moment one of the partitions it belongs to is disarmed Selects the partition s that will trigger the output when the event occurs in these partition s Term 185 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Definition Receiver Features Reset Settings RF Keypads RF Receiver 32 RF Sensors RF Sirens lO RSSI RF Device Sequential Programming Short Window Sirens IO Features Smoke Start Zone Supervised Supervision Switch to EN System ID Tamper Threshold Time A menu entry that groups programmable options for RF receivers A menu option that defaults the selected receiver to factory defaults A menu entry that displays the RSSI value for the selected wireless keypad A menu entry that groups all options for the selected RF receiver The integrated Networx V3 RF receiver has ID 32 A menu entry that displays the RSSI value for the selected wireless zone A menu entry that displays the RSSI value for the selected wireless siren or lO module A menu entry that groups entries related to measuring RF signal strengths A menu option that allows a group of RF sensors to be enrolled in sequence Once the first sensor Start Learning sensor is configured the detectors are learned in in sequence The value of Start Learning is in
280. one characteristic that allows the user to bypass multiple zones with a single operation 2 1 3 1 3 8 Zone Activity Monitor A zone characteristic that sends a report to the central station when the zone does not change conditions within a specified time period 2 1 3 1 3 9 Access Control A zone characteristic that enables the zone to act as an access entry point door shunt Do not enable this setting unless the system is configured with a door control 2 1 3 1 3 10 Pulsed Keyswitch A zone characteristic that allows a zone input to be used with a momentary keyswitch Each activation of the keyswitch toggles the armed state of the control This NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 73 Location Definition option is visible only if the Keyswitch input type option is enabled 2 1 3 1 3 11 Req To Exit A zone characteristic that enables the zone to act as a request to exit input 2 1 3 1 3 12 A zone characteristic that enables the zone to act as a holdup zone The holdup zone can be activated by a switch a push button or a panic button on a keyfob assigned to the holdup zone type Holdup is a silent alarm with reported HA SIA code See Appendix 7 for more information A menu entry that groups sounder characteristics for a particular zone type These characteristics determine the sounds produced by the sirens and keypads when the selected zone is activated 2 1 3 1 4 1 Yelping Siren Burglary A menu option that
281. onesond bo 0000 0000 Segment 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SST sensortost 00000000 S SIERO sensor Low Batey 00000000 O Expander Trouble incl keypod 00000000 TI Foire To communicate 00000000 STE Zone Activity Monitoring 00000000 segment 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 3 10 BACKUP DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 3 Ti REPORT DELAY FOR REPORT CONTROLE EVENT SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 3 BY PARTITION segment 1 00000000 segment 2 00000000 segment os OCS 8 IO SME zone rose ao gt N NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 227 DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA Segment 5 Power Trouble AC Failure Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Batt SM Siren Telephone fat 60006000 segment 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SISSI program Download G log ful 00000000 SOS STEIN Torpers Gonesond bo 0000 0000 Segment 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SST sensortost 00000000 SSCS A sensor Low Batey 00000000 Segment 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 SSM Foire To communicate 00000000 SSS SAI Zone Activity Monitoring 00000000 SSS segment 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E IO CONTROL 4 14 BACKUP DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT MO ae CONTROL 4 15 ASS segment 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Segment 2 Open close a segments os 00000000 ___ segment 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Segment 5 Power Trouble AC Failure Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 _ Batt segmen
282. onnect icon Note Not all modems are supported For a list of compatible modems please contact GE Security Programming with upload download software Downloading allows you to read the existing programming data or the event log from the control panel Uploading allows you to send programming data that you have set up using the DL900 software from the computer to the control panel When you program the system using DL900 the keypad can be reset after the system is powered down This prevents text getting lost Before you download or upload information do the following 1 Ensure that the relevant control panel options are programmed correctly There are a minimum number of options that you must set before you can program the control panel using the up download software 2 Ensure that the up download access code is the same in both the up download software and the control panel See chapter A 1 Introducing the NetworX V3 system for the correct default code 3 If you are connecting remotely make sure that the modem settings are correct For more information about modem settings see the DL900 Online Help 4 Connect to the panel via the serial port or modem 5 Select Download gt Read all to download all the data from the control panel The computer downloads the data from the panel 252 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 6 Select Download gt Send all to upload all the data to the control panel The computer uploads the d
283. onnections Read these instructions and all ancillary documentation entirely before installing or operating this product Note A qualified installer complying with all applicable codes should perform whatever hardware installation is required Read Appendix 7 EN 50131 compliance on page 269 if you are installing a system that needs to be EN 50131 compliant Safety terms and symbols These terms may appear in this manual A CAUTION Cautions identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to the equipment or other property A WARNING Warnings identify conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage or serious personal injury References For more information refer to the following NetworX V3 Menu Structure This menu structure provides a map of the NetworX V3 menu options including those for all the additional modules NX Expander Installation Guide This manual contains detailed information about additional modules and their installation 10 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manua Section A Installing and programming a basic system NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Chapter A1 Introducing the Networx V3 system Networx V3 diagram Figure 1 Networx V3 board diagram COOL ABORFOLOLOLOLLLO LOL LOLLLLO Coe 1 12 15 O Transformer VVMIQ Connector Networx Bus internal SIM Card Holder Networx Bus internal Networx Bus internal see page 194
284. ontains the tens and ones digits that will be sent for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if the keypad Multiple Code Entry Tamper is enabled in the partition feature selection Segment 1 contains the tens digit and segment 2 contains the ones digit For a 3 1 format only the segment digit tens will be sent LOCATION 67 BOX TAMPER BOX TAMPER RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 67 contains the tens and ones digits that will be sent for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if the Box Tamper feature is enabled in location 37 Segment 1 contains the tens digit of the Box Tamper Segment 2 contains the ones digit of the Box Tamper Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the Box Tamper Restore Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the Box Tamper Restore For a 3 1 format only the segment resp segment 3 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 68 AC FAIL AC FAIL RESTORE COMMUNICATOR CODES SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 68 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if AC Fail Reporting is enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit of the AC Fail Reporting Segment 2 contains the ones digit of the AC Fail Reporting Segment 3 contains the tens digit of the AC Fail Restore Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the AC Fail Restore For a 3 1 format only the segment 1 resp segment 3 digit
285. opriate segment The system will always wait for a dial tone unless the first digit of the phone number is a 13 in this case it will only delay Tone DTMF dialling is default If you want pulse tone dialling program a 15 in the segment where pulse dialling should begin If the entire number should be pulse dialling program a 15 in the first segment Program an 11 fora and a 12 for a ff Note A zero is programmed as a 0 LOCATION 1 ACCOUNT CODE FOR PHONE N 1 6 segments numerical data Location 1 is used to program the account code that is sent when phone N 1 is dialled A zero in the account code is programmed as a 0 A 10 indicates the end of the account code so program a 10 in the segment immediately after the last digit of the account code If the account code is 6 digits long program all 6 segments NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 95 LOCATION 2 COMMUNICATOR FORMAT FOR PHONE N 1 1 segment numerical data Location 2 contains the communicator format used to transmit to the receiver that is connected to phone N 1 Consult the instructions for your central station receiver to determine which format 1s compatible See Appendix 3 for all available format selections If you require a format other than those listed review the override options described in location 18 in order to create the appropriate format In order to create a special format a 15
286. ording to pre configured settings and send them to specified destinations A Reporting menu entry that groups report control options Report Delay A Reporting setting that configures the delay in seconds before the NX 7002 module reports If any other events occur during this delay they are sent with the first event in one message This can be from 0 to 255 seconds This setting is valid only if using SMS reporting Report Format A Reporting setting that configures the communicator format used to report to the selected TCP IP receiver Consult the instructions for your central station receiver to determine which format is compatible Report Groups A Reporting option that sets which reports are sent to the phone number Report Timeout A Reporting setting that configures the maximum length of time for each attempt by the NX 7002 to report to each receiver If the report is not successful during this time the attempt is abandoned This can be from 0 to 255 seconds Report When A Reporting setting that enables primary reporting Report Always or secondary reporting Panel Dialer Problem for the selected report control See also Primary Reporting and Secondary Reporting Report XSIA A Reporting setting that enables XSIA reporting When this option is enabled reports are sent in XSIA format instead of SIA format In short it means that User Zone names will be added to the reports It does not affect reports in any other format Reporting A m
287. ort to the central station when downloading from the up download software to the control panel is complete Bypass on Force Arm A menu option that enables bypass reporting when a zone is force armed 84 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition First to Open Last to Close A menu option that sends a report to the central station stating when the system opened and closed This option can only be used in a multi partitioned system A report is sent stating the first partition opened A log is then kept recording when the other partitions opened and when they closed This information is sent in a second report when the last open partition closes Report Codes A menu option that groups codes that are sent to the central station when a particular event occurs Zone Types A menu entry that groups all reporting codes for the selected zone type 2 4 4 3 1 1 1 Event Code A menu option that sets the event code reported for the selected zone type 2 4 4 3 1 1 2 SIA Code A menu option that sets the SIA code reported for the selected zone type 2 4 4 5 1 1 3 CID Code A menu option that specifies the Contact ID code to be used when reporting the selected zone type Partition Reports A menu entry that groups all reporting for particular partitions 2 4 4 3 2 1 1 Restore A menu option that groups the report codes sent to the central station when the system Is restored 2 4 4 3 2 1 2 Bypass A menu option that groups the report
288. orting gt Report Attempts gt Max Reports in 24h NX 7002 Module gt Options gt HomeText gt System Control gt HomeText Control This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Battery Change Allowed This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Case Tamper This Keypad gt Function Keys gt F1 Function This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt Hide PINS This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt Beep on RF loss This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt KP Shutdown allows Disarm recommended This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt KP Shutdown shows Clock This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt Latch Faults Until Viewed This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Silent Keypad 272 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Status LED Yes KP Options gt Status LED This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced Status LED Always On Yes KP Options gt Status LED Always On This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Pry Off Tamper when removed from wall Yes KP Switch gt Always Tamper This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Advanced LED Extinguish Yes KP Options gt LED Extinguish RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Receiver Features gt Jam Jam Detection Yes RM Detection RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Inputs gt Sensor n gt Fire Fire Supervision No RM Supervision for each sensor RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Receiver Normal Window 1 hour RM Features gt Supervision gt Normal
289. otocol 15 1 4 HomeText 15 1 4 1 Site Address 15 1 4 2 Users 15 1 4 2 11 HomeText Usr 1 15 1 4 2 1 1 Users 2 16 15 1 4 2 1 2 Same as above 15 1 4 2 1 3 15 1 4 2 1 4 Phone Number Report Groups Language Max Joined SMSs I 15 1 4 3 Registered Phone Access 15 1 4 4 Any Phone Access 15 1 5 1 1 Partition 1 Partitions 2 4 Same as above Report Attempts 15 1 6 11 Max Report Attempts 15 1 6 2 FTC Report Attempts 15 1 4 2 1 5 15 1 6 3 Max Reports in 24h 15 1 6 4 Report Timeout 15 1 6 5 Control Panel Timeout 15 1 5 Account Codes 15 1 6 15 1 4 2 1 5 1 User Number 15 1 4 2 1 5 2 Password System Control 15 1 7 Backup Format 15 1 8 Report XSIA 15 1 9 Line Fault Indication 15 1 10 Line Fault Reporting 15 1 11 RSSI in Test Call 15 1 12 All Abort 15 2 Up Download 15 2 1 Connection Type 15 2 1 11 CSD 15 2 1 2 TCP IP 15 2 2 Phone Number 15 2 3 IP Address 15 2 4 Site Initiated 15 2 5 Remote Initiated 15 2 6 Allow Calls From 15 2 7 Auto answer 15 2 8 Callback Required 15 2 9 Auto U D at Test Time 15 2 10 Max U D Authentication Attempts 15 2 11 U D Authentication Disable Time 152 12 _U D Call Back after Voice Call 15 3 Options 15 3 1 GSM 15 3 1 1 SIM PIN Code 15 3 1 2 GSM Operator 15 3 1 2 1 Operator 15
290. ow correct state of the system Due to the large number of data being transmitted it is recommended that no other operations are performed during copying as it can affect operation of the system It applies in particular to the wireless keypads Configuring keypad text The keypad supports more than 10 different languages The installer can select up to 4 languages Language 1 to Language 4 for the end user keypad operation You can set several languages on the keypad The following example configures French as the second keypad language 1 2 Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad gt Set KP Language and press OK The current language is displayed as Language 1 162 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Scroll to Language 2 and press OK Use the NW keys to select Francais and press OK The keypad returns to Set KP Language eS S Repeat these steps to set other languages Setting installer messages Up to four messages can be displayed on the LCD when the keypad 1s idle or when it times out from a menu If you enable more than one message the messages are shown in a continuous cycle Installer custom message Date and time Service required message System ready not ready To enable the custom message 1 Navigate with the NY keys to This Keypad and press OK Ze Select Keypad Features gt Custom Message and press OK The current status of the installer message is displayed In this case it is disabl
291. p and periodically thereafter Dynamic Batt Test at Arming A menu option that enables a dynamic battery test at arming This is an automatic test carried out by the control panel at the moment of arming to ensure the battery is working properly The panel lowers the battery charging voltage in order to draw current from the battery If the system is not armed between 00 01 and 23 59 the test is performed at 00 00 Manual Siren Test A menu option that activates the siren test when the LCD amp Self Test command is selected from the user menu Manual Dialer Test A menu option that includes a dialer test in the user s manual test A manual test call is made to the central station and the corresponding signal is transmitted 2 6 2 3 A menu entry that groups options that configure the clock Use Int Crystal for Clock A menu option that provides an accurate clock in situations where different mains frequencies are used 50 Hz or 60 Hz are possible selections Lost Clock Indication A menu option that enables the service message Panel Loss of time Summer Winter Time A menu option that allows automatic switching of summer and winter time 2 6 2 4 1 Steady Siren Fire A menu option that sets the type of siren activated when a fire alarm occurs This can be either yelping or temporal A menu option that allows a user to reset the system after a tamper alarm If this option is disabled an installer must reset the system each time a
292. phone line faults etphonelinefouts The event log is full and the events must be reported to the up download software An event can also be sent to the central station Over current See Over current event message Restore PA Panic Alarm A personal attack alarm has been tripped Panic Keypad A panic alarm generated by pressing the function key on the keypad NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 241 Event message Explanation RF Low Battery See RF Low Battery event message Restore Siren Tamper See Siren Tamper event message Restore Zone Inactive See Zone Inactivity event message Restore Zone Inactivity A zone inactivity monitoring event Zone Lost An RF transmitter has lost the supervision with the wireless receiver This happens when the transmitter has not reported its supervision message to the RF receiver within the long supervision window See appendix 5 Zone Lost Restore See Zone Lost event message 242 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Note Soak test events are placed in the event log with an asterisk beside them They are not reported Glossary Location Definition Maintenance Mode A menu entry that groups options relating to issuing commands by the installer Zone Status A menu entry that indicates the zone status 18 2 Log Review A menu command that is used to view the event log The event log is a list of events that occur in the system regardless of t
293. played in Service Check gt Reset when Phone Line Cut Delay 0 Programming Mode Timeout A menu option that sets the length of time the control panel can be in programming mode This time can be between 1 and 255 minutes When set to 0 the programming mode times out after 15 minutes Auto Arm Warning Time A menu option that sets the length of the warning signal emited during auto arming This time can be between 1 and 255 minutes with 1 minute being a default value Auto Arm Retry Timer A menu option that sets the auto arm cycle timer This time can be between 1 and 255 minutes with 45 minutes as a default value Feature Select A menu entry that groups all optional features relating to control panel system settings Inputs A menu entry that groups options that enable features relating to inputs On board zones A menu option that disables the wired zones on the control panel This provides a completely wireless alarm system Box Tamper A menu option that enables the box tamper switch on the control panel The Networx V3 has an input for a normally closed tamper switch When opened a box tamper is reported as an event ExitError limited to EE1 A menu option that limits the Exit Error to Entry Exit Delay 1 Double Pulse A menu option that will allow two trips on the same cross zone to activate an alarm Force Default Zone Types A menu option that uses the default zone types in the country defaults for the selected country rather
294. port codes sent to the central station when a siren tamper has occurred 2 4 4 3 5 5 Phone Line Cut A menu entry that groups the report codes sent when a phone line is cut 2 4 4 3 5 6 Expander Fault A menu entry that groups report codes sent to the central station when an expander fault event occurs 2 4 4 3 5 7 Fail to Communicate A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when a fail to communicate event occurs Miscellaneous A menu entry that groups together the codes used to report selected other events to the central station 2 4 4 3 6 1 Log Full A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when the event log is full 2 4 4 3 6 2 Autotest A menu entry that groups the report codes sent to the central station when an autotest is performed 86 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition 2 4 4 3 6 3 Cancel A menu option that enables cancel reporting A cancel report is sent to the central station when the system is disarmed within the time specified by the dialer delay after an alarm 2 4 4 3 6 4 Recent Closing A menu option that sends a report to the central station if an alarm occurs within five minutes after the panel has been armed The user number that armed the system is also sent 2 4 4 3 6 5 Start End Programming A menu entry that groups the reporting codes sent to the central station when programming starts and when the
295. porting setting that reports a fail to communicate event to the selected report control FTC Report Attempts A Reporting setting that configures the number of attempts that can be made to a specific report destination before the Fail to Communicate condition is set This can be from 1 to 15 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 219 Term Definition Good RSSI An Options setting that indicates that the current RSSI level is equal to or greater than the minimum signal quality level configured in Line Fault RF Level If the RSSI level drops below this value a GSM line fault is indicated GPRS General Packet Radio Service A global standard for wireless communications It supports a range of bandwidths and can transmit and receive both small bursts and large amounts of data An Options menu entry that allows a GPRS connection for up download GPRS APN An Options setting that configures the GPRS access point name Contact the network provider to obtain this name This is a mandatory setting if using TCP IP reporting GPRS APN 2 An Options setting that configures a second GPRS access point name Contact the network provider to obtain this name This is used if the connection cannot be made via the GPRS APN GPRS Connected An Options setting that indicates that the module is logged into the GPRS network GPRS Disconnect This contains the length of time with no activity before the GPRS disconnects Delay GSM Global System for Mobile Commu
296. pply fails A delay time can be set for this report 2 4 4 2 2 2 A menu option that enables low battery reporting on the control panel Low Battery 2 4 4 2 2 3 Aux Overcurrent A menu option that enables overcurrent reporting A report is sent to the selected central station when too much current is drawn from a device powered by the system Communications A menu entry that groups together the communication events that are reported to the central station 2 4 4 2 3 1 Phone Line Cut A menu option that sends a report is sent to the central station the moment the phone line cut is restored 2 4 4 2 3 2 Fail to Communicate A menu option that sends a report to the central station when the system has failed to communicate with the central station after the number of attempts set in Dial Attempts The report is sent when communication with the central station has been restored 2 4 4 2 3 3 Autotest A menu option that enables reporting of autotest events to the central station at a specified interval 2 4 4 2 3 4 Autotest only when Armed A menu option that allows test calls to be made only when the system is armed 2 4 4 2 4 1 Log Full A menu option that sends a report to the central station when the event log Is full 2 4 4 2 4 2 Start End Programming A menu option that causes reports to be sent to a specified phone number A report is sent when local programming begins and ends 2 4 4 2 4 3 End Download A menu option that sends a rep
297. ption that shows or hides the custom message on the LCD keypad A menu option that makes the customized keypad message on the programmed keypad independent from other keypads in the system If disabled editing the custom message on any keypad affects all keypads in the system i e all keypads always display the same message A menu option that displays the clock on the keypad This is the internal real time clock used for the schedules and autotest intervals A menu option that switches between 24 hour and 12 hour notation A menu option that allows the user to replace keypad batteries See Battery replacement on page 157 for the battery replacement procedure description A menu entry that groups LCD display options for the keypad A menu option that enables the menu prompt Type OK for Menu 166 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Definition 33142 LED Extinguish A menu option that enables or disables LED Extinguish function for an individual keypad Both options the one for a partition an the one for a keypad must be enabled for this feature to work It turns off all status icons on the keypad except for the Power icon after 20 seconds without a key press All icons are displayed again when any key is pressed 3 3 14 3 A menu option that displays the user code as dashes when programming codes using the keypad If this option is disabled each digit is shown rather than displayed as a dash
298. r A menu option that enables the box tamper switch on the control panel The control panel has an input for a normally closed tamper switch When opened a box tamper is reported as an event 2 4 4 2 1 2 Expander Trouble A menu option that sends a report to the central station when an expander fault condition occurs 2 4 4 2 1 3 Siren Supervision A menu option that monitors the siren to detect cut wires If the wires are cut the control panel sends a report to the central station NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 83 Location Term Definition 2 4 4 2 1 4 RF Sensor Lost A menu option that sends a report to the central station when an RF sensor is missing RF sensors send out supervision signals every 15 or 64 minutes depending on the frequency An RF receiver must receive these signals within a specified time window This window is set by the Supervision timer If the RF receiver does not receive these signals during the time window the RF sensor is considered missing 2 4 4 2 1 5 A menu option that sends a report to the central station when a low battery condition occurs in an RF sensor RF Low Battery 2 4 4 2 1 6 CleanMe A menu option that sends a report to the central station when a smoke detector Is dirty A menu entry that groups the power events that are reported to the central station 2 4 4 2 2 1 Mains Failure A menu option that sends a report to the central station when the mains power su
299. r Follower with Group Bypass Enabled zone type It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Group Bypass menu option To cancel Group Bypass function press the button again To partially arm the system with the selected zones bypassed enter the user code Disarming the system clears the bypassed zone set Allows to turn on or off the X 10 devices connected to the system It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Light Control menu option Displays the alarm memory list It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Alarm Memory menu option The way the list of alarms is displayed depends also on a setting of the First Alarm Logic menu option see First Alarm Logic Performs the service check It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Service Check menu option Resets all the detectors It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Detector Reset menu option Answers an upload download call It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Download gt Answer U D Call menu option Starts an upload download call It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Download gt Begin U D Call menu option Prevents the exit time buzzer activating when the system is armed or during the re exit time It is a shortcut for the User Menu gt Silent Exit menu option This function also doubles the exit delay for example if exit delay is set to 30 seconds it changes to 60 seconds Toggles the Chime mode off and on there is a chime icon displayed to indicate the mode selected for the Chime type zones A
300. r formats lists the selectable communication formats Table 47 Communicator formats FORMAT DESCRIPTION Loca reseed OO S Resev 2 Resev OOS SIA level 1 supporting level FSK format 2 partition modifier and level 3 listen in block Resev OOO OO O S Radionics extended fast with Extended event code 1800 Hz transmit 2300 Hz parity handshake single round w parity 40 PPS extended hex capability Ademco Silent Knight Slow 1900 Hz transmit 1400 Hz handshake 10 PPS double round parity Silent Knight 4 2 fast Two digit event code 1900 Hz transmit 1400 Hz handshake 20 PPS double round parity Sescoa Franklin Fast 1800 Hz transmit 2300 Hz handshake 20 PPS hex double round SIA level 1 supporting level 3 FSK format Er Custom format See location 18 for the control panel or Control enna Panel gt Communications gt Custom Format menu options XSIA level 1 supporting level FSK format 3 listen in block XSIA level 1 supporting level FSK format 2 partition modifier and level 3 listen in block Notes The siren tone format format 5 can be kissed off by pressing the key on the telephone set persistent tone of 250 ms is required If you want to trigger a kiss off signal via a GSM you have to take into account that this function is network provider dependent Entering a valid user code on a keypad will stop the dialer when using the siren or vocal format If you require a format other than those listed
301. ram the first report destination and ensure the NX 7002 report format is the same as that used by the NX 590 GSM GPRS module as backup audio reporting Control panel The control panel can send reports using GSM audio instead of PSTN Alternatively it can be configured to use both GSM audio and PSTN Configure reporting on the control panel Select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt System Settings gt Feature Select gt Miscellaneous gt Use GSM If Line Trouble NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 201 Note You can also program this by entering G at the start of the phone number to use the GSM instead of the PSTN Press 0 to enter G on the keypad If you are programming the system using the DL900 software enter A at the start of the telephone number Control panel GSM GPRS module as backup for the GSM GPRS module Backup reports are sent when the GSM GPRS module fails to send primary reports Backup reports can be sent by another report control on the module or by another device on the system Other report control of the GSM GPRS module as backup o Set a report control to Report When gt Report Always Program the first and backup report destinations to one of the TCP IP or SMS destinations or set another report control as the report control backup destination Control panel as backup When the GSM GPRS module fails to report it sends an expansion event which the control panel or auxiliary dialer repor
302. rd zones differs for particular panel models Refer to Networx V3 technical specifications on page 13 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 13 NetworX V3 technical specifications Table 1 Available Networx V3 panel models NX 5 0 NX 7 6 NX 9 NX 11 8 NX 10 2 Table 2 NetworX V3 technical specifications Mains power specifications NX xx GSM EUR NX xx GSM LB EUR Mains input voltage 230 VAC 10 15 50Hz 230 VAC 10 15 50Hz 10 10 25 VA 40 VA Current consumption at 230 VAC 120 mA typical 300MA max 200 mA typical 500mA max Main board supply voltage AC CON8 16 5 VAC typical Power supply specifications NX xx GSM EUR NX xx GSM LB EUR Power supply type Type A EN 50131 6 Power supply voltage 5 Min 9 5 V 2 Typ 13 8 V 2 Max 14 4 2 Power supply current 0 9 A max at 13 8 V 2 1 8 A max at 13 8 V 2 Main board consumption Non GSM variant 145 mA 10 at 13 8 V 2 GSM variant 180 MA 10 at 13 8 V 2 Maximum system current available 1 GSM variant 700 MA max at 13 8 V 2 1600 mA max at 13 8 V 2 Auxiliary power output AUX PWR See Table 2 See Table 3 POS 2 Battery type Lead acid rechargeable Lead acid rechargeable 7 2 Ah 12 V nom BS127N 7 2 Ah 12 V nom BS127N or 12 Ah 12 V nom BS130N Maximum voltage at power supply 14 4 V auxiliary power output and battery power output Battery low condition 11 6 V Deep discharge protection 7 9 7
303. recognized received SMS messages to the Administrator Phone On Initiate an up download session via call back when audio call is detected On Enable XSIA reporting for SIA overall media types 7 On TCP IP polling time in hours Off TCP IP polling time in minutes Reserved Segment 3 1 On Disable GSM GPRS Line Fault indication on keypad NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 231 DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA On Disable GSM GPRS Line Fault reporting On Send RSSI combined with test call Reserved Segment 4 8 Reserved LOC Reserved Segment1 Number of bad attempts for per phone disable of HomeText control Segment2 LCD keypad address for zone text Pa to E 2 Segment3 Reserved Time for RSSI Line Fault Restore Reserved 216 Current software version read only xxx 225 HomeTextSite characters Lio oooooooo 226 HomeText Ste choracters1732 oooooooo lt 227 HomeText User Numbers O STEM User Number for Phone E SSIS User Number for Phone Number ZO SISTER User Number for Phone Numbers O SISI User Number for Phone Number OO SSI User Number for Phone Number SGI User Number or Phone numbers O EUA User Number for Phone Number __ SISI User number for hoeners o OOS S A User Number for Phone Number OOS S SMSC User Number for Phone numerio 0 STRSTR User Number for Phone Number dd OO SESSO User Number for Phone numb
304. reporting using TCP IP over GPRS XSIA reporting using TCP IP over GPRS Contact ID reporting using TCP IP over GPRS Contact ID or SIA reporting formats over SMS o HomeText plain language SMS reporting SIA reporting with optional partition modifiers using SMS messages o XSIA reporting using SMS text messages e Control panel can use GSM in addition to PSTN reporting all panel protocols using GSM Wireless upload download using GSM CSD connection Wireless upload download using a GPRS connection Upload download may be initiated remotely or locally Optional automatic download sessions These normally follow test calls Test call reporting can be switched off so that there is automatic download calls without test report calls o Provides backup for the panel and external dialers Enrolling the GSM GPRS module When you select the enrol modules process the GSM GPRS module is enrolled on both the control panel and the keypad The keypad must enrol the module in order to display the relevant menu 192 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual options To verify enrolling check that the event log contains an enrol event for the GSM GPRS module 1 i Note Press OK at the system prompt and enter your installer code Navigate with the NY keys to Enrol Modules gt Enrol and press OK The keypad starts enrolling the modules The Enrolling Modules message is displayed while enrolment is taking place
305. res 5 and 6 To install the panel 1 Unscrew the holding screw in the polycarbonate housing 3 Open the box 3 Lift off the lid of the box If you are using an additional module 4 Connect the NetworX bus cables to the module 5 Connect the NetworX bus cables from the additional module to the panel Use one of the internal bus connectors for this purpose see Figure 1 position 2 3 and 22 6 Clip in the TCP IP module inside the housing cover 7 Connect the Ethernet cable to the TCP IP module see instructions in the NX 590E module manual 8 Connect the battery leads to the battery and power up the panel NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 29 Figure 7 Connecting the battery to the panel 9 Close the housing Installing the keypad Mounting the wireless keypad Depending on the configuration the wireless keypad can be mounted on the wall in a cradle or used as a portable device To install a wireless keypad Figure 8 Mounting the wireless keypad ST TT FT POT OO PE net per EEEN 6 7 s 9 0 ok liv 1 Ensure that the keypad is mounted on a flat solid vertical surface so that the base will not flex or warp when the mounting screws bolts are tightened 30 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Ze Mount the keypad cradle on the wall using the mounting holes 3 Place the keypad in the cradle inserting the bottom edge first and carefully push the
306. reset x If enabled for use without a code i e if the 2 4 2 7 Require Code for Download menu option is set to No Initiate an up download call Perform a configured test Perform a service check Perform a walktest Program voice phone numbers Reset fire detector Set system date and time Set user authority level n Switch between master mode and single partition mode View the alarm memory View the event log If the 3 1 6 User Phone Editing menu option is set to Enabled Only own code Duress Code and GuardCodes 16 17 268 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Appendix 6 Word library Table 50 Word library NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 269 Appendix 7 EN 50131 compliance This chapter describes guidelines actions default values and settings required for the NetworX V3 alarm system to reach compliance with the EN 50131 standard EN 50131 is the European norm that defines how intruder alarm systems should operate Setting the EN mode When setting up a new EN 5013 1 compliant system you should perform the following actions 1 Learn in all wired and wireless keypads 2 Enter the installer mode 3 Execute RF Receivers gt Switch to EN 4 Execute Control Panel gt Reset Settings gt Switch to EN 5 Execute This Keypad gt Switch to EN 6 Execute Other Keypads gt Switch to EN for all other keypads T Execute NX 7002 Module gt Swit
307. ring that the calling party has disconnected and then call back The system will always wait for a dial tone unless the first digit of the phone number is a 13 in this case it will only delay Tone DTMF dialling is default If you want pulse tone dialling program a 15 in the segment where pulse dialling should begin If the entire number should be pulse dialling program a 15 in the first segment Four second delays can be obtained anywhere in the sequence by programming a 13 in the appropriate delay location Note A zero is programmed as a 0 Warning You should always check that the callback phone number is accurate before disconnecting Feature and report selections for partition 1 LOCATION 23 PARTITION 1 FEATURE AND REPORT SELECTIONS 5 segments feature selection data Location 23 is used to enable certain features that the user can access or see from the keypad of the system In addition certain communicator reports are enabled in location 23 Each of these features can be enabled by partition For additional partition information see locations 88 109 If the feature selection location for any partition is left blank that partition will use this location for the feature selection This location contains 5 segments of 8 features each see the feature definitions Segment 1 1 On enables the quick arm feature for exit and stay mode 2 On enables the re exit feature 3 On enables the auto
308. rm callback download function and the answer incoming call for download function 3 On enables Auto Cancel Abort 4 Reserved 5 On keypad shutdown mode 6 On user authorization to enter program mode 7 On codes 16 and 17 are guard codes 8 Reserved LOCATION 42 INSTALLER CODE 6 segments numerical data Location 42 contains the installer code Go To Program code This location contains a code with either 4 or 6 digits If the 6 digit code option is enabled in Location 41 THIS CODE MUST CONTAIN SIX 6 DIGITS If this option is not enabled in location 41 the last 2 segments digits will be ignored With the NetworX system disarmed the installer code can be used to enter the program mode LOCATION 43 GO TO PROGRAM CODE PARTITION AND AUTHORIZATION 2 segments feature selection data The Go To Program Code can be used as a standard arm disarm code When using the code to arm or disarm the user ID 1s 255 It is not possible to change this code in the run mode Segment 1 1 Reserved 2 On enables Go To Program Code as an arm only code j On enables Go To Program Code as an arm only after closing 4 On enables Go To Program Code as a master arm disarm code can change user codes SE On enables Go To Program Code as an arm disarm code On enables Go To Program Code to bypass zones Ts On enables Go To Program Code opening and closing reports 8 Reserved Segment 2 Ls O
309. rm when pressed 1 Ensure the advanced menu is enabled 2 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Partition Settings gt Partition 1 gt Feature Select gt Arming and press OK Scroll to Silent Auto Arm gt Yes and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Silent Auto Arm Navigate with the NY keys to Keypads gt Silent PA gt Yes and press OK 2 A 2 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Silent PA Note When the Silent Auto Arm option is enabled the partitions are armed automatically according to the schedule set with Control Panel gt Arm Schedule gt Auto Arm menu at a preset time without the keypad buzzer sounding 68 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Configuring the system Figure 21 System settings menu Timers 2 6 1 1 1 Fire Verification Time 2 6 1 1 2 Zone Act Unit 2 6 1 1 3 Zone Activity Monitor 2 6 1 1 4 Cross Zone Timer 2 6 1 2 6 1 1 Zones 2 6 1 2 Power 2 6 1 2 1 2 6 1 2 2 2 6 1 2 3 AC Failure Rprt Delay Power Up Delay 2 6 1 3 Sounders 2 6 1 3 1 Siren Timeout 2 6 1 3 2 Chime Time Communications Dynamic Batt Test 2 6 1 4 2 6 1 4 1 Dialer Delay 2 6 1 4 2 Listen in Time 2 6 1 4 3 Phone Line Cut Delay 2 6 1 5 Miscellaneous 2 6 1 5 1 Programming Mode Timeout 2 6 1 5 2 Auto Arm Warning Time 2 6 1 5 3 Auto Arm Retry Timer 2 6 2 Feature Select
310. rocess of retrieving information from a PC running the upload download software Use V1 110 An Options setting that enables V 110 for site initiated CSD GSM calls Enable this setting if the PC is on an ISDN line and is using an ISDN modem User ID An Options setting that configures the user ID for a PAP login Contact the network provider to confirm if a PAP login is required and to obtain the user ID and password Using GSM Audio An Options setting that indicates that the module is using GSM audio The GSM audio channel is used when the panel reports through the voice channel of the GSM network Using GSM CSD An Options setting that indicates that the module is using GSM CSD See also CSD V Version A menu option that displays the current software version of the GPRS module X XSIA Extended Securities Industry Association reporting protocol This adds a zone or user name when appropriate to the report Z Zone Bypass and A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control when a zone is bypassed A Restores report is also sent when the zone is restored un bypassed Zone Inactivity A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control when a zone inactivity event Monitor OCCUTS Zone Trouble and A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control when a zone trouble condition Restores occurs A report is also sent when the trouble condition is no longer active NetworX Version 3
311. rol Panel to Enable then he must restart power supply for the control panel After restarting this function will be enabled When the user wants to disable this option he must set it to Disable and restart the power supply The system then waits for a valid user code The LED Extinguish option gets disabled after the user enters the user code for example arm the system accept an alarm enter the user menu etc Bypass To temporarily remove a zone from operation when arming the system A menu entry that groups bypass options 2 5 1 2 3 1 Auto Bypass A menu option that automatically bypasses interior follower zones if no exit is detected during the exit delay time The exit is detected by the opening and closing of an entry exit zone 2 5 1 2 3 2 Code Required A menu option that specifies whether a user code is required for bypassing zones 2 5 1 2 3 3 Sounder Alert A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer when a user arms the system with one or more zones bypassed 2 5 1 2 3 4 Bypass Toggle A menu option that allows an interior zone be bypassed or included while the system is armed 2 5 1 2 3 5 No Forced Bypass A menu option that disables auto bypassing of force armable zones Auto bypassing is enabled when this option is set to No 2 5 1 2 4 1 Mains Batt Sounder Alert A menu option that causes the keypad sounder to beep upon arming or disarming if the mains power is missing or a low battery is detected 90 NetworX
312. rough the events in the log 238 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Table 36 Event description Event description Explanation Event log events Table 37 Event list Event message Explanation 10 unsuccessful This is a security feature This event occurs if someone tries to hack into the system download attempts Bus Fault Panel detects when bus is shorted to ground forced to High level or there is a problem with receiving valid bytes About 8 seconds after this problem is detected this event will be logged and the external bus will get disconnected for about 5 minutes If this situation does not disappear after 5 minutes then the external bus will be disabled for another 5 minutes Entering installer code will log Bus Fault Restore event and enable the bus again Bus Fault Restore See Bus Fault event message NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Event message Explanation Bypass A zone is bypassed Bypass Restore See Bypass event message Cancel The report to the central station has been cancelled This occurs when a user enters a code after an alarm Code Entry The lock of the access reader has been triggered The lock can be triggered by an accepted proximity card or by an Egress switch An Egress switch is a button that can be pressed by a user to open the lock of the door It can also be called Request to Exit RTE When the Code Entry option is activated the reader sends a log message
313. rvals to ensure communication between the control panel and central station or the control panel and up download software is functioning correctly The following example sets the system autotest to run every Friday at 12 45 assuming that today is Wednesday 1 Navigate with the AY keys to Control Panel gt Communications gt Autotest gt Hours Days gt Days and press OK Scroll to Interval gt 7 days and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Hours Days Scroll to Hour gt 12 and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Hour Scroll to Minutes gt 45 and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Minutes Scroll to Time Since Test gt 5 Days and press OK lt lt RI eS UL The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Time Since Test Enabling reporting You must enable event reporting in the control panel and program the events and zone types for which reports are sent You must specify the format of the report and in the case of voice reports you must map each event to a recorded message You can map one message to a number of events The following example enables voice reporting to phone number 2 for a phone line cut event and assigns a voice message to this event 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Communications gt Central Station and press OK 2 Scroll to Phone Numbers gt Phone Number 2 gt Protocol gt Vocal and press OK
314. s User code Installer code Download access code 1234 9713 84800000 40 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Note Press NO key to clear any incorrectly entered user code or other information Powering up the system When the NetworX V3 1s powered up for the first time the keypad language keypad defaults partition and keypad number must be set These options must also be set each time a keypad is defaulted 5 The Set KP Language option sets the first language of the keypad 6 The Load Country Defaults option sets the country specific keypad defaults It does not default the keypad 7 The Partition Number and Keypad Number options set the keypad address Use the navigation keys to scroll between the different options and press OK to select an option See Navigating the menus for more information Prior to installing a wireless keypad into the system the keypad should first be learned in by the panel in order to guarantee mutual recognition See the Wireless keypad learning in procedure section for step by step instructions Entering programming mode Y our installer code allows you to program the system through the installer menu There are two levels in the installer menu The light menu contains the most important options and the advanced menu contains additional options The system cannot be armed while in programming mode on the current keypad or another keypad 1 Press OK at the system prompt and en
315. s CSS 8 IO Segment 4 00000000 Segment 5 Power Trouble AC Failure Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A Batt Segment 6 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 Segment eros 00000000 A program Download BLog Ful 0 0 0 0 0000 Segment 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 O O O O Segment eono 00000000 E eons 00000000 Segment 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 OO O O O U EIA Expander Trouble incl keypad 00 00 0000 LE Faire To communicate 00 00 0000 Segment 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Segment 16 eea fo PRIMARY REPORTING FLAGS FOR REPORT CONTROL 1 TO 6 Segment 1 Circle Numbers To Program 76 on Report Contro 6s Primary Reporting Flag Off Report Control is Backup for control panel r esenea O Ea 21 22 23 25 Reserved 26 31 32 PPP dial up account user ID chors 1 16 33 PPP dial up account user ID chors 17 32 34 PPPIdiol up account password ______ ________ 35 59 RESERVED Name of GPRS access point APN chars 1 16 AAA O 32 AR gt gt I 48 AR I I 64 64 100 RESERVED N 61 62 5 6 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 229 LOC DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA NX 7002 assigned IP address DHCP IP address for TCP IP receiver 1 IP address for TCP IP receiver 2 109 118 19 RESERVED 109 IP address for download computer RESERVED Receiver alarm and poll port 120 Recewerdownoadpon asss O 139 TcBMP 1 Accountnumber oooooooo
316. s and the jumper J1 is cut the siren will sound for 5 minutes only i e according to the hardware limit When the same jumper is cut and the time value for the Siren IO module is set to 1 minute the siren will stop after 1 minute Timer programming OA OS TX 7201 05 1 Wireless outdoor siren specifications Power supply specifications General feature specifications Environmental 25 C to 50 C max 95 non condensing CE Certification EN 50131 1 System requirements EN 50131 4 Warning devices EN 50131 5 3 Requirements for interconnections equipment using radio frequency techniques Tested and certified by Telefication B V Assumption maximum 20 siren activations of 3 minutes and beacon activations of 15 minutes per year 38 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Installing the wireless sensors Mounting the sensors 1 Select the appropriate location to place the sensor For recommendations and rules regarding a correct placement of the particular sensor motion sensor door window smoke etc see the sensor manual enclosed with the device you want to install 2 Fasten the sensor base to the wall 3 Place the sensor battery in the battery holder 4 Re install the sensor board and the cover plate Sensor learning in procedure In order to guarantee mutual recognition each installed sensor must be learned in by the control panel This procedure usually requires starting the learn in mode in th
317. s like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 155 CONFIGURATION GROUP 23 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 156 CONFIGURATION GROUP 24 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 156 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 135 LOCATION 157 CONFIGURATION GROUP 24 CHARACTERISTIC SELECT 5 segments feature selection data Use the Configuration Group Characteristic Selections described in Location 111 LOCATION 158 CONFIGURATION GROUP 25 ALARM EVENT CODE 1 segment numerical data Location 158 contains the event code that is sent for a Contact ID or SIA report The desired event code should be chosen from the Table 38 or Table 39 in Appendix 1 The zone ID will be the zone that is in alarm This location is not used for slow speed formats like 4 2 and 3 1 This location may also contain the alarm report code for the Robofon format value 00 99 LOCATION 159
318. s a zero the output will follow the particular event NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 189 LOCATION 71 PROGRAMMING SPECIAL FUNCTIONS AND PARTITIONS FOR OUTPUT 1 2 segments feature selection data Segment 1 selects the following special conditions Option Function 1 If output should time in minutes OFF Output is timed Segment 2 selects the following partitions Option Function LOCATION 72 PROGRAMMING THE X 10 LOCATION FOR OUTPUT 1 2 segments numerical data Segment 1 Unit code Program a number from 0 15 to represent the corresponding X 10 unit code from the following table voue IRE MEA INCA IC AA E CO EC AE E E CO ME NE E A O CA CA EC wf uf EC wl ul os Segment 2 House code Program a number from 0 15 to represent the corresponding house code from the following table oa ae e 12m 190 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATIONS 150 159 AUTHORIZING USERS 1 99 TO TRIGGER OUTPUTS 1 8 10 segments feature selection data When activating outputs with a user code event 45 locations 150 159 can be used to restrict certain codes from activating certain outputs Each location contains 10 segments Segment corresponds to user 1 segment 10 corresponds to user 10 The LED s correspond to outputs 8 Location Segments Type Function r AUTHORIZING USERS 1 10 TO TRIGGER OUTPUTS 1 8 option Segment 1 user 1 segment 2 user 2 segment 10 user 10
319. s swinger count to 5 This means that any zone for which swinger shutdown is enabled can be activated five times within one arm period before it is automatically bypassed Bypassing a swinger zone also resets the counter for that zone to zero L i a Ensure the advanced menu is enabled Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Inputs gt Swinger Count and press OK Enter 5 and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Swinger Count 58 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Programming outputs Figure 16 Outputs menu 2 2 1 Prog Outputs Outputs 2 4 Same as above 2 2 1 1 1 lt Any Siren gt 2 2 1 1 1 Event 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 1 4 2 2 1 1 5 2 2 2 1 Sounds On 2 2 2 Internal Siren 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 1 4 2 2 2 2 Short Blast On 2 2 2 3 Output Signal Type 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 22 223 2 2 2 2 4 Phone Line Cut Alarms Arm Disarm Communications Keypads Sirens Tamper Fault Tests Miscellaneous 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 1 1 4 2 2 1 1 1 5 2 2 1 1 1 6 2 2 1 1 1 7 2 2 1 1 1 8 Time Unit Time Partitions 2 2 1 1 5 1 Latched 2 2 1 1 5 2 Code Stops Timer 2 2 1 1 5 3 Only if Closed 2 2 1 1 5 4 Only if Open 2 2 1 1 5 5 Inverted 2 2 1 1 5 6 External Siren 2 2 2 1 1 1 When Armed 2 2 2 1 1 2 When Disarmed Attributes Tampers Expander Trouble
320. selected receiver A menu option that specifies the normal supervision window for RF devices RF devices on 868 MHz typically report every 15 minutes Depending on the country regulations this timer must be set to specific values A menu option used for configuring a sensor For actual setting description see the particular sensor manual For example in case of a keyfob it enables the keyfob function 1 see below A menu option used for configuring a sensor For actual setting description see the particular sensor manual For example in case of a keyfob it enables the keyfob function 2 see below A menu option used for configuring a sensor For actual setting description see the particular sensor manual A menu option that specifies the way the output is timed If set to Yes the output will latch until a code is entered When set to No the output is timed according to Time setting Note Do not set up this option for system status events such as Ready to Arm Not Ready to Arm Armed Disarmed because once the output is triggered it will not reset to reflect current status unless the user code is entered A menu entry that groups programmable options for IO modules A menu entry that lists the partitions assigned to the selected keyfob The selected keyfob can trigger an event on these partitions A zone may reside in any combination of partitions A zone that resides in more than one partition becomes a common z
321. ser can arm the system by simply pressing the Arm Away Arm Stay or Night Mode button otherwise it is necessary to enter the user code first To arm a system in the Away mode with a single partition keypad it is enough to enter the user code 2 5 1 2 1 2 Re exit A menu option that enables the exit delay without disarming the partition The exit delay can be restarted if in arm stay mode by using the Arm Away command in the user menu or by pressing a function key programmed by the installer to activate arm away 2 5 1 2 1 3 Silent Auto Arm A menu option that arms the partition automatically at a preset time without the keypad buzzer sounding 2 5 1 2 1 4 Automatic Instant A menu option that enables the automatic instant feature of entry zones If no exit is detected the entry exit zone is not opened and closed after the partition is armed the entry delay timer is cancelled creating an instant zone If the exit is detected the user leaves the premises after arming the partition the entry timer stays active creating an entry delay 2 5 1 2 1 5 Final Set Door A menu option applicable for secondary entry exit zones only zones with Delay 2 option set If the final set door option is enabled the exit time will immediately expire as soon as the secondary entry exit zone becomes ready again the door is opened and closed when the user leaves the premises This feature can only be used in combination with magnetic door contac
322. serial connector 7 Connect the cable to the NX 586E direct connect module 8 Using stripped wires connect the cable with alligator clips to a NetworX V3 panel as follows e Red to POS e Black to COM e Green to DATA Connecting the NX 586E to a PC and a panel Connect the NX 586E direct connect module to the serial port of the PC and the panel as shown in the previous section NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 245 Figure 30 Connecting the NX 586E to a PC and a panel Connecting the NX 586E to a panel Connect the cable with alligator clips to a NetworX V3 panel as follows Red to POS Black to COM e Green to DATA Programming the NX 586E direct connect module Figure 31 NX 586E menu structure Files 2 4 13 1 1 2 Panel to File Same as above 13 1 1 3 File to Panel 13 1 13 2 1 13 2 The control panel s programming memory can be copied to one of the four programming memories in the NX 586E direct connect module and vice versa You must enrol and default the module before you begin to program the system For more information on enrolling and defaulting see Chapter B7 Enrolling modules 246 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual To program the NX 586E using the NX 1048 keypad select Installer Menu gt NX 586E Direct Connect Module To program the NX 586E using a PC start the DL900 up download software on the PC Note It is recommended to up download data when the keypa
323. sessssscssessseeessecsssecsseesseesssecsssssssecsseceseeesses 215 HONET TEO AP E EE EE E EE O 216 CEE 216 GSM GPRS module location based programming worksheets i 225 Chapter B7 Enrolling modules o ooomommsse 235 o o er ere ve PvE en ST Ten en er ee ere 235 Dies ele lit are ine Module ta 235 CIRO ORO IN 236 Chapter B8 Reading the event log o oocoonomommmosie 237 A o P T O E E E Io cence nO Re ne Rr er E E e ee 237 LOI EA REA IA 238 A A 242 Chapter B9 NX 58GE cccccsscssssssrssssssssssccssessecsersssessesesesesseessesssesesesesesessnesesesesssssesssesssesesesesscssesesesess 243 CV TI 243 Connecting the NX 586 directconnect mod le ssassn 243 Connecting the NX 586E to d PC esas 243 Connecting the NX 586E to a PC and a PON 244 Connecting the NX 586E to G POR 245 Programming the NX 586E direct connect Moqdule ssssss ssssssisrssessssssssssssssssssirrrersrsssssssssssrsterrrrrrrrrrsrsesas 245 Enabling memory transfer using the keypad ou eeeccesssessssessssesssesssssesssssssecssessssecssecessecsseesssecsseessseeen 246 Panel to PC memory transfer using DL900 SOM WAS usina 246 Writing data from the DL900 software to the NK 586E ii i 247 Reading data from the NX 586E to the DL900 software mnccoccacccocuniononinanionnnnnioneconncnnrennaos 247 Location programming TON the NA 98O Escasa esta 247 8 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual q A een nT RN ee 248 espe Specie 249 Chapter
324. set the override options in Control Panel gt Communications gt Custom Format to build the appropriate format In addition select Format Override in Communications gt Central Station gt Phone Numbers gt Phone Number n gt Protocol The voice dialer protocol does not generate an FTC failure to communicate Ca IG 6 a ia de 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 264 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Appendix 4 Service messages The keypad displays service messages as a result of manual and automatic tests Table 48 Service messages lists each message and outlines the action you should take to resolve the problem When the keypad beeps due to a fault condition press the key to view the fault condition information After pressing the key faults are displayed in the particular order The order is as following 1 Panel overcurrent 2 Siren trouble 3 Box tamper 4 Fail to communicate 5 Line fault 6 Loss of time 7 Mains fault 8 Low battery 9 Remote over current 10 Remote fail to communicate 11 Remote low battery 12 Remote box tamper 13 Expansion trouble 14 Remote siren fault 15 RF jam 16 Zone problem 17 Bus fault Table 48 Service messages Message Definition Action Panel There has been interference with the Ensure that the casing is mounted correctly on a Box Tamper control panel casing flat surface and Is not damaged If there is no damage close the casing securely Panel The control panel tried to se
325. sounder to activate when an expander trouble condition occurs 1 Ensure the advanced menu is enabled 2 Navigate with the NY keys to Control Panel gt Outputs gt Keypads gt Sound On and press OK 3 Scroll to Expander Trouble gt Enabled and press OK 4 The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Expander Trouble Assigning codes Figure 17 Installer codes menu 2 3 1 4 6 Digit Codes 2 3 3 Duress Code 2 3 2 2 Authority 2 3 2 2 1 Arm Only After Closing Guard Codes 16 17 2 3 2 2 2 Arm Only User Auth for Progrm 2 3 2 2 3 Arm Disarm 2 3 2 2 4 Master Code 2 3 2 2 5 Bypass Zones 2 3 2 2 6 Reports Open Close 2 3 2 23 2 1 mae Partitions System codes can be either four or six digits long This menu allows to program change the installer code and the duress code A duress code disarms the system and activates a duress alarm This is a silent alarm that sends a special report to the central station To program codes select Installer Menu gt Control Panel gt Codes Note For EN INCERT compliance system access ID needs to be in 6 digit format Setting up the installer code An installer code may have associated arming options and access rights To set the authority and access rights you must enable the advanced menu The following example assigns partitions and 2 to a new installer code that can be used only to arm the system 1 Ensure the advanced menu is enabled
326. sounds a burglary siren when a zone is activated 2 1 3 1 4 2 Steady Siren Fire A menu option that sets whether a zone type activates a fire or a burglary siren 2 1 3 1 4 3 Audible Keypad A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer when an alarm occurs 2 1 3 1 4 4 A menu option that sets whether a zone type activates a chime A chime is generally a single stroke signal and is often used as an indication on a shop door This can be set as a zone type There is a beep on chime activation and no beep on deactivation Reporting A menu entry that groups reporting options for the selected zone type 2 1 3 1 5 1 Local Only A zone characteristic that causes that zone not to report alarms to the central station Locally the sirens are activated according to the other zone type characteristics This option is visible only if the Keyswitch input type option is disabled 2 1 3 1 5 2 Restore Reporting A menu option that causes restore events to be reported to the central station 2 1 3 1 5 3 Dialer Delay A menu option that sets the length of time in seconds the dialer waits before reporting an abortable alarm If the system is disarmed during this time the abortable alarm is not sent to the central station The delay can be from 0 255 seconds A value of O means that there is no abort delay 74 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition 2 1 3 1 5 4 Listen in A menu option that sends a report to the cen
327. ss keypad Each of these three values must range from 001 to 255 If any typed value is incorrect the keypad displays the blank SysID KID1 KID2 prompt again The combination of unique panel and wireless keypad identifiers is required in order a wireless keypad is to communicate with the appropriate panel only In case multiple wireless keypads are used on the same panel each wireless keypad should have different KID1 and KID2 values 8 At the EncKey prompt enter a 24 digit encryption key and press OK This encryption key is to secure the wireless communication link between the panel and wireless keypad s and is unique for each panel Any 24 digit value can be entered The same encryption key must be entered in case other wireless keypads are enrolled NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 33 9 The keypad communicates with the panel and sends data entered in steps 3 to 8 The Learn in Mode message displays briefly 10 The keypad is learned in and displays the System Ready message Important You should not program zero only strings for example 000 as values for SysID KID1 KID2 nor Encryption Key as it will make the keypad non operational Note If the learned in keypad s configuration stored in the RF receiver differs from the actual keypad s configuration the RF receiver will start the configuration copying process It takes a couple of seconds and during this process the keypad displays the Copying message During this oper
328. ssage over the GSM network Serial Number An Options setting that displays the serial number of the GSM modem used by the NX 7002 It is used for diagnostics only 223 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Term Definition SIA Securities Industry Association reporting protocol SIA Comb d Evts A menu entry that sets SMS reporting options so that events for separate account codes can be sent in the same message SIA partition mods A menu entry that allows partition modifiers to identify partitions SIA Single Evts A menu entry that sets SMS reporting options so that events are grouped and sent as separate messages to separate account codes SIM card PUK code See PUK code SIM PIN Accepted An Options setting that indicates that the PIN number for the SIM card has been entered correctly SIM PIN Code An Options setting that configures the code used to enrol the SIM card on the GSM network SIM PUK Required An Options setting that indicates that the SIM card has been blocked and a PUK code must be entered to unblock it Put the card into a mobile phone and enter the PUK code When the card has been unblocked put it back into the GPRS module Siren Line Cut and A Reporting setting that sends a report to the selected report control when a siren or phone fault Restores occurs A restore report is sent when the fault is fixed Site Address A Reporting menu option that contains the site address Site Initiated An Up download setti
329. stallation Manual 45 Word library The word library is a predefined collection of words that speeds up text editing As you type a character the keypad automatically displays a matching word The word library 1s enabled by default For a complete list of words in the word library see Appendix 6 Word library words To accept the word press F5 The cursor moves to the end of the new word and you can continue to enter text o To create a shortened version of the word press F5 to accept the word The cursor moves to the end of the new word Move the cursor to the first unnecessary character and press Y to delete the end of the word o To reject the word continue entering text as normal o Press the AV keys to scroll through the list of word library words To disable the word library 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Word Library and press OK The current state of the word library is displayed In this case it 1s enabled Use the ANY keys to change the state to disabled and press OK a The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Word Library Note In case of wireless keypads user texts user names zone names etc are copied from the keypad to the RF receiver first and then sent to the target keypad or one by one to consecutive keypads It takes some time and can sporadically affect other communication with the source target keypad including false state of the range indicator and or status icons It is a
330. sult the siren s manual for details 6 Wait until the LED on the IO module board blinks for 0 5 second 7 Trip the siren s tamper switch simulating the closing of the housing for at least 0 5 second and maximum of 5 seconds and release the tamper again 8 The LED on the IO module will blink for 1 second and the keypad beeps once to confirm the siren is programmed 9 The siren is learned in Insert the batteries powering the siren 1f necessary and close the siren housing Any new IO module is learned in by default as a universal siren 1 e its both outputs are triggered by the Any Siren event In order to program it as a burglary only or a fire only siren you have to select appropriate triggering event 1 e Burglary Siren or Fire Siren under RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Outputs gt I O x Output y gt Event Note For a detailed description of the steps required to install the particular siren see the siren s installation manual Note You can delete a siren using the Del RF Device menu option Configuring receiver features Configurable receiver features include tampers and communication errors The following example enables RF jamming detection on RF receiver 32 RF communication is considered to be jammed when there has been a jamming signal for more than 30 seconds in a 60 second window 1 Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 gt Receiver Features and press OK 2 Scroll to Jam Detection gt En
331. t n gt Destination and press OK Enable the autotest report on the panel phone events and panel system events Ensure the reporting format on the reporting device is the same as that set on the GSM GPRS reporting device 200 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual If the GSM GPRS module is used for secondary reporting another reporting device for example a reporting device on the panel is the primary reporting device The GSM GPRS module is only used as a reporting device if the primary reporting device fails You should Navigate with the AV keys to NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Report n gt Backup Destination and press OK Ensure the reporting format on the reporting device is the same as that set on the GSM GPRS module Secondary Reporting The GSM GPRS module acts as backup for another dialer It reports the event when the control panel or other dialer fails to report GSM GPRS module as backup SMS GPRS Control panel The report control monitors the control panel and reports the selected events if the control panel fails to report them Set a report control to Report When gt Panel Dialer Problem Program the first report destination and report format NX 590 The NX 590 is a TCP IP auxiliary dialer When it fails to report it sends an expansion event which the NX 7002 reports Set a report control to Report When gt Report Always Enable Test Report events only Prog
332. t 3 contains the tens digit of the Expander Trouble Restore Segment 4 contains the ones digit of the Expander Trouble Restore For a 3 1 format only the segment digit resp segment 3 digit tens will be sent 120 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOCATION 75 FAIL TO COMMUNICATE COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 75 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format that will be sent if the Fail To Communicate Reporting is enabled Segment 1 contains the tens digit and segment 2 contains the ones digit For a 3 1 format only the segment digit tens will be sent LOCATION 76 LOG FULL COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 76 contains the tens and ones digits for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if the Log Full Reporting is enabled Segment contains the tens digit and segment 2 contains the ones digit For a 3 1 format only the segment 1 digit tens will be sent LOCATION 77 OPENING COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 8 segments numerical data Location 77 contains the tens digit for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if Opening Reporting is enabled The ones digit is the ones digit of the user number that did the opening If the user is greater than 9 the numbers will begin repeating e g code 6 6 code 45 5 This location contains 8 segments Any segment left as 0 will follow the segment
333. t Time 1 10 Use the ANY keys to change the status to enabled and press OK 11 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Exit Time 1 12 Scroll to Keypad Features gt Advanced Options gt Buzzer On Exit gt Exit Time 2 13 Use the NW keys to change the status to disabled and press OK 14 The keypad beeps once to accept the change and returns to Exit Time 2 This setting will cancel the final confirmation beep at the end of the exit time and cause the keypad to beep slowly for the first 10 seconds and then to beep fast for the last 10 seconds of the exit delay countdown Note This option works for the Arm Away mode only for the Arm Stay mode the keypad is always silent The keypad buzzer behaviour depends on both Buzzer On Exit gt Exit Time 1 and Buzzer On Exit gt Exit Time 2 settings and is described in the following table 164 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Table 20 Behaviour of the keypad buzzer based on the Buzzer On Exit settings example ET1 10s ET2 20s Expect 20 s slow beep confirmation beep ET1 20s ET2 10s Expect ET1 10s ET2 10s Expect 10 s slow beep confirmation beep Glossary Location Term Definition This Keypad A menu entry that groups the settings of the current keypad It allows resetting of the keypad configuration of keypad features and verification of software version and models 3 Keypad Number A menu option that sets the keypad number within the partition T
334. t condition is fixed 79 80 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term 2 4 1 1 1 6 4 Communications 2 4 1 1 1 6 4 1 Fail to Communicate 2 4 1 1 1 6 4 2 Test Reports 2 4 1 1 1 6 5 1 Program Download 2 4 1 1 1 7 Partitions to Report Partition Account Codes Dialer Auto Cancel Abort 2 4 2 1 Callback Phone Number 2 4 2 2 Download Access Code 2 4 2 3 Call Back Reqd 2 4 2 4 Rings to Answer Definition A menu entry that groups together the communication events that are reported to the selected phone number A menu option that reports a fail to communicate event to the selected phone number A menu option that sends a test report to the selected phone number at pre programmed intervals The units can be set in days or hours A menu option that reports programming and up download events to the selected phone number A menu option that specifies which partitions are reported to the selected phone number Important When you select a partition ALL events from this partition are reported to the assigned central station and individual event settings selected in the Events section are disregarded If you want to select individual events to be reported to the particular phone number do not set any partitions in this location A menu option that lists the account codes for each partition The account code is sent when the relevant partition is reported A menu option that makes th
335. t is with Auto Bypass delayed during entry and exit delay times This zone will bypass automatically if enabled by the Group Bypass command Instant This zone creates an instant alarm whenever it is tripped and the system is armed 24 Hour Silent Creates an instant silent alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel It will not display on the keypad This zone is not abortable but it can be bypassed Fire Indicates a fire zone This zone cannot be bypassed The system will rapidly flash the Fire symbol on the keypad and sound the steady siren each time the zone is shorted To acknowledge the fire alarm a user must enter the user code After the alarm has been cancelled the Fire symbol still displays on the keypad until a user selects the Detector Reset menu option from the Quick User or User menu Entry Exit 2 A trip will start entry delay 2 Absence of a trip during the exit delay will enable the automatic bypass or instant mode if so programmed 24 Hour Audible Creates an instant audible alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel It will Supervised display on the keypad This zone is not abortable and cannot be bypassed Keyswitch This zone type will arm and disarm the partition or partitions of the control panel where it is Momentary resident every time the zone state changes for a short time from R to 2R for example the Door Window Switch is momentarily opened and then closed Keyswitch arming will r
336. t of current being drawn from one of its outputs and has disabled the output as a means of protection The mains power supply is not connected to an expansion module power supply The connection to an expansion module s siren is broken An expansion module or keypad is not reporting to the control panel There is a problem with the wiring or the sensor is damaged There is a problem with a zone or zones Press OK to identify the zone s and the problem condition One of the following messages is displayed when you press OK Networx Version 3 Installation Manual Action The battery may need replacing This may be a temporary condition caused by a long power failure Check the system for wiring faults An overcurrent message can be reset only by triggering the siren correctly for example by generating a tamper on a zone that activates the sirens This is a security feature to ensure that the overcurrent message has disappeared and the sirens can work properly again Ensure that the phone line is connected properly Use a test phone to check proper service Reconnect the power supply and ensure it is working properly Repair the open circuit Ensure that the phone line is connected properly Use a test phone to check that the phone service is available Ensure that the central station phone number account and protocol options are correct Check that the module is connected and working Ensure that th
337. t the keypad number of the keypad you want to delete RF Keypad 2 and press OK 4 The keypad number 2 1s deleted and all its programming information is removed from memory Note You cannot delete the currently used wireless keypad the one used for programming Note After deleting the wireless keypad you have to default it to clear any existing settings To do this press F1 6 Down Arrow simultaneously for a few seconds The wireless keypad can only be brought back to defaults to initiate the startup process if it is not in the range of an active NetworX V3 panel i e the signal strenght icon must show X Learning in IO modules In order to add a wireless siren or IO module to the system perform the following steps 1 Enter the programming mode on the keypad navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers and press OK Note It is recommended to not learn any devices from a keypad which belongs to a partition different then Partition 1 2 Select the relevant module bus ID and press OK For example you can select RF Receiver 32 which is a built in receiver on the NetworX V3 panel board 3 Select Learn RF Device gt Learn Siren IO and then select the new siren IO module number Siren IO 3 to 4 and press OK 4 Select Internal Siren and press OK The panel starts the learning in procedure and the Learn in Mode message 1s displayed on the keypad s 5 Power up the IO module by connecting a battery pack or inserting batteries cons
338. te SirenSTeleshoreFak d 00600080 fC SMe test repors ar STE program Download Glogful 00000000 SSM Torpers Gonesond bo 00000000 SSCS SCO storciu ro segment 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STRSTR sensor Low Batey 00000000 TF esvander Trouble inc keypad 00000000 SSS segment 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Segment 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 Segment 16 reserved rr O E O o o CONTROL 5 18 BACKUP DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT MO ae CONTROL 5 19 O ee TEA Alors and Restores 00000000 Segment 2 Open close ar segments ETS MIO 7710 Segment 4 zone rose ao Segment 5 Power Trouble AC Failure Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A Batt SISI sven siclephione fat 00000600 Segment 7 test repors oooooooo segmente program Download Glogful 00000000 SSIS tampers Gonesond bo 0000 0000 segment 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Kole 2 O m mm 228 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual LOC DESCRIPTION DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA segment 11 Sensortost 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A sensor Low Batey 00000000 S segment 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STE i Foire To communicate 00000000 C ceomentis Zone Activity Monitoring a segment 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 6 BACKUP DESTINATION SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 6 REPORT DELAY FOR REPORT CONTROL 6 EVENT SELECTION FOR REPORT CONTROL 6 BY PARTITION segment 1 00000000 Segment 2 cpevicose oooooooo Segment bo
339. ted CID Contact ID reporting protocol Communications A Reporting menu entry that groups together the communication events that are reported to the selected report control 218 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Term Definition Connection Fault An Options menu entry that groups connection fault options A connection fault occurs when the module cannot log into the GSM network Connection Type An Up Download menu entry that selects a CSD or GPRS connection Contact ID A Reporting menu entry that selects the Contact ID protocol Control Panel A Reporting setting that configures the maximum time during which the control panel must report an Timeout event If the NX 7002 report control is configured for secondary reporting and the control panel does not report the event during this time the report control reports the event This can be from 1 to 255 seconds If set to 0 the setting is disabled CSD Circuit Switched Data This is a communication format used to upload download data It is similar to a modem but it is wireless and built in to the NX 7002 An Options menu entry that groups CSD connection options Current Operator An Options setting that displays the name of the automatically or manually selected GSM network operator This setting is valid only when the NX 7002 is logged into the GSM network D Destination A Reporting setting that configures the report destination for the selected report control DHCP Assigned IP
340. tem will not accept a command Any attempt to register or set up a HomeText user without assigned user code will cause sending the Unauthorised access denied SMS message by the system Note Setup phone 1 and then use the SMS commands to register more phones User number NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt HomeText gt Users gt HomeText User n gt System Control gt User Number Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt HomeText gt System Control gt Home Text Control gt Enable Enable HomeText Control Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt HomeText gt Users gt HomeText User Set up the user n gt System Control gt Password password Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt HomeText gt System Control gt Password Always Required gt Enable The user must enter a password before sending a HomeText command Commands are accepted only from HomeText phone numbers Select NX 7002 Module gt Options gt HomeText gt System Control gt Only Registered Phones gt Enable Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt HomeText gt Registered Phone Access gt Users n Allow the user to send HomeText commands from Note Only users included on this list are granted rights to send a registered phone only HomeText commands to the system Removing a user from this list suspends all user s rights to send HomeText commands including Any Phone Access privileges 206 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Report type Information Menu Option requir
341. ter your installer code For a list of default codes see the Country codes section 2 Use the ANY keys to navigate the menu The full menu map can be found in the Menu Structure included in your language kit The light menu is in green text and the advanced menu is in black text 3 Select OK to select an option or use the numerical character keys to edit the existing option Note The light installer menu is displayed by default To switch to advanced menu navigate to Installer Menu gt Maintenance Mode gt Advanced and select Enabled The keypad displays the advanced menu until this option is disabled Changing the user interface language 1 Press OK at the system prompt 2 Press OK again to display the system prompt in a different language 3 Press OK until you find the language you require 4 Continue using the keypad as normal Note When the NetworX V3 is powered up for the first time only the single language selected during keypad installation is available To toggle the user interface language the available languages must be defined first Installer Menu gt This Keypad gt Set KP Language gt Language 1 to 4 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 41 Navigating the menus Press the AV keys to scroll through menu lists and options Press to move to the same menu item for the previous option For example if you are in a submenu for zone 2 press 48 to move to the same submenu for zone 1 Press Y to move
342. the arm disarm state of the system It is permanently active 24 hours a day unless bypassed by forced arming An example of a 24 hour zone is a fire panic or glassbreak zone 2 1 3 1 1 3 A zone type that can be used to arm or disarm a partition using a switch connected to a zone instead of a code Both pulsed and maintained keyswitches can be used Keyswitch 2 1 3 1 1 4 Delay 1 A zone type whose events can be delayed for a specified interval before a zone creates an alarm This type of zone is usually used to allow exit and entry to a building The time intervals for a Delay 1 zone are defined in Entry 1 and Exit L 2 1 3 1 1 5 Delay 2 A zone type whose events can be delayed for a specified interval before a zone creates an alarm This type of zone is usually used to allow exit and entry to a building The time intervals for a Delay 2 zone are defined in Entry 2 and Exit 2 2 1 3 1 1 6 Interior A zone type that is automatically bypassed when the system Is armed in stay mode 72 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition 2 1 3 1 1 7 Entry Guard A zone type that reduces false alarms If an armed entry guard zone is opened the keypad sounder activates and the entry delay starts before creating an alarm This can be programmed as a zone type 2 1 3 1 1 8 Cross Zone A zone type that requires two or more trips within a specified time before it will report an alarm 2 1 3 1 1 9 Trouble A zone type that s
343. the ones digit of the zone number e g zone 12 2 zone 44 4 This location contains 4 segments Any segment left as 0 will follow the Segment 1 selection Segment 1 Partition 1 Sensor Low battery Code Segment 2 Partition 2 Sensor Low battery Code Segment 3 Partition 3 Sensor Low battery Code Segment 4 Partition 4 Sensor Low battery Code LOCATION 61 SENSOR MISSING COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 4 segments numerical data Location 61 contains the event code for a zone Sensor missing for a 4 2 and 3 1 format For a 4 2 format the digit programmed in this location will be sent as the tens digit of the sensor missing event NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 117 code The zone ID will always be reported as the ones digit of the zone number e g zone 12 2 zone 44 4 This location contains 4 segments Any segment left as 0 will follow the Segment 1 selection Segment 1 Partition 1 Sensor Missing Code Segment 2 Partition 2 Sensor Missing Code Segment 3 Partition 3 Sensor Missing Code Segment 4 Partition 4 Sensor Missing Code LOCATION 62 DURESS COMMUNICATOR CODE SLOW SPEED FORMATS ONLY 2 segments numerical data Location 62 contains the tens and ones digits that will be sent for a 4 2 and 3 1 format if the duress code is enabled in location 44 Segment 1 contains the tens digit and segment 2 contains the ones digit For a 3 1 format o
344. the relevant menu option and press OK 2 The current value for the menu option is displayed for example Enabled 3 Press the NY keys to change the value for example change Enabled to Disabled 4 Press OK to accept the change o If the new value is valid the keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to the menu option 42 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual If the new value is invalid the keypad beeps three times to reject the change and returns to the menu option 5 Press NO to cancel the change and return to the menu option Changing binary entries 1 Navigate with the NY keys to the relevant menu option and press OK Ze The current value for the menu option is displayed for example 2 3 8 means that 1 2 3 and 8 are on included while 4 5 6 and 7 are off excluded 3 Press the corresponding numerical key to change a value for example press 1 to change the state of 1 to off and press 4 to change the state of 4 to on The display changes to 2 3 4 8 4 Press OK to accept the changes If the new values are valid the keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to the menu option If the new value is invalid the keypad beeps three times to reject the change and returns to the menu option 5 Press NO to cancel the changes and return to the menu option Changing numeric entries 1 Navigate with the NY keys to the relevant menu option and press OK 2 The current
345. the wireless zone module is receiving power and has not been tampered with Repair any faults Replace the battery Ensure that the wireless zone module is receiving power and has not been tampered with Repair any faults NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 267 Appendix 5 Tasks summary Users with different rights are allowed to perform different tasks in the system Table 49 System tasks lists each task Black fields indicate tasks that cannot be performed at the particular level while white fields indicate allowed actions Checkmarks denote tasks that can be performed conditionally and conditions required are explained in the Condition column Table 49 System tasks Task Installer Master user User No code Condition Adjusting the LCD contrast Answer an up download call Arm and disarm the If authority allows see settings in system the Authority menu group If the 2 4 2 7 Require Code for Download menu option is set to No If the keypad is in a single partition mode and the 2 5 2 1 1 Quick Arm menu option is set to Yes you can arm without entering the user code just by pressing the F3 F4 or F7 function key Ha Va Y If authority allows see settings in the Authority menu group If enabled for master users i e if the 2 6 2 4 2 User Code Resets Tamper Memory menu option is set Configure home automation devices Control home automation devices Engineer tamper
346. ting RF devices from the system Del RF Keypad A menu entry that allows to delete the selected RF keypad Del RF Sensor A menu entry that allows to delete the selected RF sensor zone Del RF Sir I0 A menu entry that allows to delete the selected RF siren or IO module Door Window A RF Receiver menu option that configures door window settings on an RF receiver It includes the use of internal reed and additional external contact of the door windows transmitters Enabled A menu entry that enables disables the selected sensor Event Selects the event that will trigger the output See Table 22 for the specific events that can be selected Term External Contact Fire Supervision Fire Window Global Siren House Code I O Output User Auth Inputs Internal Reed Jam Detection Keyfob Keyfob Disarming Keyfob Funct 1 Keyfob Funct 2 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 183 Definition A menu option on an RF door window sensor that enables an additional external contact When the external contact is triggered an alarm is generated on the same zone number as the door window sensor reed contact itself A menu option that specifies that the receiver uses the fire supervision timing window A menu option that specifies the RF supervision to be used for RF smoke fire detectors The RF smoke fire detectors send a supervision every 64 minutes A menu option that specifies whether the output
347. tion data Location 28 is used to select the partition s in which zones 9 16 reside A zone may reside in any combination of the 4 partitions If a burglary zone resides in more than 1 partition that zone will only be active when all the partitions are armed A zone that resides in more than 1 partition will be reported to its lowest partition Location 28 has 8 segments Segment corresponds to zone 9 and Segment 8 corresponds to zone 16 Segment 1 8 1 Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 4 Partition 4 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 107 LOCATION 29 ZONES 17 24 CONFIGURATION GROUP 8 segments numerical data Location 29 contains the configuration group zone type for zones 17 24 Segment 1 is for zone 17 segment 8 is for zone 24 You will find the default configurations in the table above LOCATION 30 PARTITION SELECT ZONES 17 24 8 segments feature selection data Location 30 is used to select the partition s in which zones 17 24 reside A zone may reside in any combination of the 4 partitions If a burglary zone resides in more than 1 partition that zone will only be active when all the partitions are armed A zone that resides in more than partition will be reported to its lowest partition Location 30 has 8 segments Segment corresponds to zone 17 and segment 8 corresponds to zone 24 Segment 1 8 l Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 4 Partition 4 LOCATION 31 ZONES 25 32 CONFIGURATION GR
348. tition will be reported to 1ts lowest partition Segment 1 corresponds to zone 33 and segment 8 corresponds to zone 40 Segment 1 8 1 Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 4 Partition 4 LOCATION 35 ZONES 41 48 CONFIGURATION GROUP 8 segments of numerical data Location 35 contains the configuration group zone type for zones 41 48 Segment 1 is for zone 41 and segment 8 is for zone 48 You will find the default configurations in the table above LOCATION 36 PARTITION SELECT ZONES 41 48 8 segments feature selection data Location 36 is used to select the partition or partitions in which zones 41 48 reside A zone may reside in any combination of the 4 partitions If a burglary zone resides in more than 1 partition that zone will only be active when all the partitions are armed A zone that resides in more than 1 partition will be reported to its lowest partition Location 36 has 8 segments Segment 1 corresponds to zone 41 and segment 8 corresponds to zone 48 Segment 1 8 1 Partition 1 2 Partition 2 3 Partition 3 4 Partition 4 General options LOCATION 37 SIREN AND SYSTEM SUPERVISION 7 segments feature selection data Location 37 1s used to enable various system feature and reporting options Please note that since the I O module in the wireless siren acts as an output expander the wireless siren s behaviour is different than the BELL output s behaviour in some cases Segment 1 1 On if siren sounds for Te
349. to phone number 1 Phone N 1 has two programming locations that are used to select the events which are reported to this phone number Location 4 is used to select which events are reported to phone N 1 Location 5 is used to select which partitions are reported to phone N 1 If you do not want dual or split reporting use location 4 to select all events to phone N 1 and leave location 5 at the factory default of 0 If you want dual or split reporting and the split is based on the event type such as alarm open close etc you should use location 4 to select only those events that should be reported to phone N 1 and you should leave location 5 at the factory default of 0 If you want dual or split reporting and the split is based on partition you should program location 4 as a 0 and use location 5 to select those partitions that are to be reported to phone N 1 If no events are to be reported to phone N 1 both locations should be programmed as 0 LOCATION 4 EVENTS REPORTED TO PHONE N 1 2 segments feature selection data Segment 1 1 Alarms 2 Opening and closings 96 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 3 Zone bypass and bypass restores 4 Zone trouble and trouble restores 5 Power fail AC failure low battery power restore AC restore and low battery bestore 6 Bell cut bell cut restore telephone line restore Testreports 8 Start and end programming download complete and log
350. to the control panel indicating that the lock has been triggered Cross Trip Tripping the cross zone Data Lost The panel has been unable to send alarm messages to the central station The panel tries to send these messages a number of times as specified in the FTC dial attempts before Fail to Communicate Any pending reportable events are lost Device Tamper See Box Tamper event message Restore Device Tamper See Box Tamper event message Restore Disarm from Alarm A user disarmed the panel during an alarm Duress A duress code entered by a user An alarm message is sent to the central station Early Open A user disarmed the system before the open time specified in the panel schedules Exit Error An exit door remained open after the exit delay expired Expander Fault See Expander Trouble event message Restore Expander Trouble A problem with an expander module Expansion Event A bus device generated an event to report conditions not described by other events Fail to Communicate The control panel or module tried to send a message to a central station but failed Fault Restore See Trouble event message 239 240 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Event message Explanation A fire alarm has been tripped Fire Restore See Fire event message remi 2 Ground Fault See Ground Fault event message Restore A user disarmed the system after the closing time specified in the panel schedules Tele
351. tomatically after disarming an alarmed partition Faults are displayed according to their importance starting with the most important fault Tampers are displayed first then Alarm Memory Zone Open Zone Trouble Zone Lost and others For the exact fault order see Table 53 Fault descriptions below There is a possibility to scroll up down the fault list by using up down arrow keys If scrolling is possible arrows are displayed on the right side of the screen If there is only one fault and overriding is not possible no arrows are displayed When any fault is still active arming of the system is impossible and the fault must be fixed first or overriden if possible to allow the user to arm the system An active fault is displayed as emule Meme Active A non active but unconfirmed fault is displayed as Zawdi Meme O S a and can be confirmed by pressing OK When the system is armed overriding is not allowed and the following message is displayed instead Fault Name Tmact ave 279 280 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Non critical active faults can be overriden by the user without fixing them if necessary Non critical faults are Zone Open Zone Trouble Zone Lost Zone Low Battery Panel Mains Fault RF Jammed and others Non critical faults indicate problems that should be fixed but they do not prevent arming after overriding Critical faults cannot be overriden by the user Critical faults are Panel Box Tamper
352. ton starts the Arm Away mode Note It is an equivalent of Option 1 above and it can be set in either place A menu option that enables the button on the keyfob for the selected RF zone on the selected RF receiver If this option is enabled pressing the button sends a keyfob function 2 event Control panel auxiliary outputs and Nx 507E NX 508E outputs can be programmed to respond to this event If this option is disabled pressing the button starts the Arm Stay mode Note It is an equivalent of Option 2 above and it can be set in either place 184 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Term Keyfob User ID Learn RF Keypad Learn RF Sir lO Learn RF Zone Learn RF Device Log Event Model Normal Window Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Output Latched Outputs Partitions Partitions Definition A menu option that makes the keyfob report as the zone that it is learned into When this option is disabled all keyfobs report their open closing reports as user 99 A menu command that triggers the learn in mode for the RF keypad A menu command that triggers the learn in mode for the siren or IO module A menu command that triggers the learn in mode for the RF zone sensor A menu option that enables the mode in which a new wireless device is enrolled on the system A menu option that specifies whether the output switching on and off is logged A menu option that displays the model of the
353. tral station indicating that a listen in session must be started In order to use listen in a NX 534 E listen in module must be installed and a microphone must be connected When an alarm is generated and reported the central station can listen to what is happening on the premises Certain protocols such as SIA Contact ID and 200Bd FSK have listen in blocks that are communicated with the alarm code and indicate that a listen in session must be started Copy Zone Type A menu option that copies the settings for a zone type to a new zone type Outputs A menu entry that groups options relating to programmable outputs A menu entry that groups options that configure outputs Any occurrence such as system arming faults and alarms Prog Outputs Event A menu option that specifies which event activates an output 2 2 1 1 1 1 Alarms A menu option that groups together the alarm events that can be selected to trigger an output 2 2 1 1 1 2 Arm Disarm A menu option that groups the events that can be used to trigger outputs The entry is available to make selection of output events more convenient 2 2 1 1 1 3 Communications A menu option that groups together the communication events that can be selected to trigger an output 2 2 1 1 1 4 Keypads A menu option that groups the keypad events that trigger an output 2 2 1 1 1 5 Sirens A menu option that groups together the siren events that can be sel
354. trigger an event on these partitions A zone may reside in any combination of partitions A zone that resides in more than one partition becomes a common zone and is reported to its lowest partition number A common zone is armed only when all the partitions that it belongs to are armed It is disarmed the moment one of the partitions it belongs to is disarmed A menu option that copies the settings for an individual zone to a contiguous set of other zones Copy Zone A zone characteristic that includes the selected zone in the swinger counter for an partition Each partition has a swinger counter and every zone trip in that partition increments the swinger count for that partition When the count reaches the programmed number of trips the panel bypasses the last tripped zone and clears the counter Swinger Count An Inputs menu entry that contains the swinger count 2 1 3 Zone Types A menu entry that groups zone type characteristics and allows the installer to select a pre defined zone type There are 30 pre defined zone types The characteristics of each zone can be changed For example if a keypad beeps if the zone is a delay 1 or delay 2 zone a 24 hour zone and so on A menu entry that groups options that determine the basic features of the selected zone type 2 1 3 1 1 1 Fire A zone type that reports a fire alarm when activated 2 1 3 1 1 2 24 hour Input Type A zone type where reaction is not dependent on
355. trol panel Remove the battery for transport of the control panel 26 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Wiring guidelines The NetworX V3 has been designed assembled and tested to meet current standards for safety emission and immunity from environmental electrical and electromagnetic interference Only a qualified electrician or other suitably trained and qualified person should attempt to wire this system to the mains or to the public telephone network 1 Ensure that there is a good earth for the alarm system for effective resistance to electrical interference Provide an earth connection for the standalone telephone dialer 2 For mains power connection use the mains connector terminal either via permanent wiring or a doubly insulated flexible mains cable to an earthed mains outlet Always use cable ties to fix the mains cable at the dedicated fixing point provided near the mains terminal connector A CAUTION Never attempt to solder a mains connection wire s end where they will be wired to the terminal connectors 3 The battery used with the NetworX V3 must be made of materials of flammability class HB or better 4 The mains switching relay must not be fitted inside the control panel cabinet The minimum clearance between equipment closures is 50 mm between equipment vents Only use units in a clean environment and not in humid air Defaulting the panel Before installing and programming the system default the pan
356. ts Select NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Report Control gt Report 1 gt Backup Destination gt Other Dialer o Set a report control to Report When gt Report Always on the panel Enable the autotest report on the panel phone events and panel system events Ensure the reporting format on the dialer is the same as that set in NX 7002 Module gt Reporting gt Backup Format GSM CSD connection upload download call back from audio GSM CSD connection is a feature that lets you upload download without having to pay the extra cost of a CSD telephone number service Instead you call in on the audio telephone number to begin an upload download session Note Use the DL900 version that supports GSM downloading To begin an upload download session with the call back from audio feature enabled 1 Select NX 7002 Module gt Up Download gt U D Call Back after Voice Call gt Yes and press OK 2 Call the GSM GPRS module analog telephone number 3 Between two and ten seconds cancel the call 4 GSM GPRS module waits for ten seconds and then starts an upload download session To begin an upload download session with the call back from audio feature enabled and using the NX 534E in combination with GSM GPRS module 1 Call the GSM GPRS module analog telephone number 2 GSM GPRS module answers the call for the control panel and then hangs up 202 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 3 After the hang up the NX 7002 starts an uplo
357. ts 2 5 1 2 1 6 Instant Night A menu option that enables the instant Night mode selection from the keypad no toggle In this mode the control panel will bypass all zones that have the Entry Guard feature enabled and the partition will be armed without an exit delay The partition must be disarmed to cancel this mode 88 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Term Definition 2 5 1 2 1 7 Instant Stay Toggle A menu option that enables a toggled setting of the Arm Stay F4 function key toggling between Stay and Instant mode for a partition When this option is enabled pressing the F4 key once arms the system in the Stay mode Subsequently pressing the F4 key toggles the armed partition between the Stay mode and the Instant mode When this option is disabled toggling with the F4 key does not work and the F4 key can be used for arming the system in the Stay mode only Note In the master mode you can toggle only a single partition at the time 2 5 1 2 1 8 Arm with Tamper Mem FTC A menu option that allows to arm the partition even if previous tamper alarm indicators and or Failed To Communicate events have not been cleared from memory 2 5 1 2 1 9 Arm with Low Battery A menu option that allows to arm the partition even if the Battery Low event has been triggered 2 5 1 2 1 10 Keyswitch Arm Stay A menu option that allows to arm the partition in Stay mode with a keyswitch 2 5 1 2 1 11 Late to Close Early to Open
358. ues between 90 and 80 These are low values but the sensor will still work properly Values between 80 and 50 These are normal working values for sensor located at a longer distance from the receiver 6 Values smaller than 50 Perfect conditions RSSI Values may change due to environmental circumstances for example additional furniture or metal constructions The following example tests the RSSI value of zone 2 on receiver 32 1 Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 and press OK 2 Scroll to RSSI RF Device gt RF Sensors gt RF Zone 2 and press OK 3 The RSSI value is displayed on the keypad The following example tests the RSSI value of the RF keypad 3 on receiver 32 1 Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 and press OK 2 Scroll to RSSI RF Device gt RF Keypads gt RF Keypad 3 and press OK 3 The RSSI value is displayed on the keypad The following example tests the RSSI value of the RF siren IO module 2 on receiver 32 1 Navigate with the NY keys to RF Receivers gt RF Receiver 32 and press OK 2 Scroll to RSSI RF Device gt RF Sirens IO gt Siren IO 2 and press OK 3 The RSSI value is displayed on the keypad 182 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Disabling wireless sensors You can program a receiver to disable a wireless sensor This does not remove the sensor identification from the module s memory The wireless sensor can be reactivated later or a new sensor can b
359. ult the device s manual for details 6 Wait until the LED on the IO module board blinks for 0 5 second of Trip the IO module tamper switch simulating the closing of the housing for at least 0 5 second and maximum of 5 seconds and release the tamper again 8 The LED on the IO module will blink for 1 second ant the keypad beeps once to confirm the module is programmed 9 The IO module is learned in Close the IO module housing Note You can delete an IO module using the Del RF Device menu option Learning in wireless sirens In order to add a wireless siren to the system perform the following steps 1 Enter the programming mode on the keypad navigate with the AW keys to RF Receivers and press OK Note It is recommended to not learn any devices from keypad which belongs to a partition different then Partition 1 2 Select the relevant module bus ID and press OK For example you can select RF Receiver 32 which is a built in receiver on the NetworX V3 panel board NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 177 3 Select Learn RF Device gt Learn Siren IO and then select the new siren number Siren JO 1 to 4 and press OK 4 Depending on the siren type select Internal Siren or External Siren and press OK The panel starts the learning in procedure and the Learn in Mode message 1s displayed on the keypad s 5 Power up the IO module in the siren with tamper open by connecting a battery pack or inserting batteries con
360. ured to accept commands from unregistered phones and the user calls from the telephone unknown to the system If entering the phone number also a password is required For more information see the Registered Phone Access and the Any Phone Access menu option descriptions in the glossary A system can be set up to always use a password If so enter a password before the command Commands are instructions sent to the security system They are shown in bold below Values are information the user wants to send or receive from the system They are shown italicised between brackets below If you need to enter more than one value in a list they need to be separated by spaces For example to bypass zones 2 4 and 6 send the command bypass 2 4 6 To Do This Send This Explanation Example Get your system status status Sends the system status to status your phone Get your system status from an registered_phone_number Sends the system status to 32444123456 440044 status where unregistered phone if you have Password status your unregistered phone 32444123456 Is your registered phone Any Phone Access rights number NOT the number you are calling from and 440044 is your password Note You can also use this syntax adding the registered phone number and the password to the beginning of the command when sending any other command from an unregistered phone 214 NetworX Version 3 Installation To Do This Arm
361. uto Disarm A menu option that allows the control panel to auto disarm at a specified time Schedule Times A menu entry that groups entries related to automatic arming opening and closing schedules Opening A menu option that sets the time at which the selected schedule enters the open state At this time the control panel enables codes designated as Arm only after closing 94 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Location Definition Closing Autoarm A menu option that sets the time after which the partitions selected in Partitions Autoarming start to arm automatically Users with arm only after closing rights can arm the partitions selected in Partitions Opening only after this time Reset Settings A menu entry that groups entries related to default panel settings Country Code A menu option that sets a default country code for the panel Reset Settings A menu option that resets all the control panel settings to their factory defaults Switch to EN A menu option that switches the panel to the EN 50131 compatible settings For additional information about the EN 50131 norm see Appendix 7 Control panel programming locations Telephone number 1 LOCATION 0 PHONE N 1 20 segments numerical data The first telephone number is programmed in location 0 A 14 indicates the end of the phone number Delays of four seconds can be programmed at any point in the phone number by programming a 13 in the appr
362. value for the menu option is displayed for example 55 3 Do one of the following Press a number key to clear the current value and display the value of the key pressed Press to increase the current value by one o Press Y to decrease the current value by one e Press to clear the current value to 0 4 Press the number keys to enter the value 5 Press OK to accept the changes If the new value is valid the keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to the menu option If the new value is invalid the keypad beeps three times to reject the change and returns to the menu option 6 Press NO to cancel the changes and return to the menu option Changing phone numbers and phone prefixes M Navigate with the MY keys to the relevant menu option and press OK 2 The current value for the menu option is displayed for example 4567999 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 43 3 Do one of the following Press to toggle between insert mode and overwrite mode insert mode allows you to insert new numbers and overwrite mode allows you to overwrite existing numbers Press W to delete the number at the cursor position o Press to delete all the numbers from the number at the cursor position to the end of the string 4 Do one of the following Press the keys 0 to 9 to insert new numbers Press 0 to insert G to use the GSM instead of the PSTN Press 1 to insert a star Press
363. ven below for the output 1 pertain also to the respective locations for the outputs 2 to 8 Table 23 Output Location Segment 70 1 71 72 15 2 74 75 76 3 17 78 79 4 80 81 82 5 83 84 DMO E N e N PRP WN NF IN e N RP WN NFL IN FP N RP NWN N FTN e N RP WN N PAN RP N PRP WS DP N Type dec value dec value dec value option option hex value hex value dec value dec value dec value option option hex value hex value dec value dec value dec value option option hex value hex value dec value dec value dec value option option hex value hex value dec value dec value dec value option option hex value hex value dec value dec value RF receiver location map locations related to output events Description IO module Event number Zone user number Time Special configuration Partition X 10 unit code X 10 house code Event number ee Zone user number Time Special configuration Partition X 10 unit code X 10 house code Event number Zone user number Time Special configuration Partition X 10 unit code X 10 house code Event number meu Zone user number Time Special configuration Partition X 10 unit code X 10 house code Event number IO module 3 Zone user number Time Special configuration Partition X 10 unit code X 10 house code Event number Zone user number 188 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Output Location S
364. ven if it is shorter than 30 seconds Note If Screensaver is active also chime and function keys are disabled 274 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Keypad keypress tamper EN 50131 requires detection of repeated invalid authorisation attempts done with logical keys During code entering every entered digit is indicated by a number 1 2 3 etc in the right lower corner of a display A valid code must be entered within 60 seconds from the first keypress otherwise it is treated as invalid After 5 incorrect attempts the keypad gets disabled for 90 seconds During the Keypad Keypress Tamper all pressed keys are ignored This state is indicated on a display by information Keypad Locked If the Keypad Keypress Tamper occured then the Keypress Tamper event is logged with the partition number and the keypad ID The multipartition keypad also gets locked after 5 incorrect attempts The multipartition keypad with the Partition Keypress Tamper received from the control panel allows to operate on not locked partitions If not all partitions are locked locked partitions are indicated on a multipartition keypad by exclamation marks If the Keypad Keypress Tamper occured at the particular multipartition keypad or all keypad partitions are locked then Keypad Locked message is displayed and the whole keypad 1s disabled Incomplete Exit If during arming the Entry Exit zone for example an exit door is open at the end of the exit time
365. verrides Setting the TCP IP settings Setting the timed functions Setting up answering machine defeat Specifying the direct connect settings Viewing a customer record list Viewing the auto answer failures Viewing the control panel settings NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 255 Chapter B11 Updating firmware Overview You can upgrade the NetworX V3 system firmware if necessary Upgrading to a new version may be required in order to add a new functionality to the system add another language to the interface include additional menu options or to fix potential problems To upgrade the firmware you need the following e PC with Windows OS and NET Framework 2 0 installed e USB cable with a mini USB connector fitting the mini USB socket on the panel or the keypad board flash tool Flasher application and driver o upgrade files files with the fdk extension for the panel and or for appropriate system modules A CAUTION If the NX 9104 VVMIQ module is installed in the system before upgrading firmware disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the VVMIQ module with the control panel A CAUTION Do not connect the control panel or the keypad to the computer if the firmware upgrade software is not installed Update procedure 1 Install the flash tool Flasher application and a driver on the computer For more information see the installation instructions included with the Flasher application 2 Start installer mode in
366. will come from the chart below and 1t will be programmed in the configuration group event code Table 43 Reporting zone codes Contact ID Programmed Event Code Contact ID Description NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 261 Appendix 2 Overview of module numbers Every keypad expansion module and wireless receiver module has a module number Table 44 Module numbers Module Module number NX 507E NX 508E Output expander modules 24 31 Wireless receivers 32 39 Note NetworX V3 on board receiver has the address 32 lO Modules it includes wireless sirens 52 55 NX 534E Listen In Module NX 535 Voice Module NX 590E TCP IP Module NX 7002 GPRS Module 78 Note The Networx V3 may have a GSM GPRS interface on board NX 9104 VVMIQ Module NX 320 1 Auxiliary power modules 262 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual NX 1701E door swipe modules Table 45 NX 1701E module numbers Learn in sequence Module number Learn in sequence Module number Keypads Table 46 Keypad module numbers Keypad Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 3 Partition 4 1 192 193 194 195 200 201 202 203 ENS 208 210 211 250 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 263 Appendix 3 Communicator formats One of several communicator formats can be used to transmit to the receiver connected to phone number Consult the instructions for your central station receiver to determine which format is compatible Table 47 Communicato
367. window when the system is turned off the code does not arm the system Arm Only A menu option that specifies a code that arms the system and does not perform any other function For example the code issued to service staff Arm Disarm A menu option that specifies a four digit or six digit code that arms or disarms the system depending on its current status Master Code A menu option that specifies a code that can program other user codes provided it has access to the same partitions as the user code The user 1 code is the default master code Bypass Zones A menu option that allows the selected code to bypass zones Reports Open Close A menu option that specifies a code that reports arms close and disarms open to the central station 2 3 2 3 Partitions A Codes menu entry that lists the partitions assigned to the selected code The selected code can trigger an event on these partitions 2 3 3 Duress Code A menu option that sets the duress code A duress code disarms the system and activates a duress alarm This is a silent alarm that sends a special report to the central Station 2 3 4 GuardCodes 16 17 A menu option that sets the codes 16 and 17 as guard codes A Codes menu entry that groups installer code options In this case user codes 16 and 17 cannot be programmed or changed anymore via a master code They can only be changed via the up download software Guard code 16 will be able to arm disarm at
368. with zone status for all zones zone faults 1 to receive fault information from zones assigned to partition 1 zone faults all to receive the message with zone faults for all zones bypass zone list Bypasses the specified bypass 1 3 to bypass zones 1 and 3 zones Read events from the event log Set a connection to a home automation device Switch on X 10 outputs Switch off X 10 outputs Activate an auxiliary function Change your user code Change another user code Delete a user code Start reporting events number events range output output_number X10_house_code X10_unit n output list off output list switch aux output list user code new user code user code user number new user code Sends the specified event or events from the event log to the phone Connects a specified home automation device Switches on an X 10 output Switches off an X 10 output Changes the auxiliary function that occurs when it is activated for example by a button on a keyfob events 1 to read the last newest event from the panel log events 1 3 to read the last 3 events from the panel log events returns the 10 most recent events output 2 A 1 to set output two to control X 10 device with house code A and unit number 1 on 147 to switch on X 10 outputs 1 4 and 7 on all to switch on all X 10 outputs off 1 4 7 to switch off X 10 outputs 1 4 and 7 off all to switch off all X 10 outputs sw
369. y 16 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual Purpose Used for programming and using the system Wireless and Parts of the system Table 5 System modules Part number Description NX 1048 R W Wireless Menu LCD Keypad wired keypads can be used Menu LCD Keypad NX 1048 W wired Proximity card reader door control module You can program it NX 1701E Door swipe E module to control access in any or all partitions NX 320 I Auxiliary power Provides additional power for modules attached to a panel module Expands the number of outputs available on the system NX 507E NX Output expander 508E module Two way audio listen in communicator that allows the situation on the premises to be monitored Audio listen in module NX 534E Allows events to be reported using voice messages Voice module NX 535 Used as 1 A direct connect interface between the panel and PC 2 A storage device when connected only to the PC You can Direct connect also read write from 1 of the 4 locations via the DL900 NX 586E module downloader 3 A storage device connected only to the panel You can read write from 1 of the 4 locations on the NetworX V3 Dual microprocessor controlled Internet Intranet interface TCP IP Module NX 590E NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 17 Part number Description Purpose NX 7002 GPRS module Allows events to be reported via a GSM network or a GPRS network The
370. y default Note The characters B C D E F can be used in control panel account codes The letter A cannot be used as part of the code as it is a termination digit Table 11 Setting up reporting Level 1 Level 2 Phone Number Phone Number 1 123456 errar YO rre O rre O Frei im fi Fre iran mE e Freeman TO ee a O I Fromm atom mae Backup reporting Backup reporting configures the control panel to report to two or more central stations The first phone number belongs to the main central station and all other phone numbers belong to the backup central stations Events are reported to the first number but if the panel cannot reach this number it dials the backup number s The control panel makes two calls to each number in sequence It 48 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual performs the sequence for the number of times specified in Dial Attempts or until it receives a kiss off The same account code 1s used to report to all numbers Events for phone number 1 are enabled by default and events for phone numbers 2 3 are disabled by default If phone number 1 and phone number 2 are programmed the default sequence is 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 for a total of eight calls to each number Table 12 Backup reporting Level 1 Level 2 Value State nents mueres ae T femme mies ese O ene na Fri mien a rien O frome moneta ts a 2 fre de rs O a fs ren ama fosse Trotto e romee minzione uno Dual reporting
371. ystem is armed The following example fixes the wireless keypad to the wall 1 Navigate with the NY keys to Installer Menu gt This Keypad gt Keypad Features gt Pry Off Switch and press OK Scroll to Always Tamper gt Enabled and press OK The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Always Tamper Navigate with the NY keys to Only Arm AWAY if On the Wall and press OK Scroll to Enabled and press OK eS E a A The keypad beeps once to confirm the change and returns to Only Arm AWAY if On the Wall Battery replacement Wireless keypads hold four AA sized 2800 mAh cells for powering the keypad itself and two extra AA sized 2800 mAh cells for supplying power to the backlight The backlight cells are not supervised Typical operation defined as five arming and disarming cycles per 24 hours shall result in an expected battery lifetime of at least 3 years Fully configuring a typical installation through a wireless keypad will reduce battery lifetime by somewhere between 10 days and one month The wireless keypad has an operating battery compartment switch to protect the keypad s integrity As opposed to the backlight battery compartment the operating battery compartment can never be opened without creating a tamper alarm unless the user follows a proper procedure and the partition the keypad belongs to 1s disarmed Note Any unauthorized opening of the battery compartment will cause tamper alarm in the system When in installer
372. ystem is disarmed 24 HOUR AUDIBLE Creates an instant yelping siren alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel This zone type is not abortable This zone can be bypassed ENTRY EXIT DELAY 1 A trip will start entry delay 1 Absence of a trip during the exit delay will enable the Automatic Bypass or Instant mode if so programmed FOLLOWER WITH AUTO BYPASS DISABLED This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delays are being timed It is delayed during entry and exit delay times This zone will not bypass automatically even if enabled in segment 1 of location 23 INTERIOR FOLLOWER WITH AUTO BYPASS ENABLED This zone will be instant when the system is armed and no entry or exit delay is being timed It is delayed during entry and exit delay times This zone will bypass automatically if enabled in segment 1 of location 23 INSTANT This zone creates an instant alarm whenever it is tripped and the system is armed 24 HOUR SILENT Creates an instant silent alarm regardless of the arming state of the control panel It will not display on the keypad This zone is not abortable but can be bypassed Indicates a fire zone This zone cannot be bypassed The system will rapidly flash the Fire symbol on the keypad and sound the steady siren each time the zone is shorted To acknowledge the fire alarm a user must enter the user code After the alarm has been cancelled the Fire symbol still displays on th
373. ystem is disarmed Mains Failure A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer when the mains power supply fails Low Battery A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer when a low battery event occurs Cross Zone Verification A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer during a cross zone verification time Tampers A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer when a tamper occurs Expander Trouble A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer when an expander trouble condition occurs Emergency Keys A menu option that activates the keypad buzzer for emergency keys 2 3 1 4 6 Digit Codes A menu option that specifies whether a four or six digit code is used 2 3 2 Installer Code A four or six digit code used to program the system It specifies the partitions and parts of the system the installer can access It can also be used as a standard arm disarm code in which case it becomes user 255 NetworX Version 3 Installation Manual 77 Location Term Definition 2 3 2 1 Code A menu option that sets the user code This is a series of four or six numbers that allows access to the system 2 3 2 2 Authority A menu entry that groups access options These options specify the level of access an individual has when using the control panel Arm Only After Closing A menu option that specifies a code that arms the system during the close window only when the system is scheduled to be armed If entered during the open

Installation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents